text:
Subclass of:
370 - Multiplex communications
Patent class list (only not empty are listed)
Deeper subclasses:
|Class / Patent application number
|Number of patent applications / Date published
|Determination of communication parameters
|Fault detection
|Path check
|Using OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) cells
|Of a switching system
|Of a repeater
|UPD-BASED SOFT PHONE STATE MONITORING FOR CTI APPLICATIONS - A supervisor computer directly communicates, via User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets, with a call control application software in a soft phone. The UDP packets provide real-time information, from a desktop of the soft phone, describing call activity and usage status of the soft phone. The supervisor computer is able to remotely control usage of the soft phone according to information provided by the UDP packets.
|SCALABLE ARCHITECTURE FOR LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) MULTIPLE USER EQUIPMENT (MULTI-UE) SIMULATION - A system for scalably simulating multiple LTE UE devices includes an LTE multi-UE simulator. The simulator includes a common public radio interface (CPRI) module for receiving downlink data from an evolved node B (eNode B) under test and a downlink signal chain processing module including a common section for performing UE agnostic processing of the downlink data and a UE specific section for performing UE specific processing of the downlink data. The simulator further includes a control digital signal processor (DSP) for receiving the downlink data from the common section of the downlink signal chain processing module, for processing downlink data to obtain control information, and for forwarding the control information to the downlink signal chain processing module. The UE specific portion of the downlink signal chain processing module performs the UE specific processing using the control information.
|Determining Mean Opinion Scores (MOS) for Variable Bit Rate Audio Streams - Systems and methods for determining mean opinion scores (MOS) for variable bit rate (VBR) audio streams transmitted over VoIP networks are described. In an embodiment, a method may include monitoring a communication over a network and detecting portions of the communication including packets having a different packet payload sizes. The method may also include deriving bit rates corresponding to those portions. The method may then include calculating MOS values for each portion based on the derived bit rates, and calculating an overall MOS value for the communication based upon each individual MOS value averaged according to a distribution of packets having the different packet payload sizes.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PLANNING PORTS IN DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER LINE (DSL) NETWORK ELEMENTS - Example systems and methods for managing resources in broadband networks are disclosed. An example method for configuring a port of a digital subscriber line access multiplexor (DSLAM), the method including obtaining from a pre-defined configuration for the port a parameter indicating that a customer line termination port card is to be installed in the port, querying the DSLAM to determine a configuration state of the port, configuring the DSLAM with the parameter for the port when the port has not been configured, and reconfiguring the DSLAM with the parameter for the port when the port is incorrectly configured for a network line termination port card.
|Computer networks - A computer implemented method for analysing a connection between two computers. The method comprises generating output data indicating performance of the connection, the output data comprising a first predetermined number of data points, each data point having a value selected from a second predetermined number of discrete data values.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS THAT FACILITATES MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES IN MULTICARRIER OPERATION - Aspects directed towards measurement procedures in multicarrier operation are disclosed. In a particular aspect, a wireless terminal selects a subset of cells, which include at least one serving cell and at least one non-serving cell. The subset of cells are then evaluated by obtaining a first measurement associated with the at least one serving cell and a second measurement associated with the at least one non-serving cell. A measurement event occurrence, which is based on a comparison between the first measurement and the second measurement, is then monitored. An occurrence of the measurement event triggers a measurement report transmission, which the network then uses to perform handovers. Other disclosed embodiments are directed towards placing a reception band, which include identifying a set of assigned component carriers and placing a reception band within the system bandwidth so that the placement overlaps with at least a portion of the assigned component carriers.
|Method and apparatus to support customer premises diagnostics and service simulation via test user interface devices - Because networks, such as Optical Distributed Networks (ODNs), dynamically change over time as more users and services are added, service providers are challenged to test operational robustness following installation of equipment or provisioning of services or upgrades. Example embodiments of the present invention allow testing of various services along a communications path, including software upgrades, throughput tests and simulations, and combinations of simulated scenarios with live customer traffic. The example embodiments allow generation of reports based on the testing of various services so that a technician may correct errors and ensure proper provisioning during equipment installation. Such testing may be useful to detect installation or activation problems encountered when a subscriber activates a service at a later date or adds additional devices. The example embodiments simplify installation and provisioning, saving service providers cost on a per installation or provisioning basis.
|SCHEDULING METHOD OF PROVIDING MULTIMEDIA SERVICE - Disclosed is a scheduling method. The scheduling method includes assigning a priority associated with a transmitted order with respect to object packets based on a delayed time remaining until the object packets are reproduced, recognizing a significance of the object packets, the significance being associated with an effect on a decoding process, and scheduling the object packets based on whether the priority is assigned to the object packets and the recognized significance. The scheduling method may perform scheduling based on the delayed time and significance, thereby effectively providing multimedia services and a data communication server.
|CENTRALIZED SYSTEM FOR THE REMOTE MONITORING OF MULTIMEDIA SIGNALS - A centralized system for the monitoring of remote multimedia signals which monitors and assesses the quality of the services distributed over an IP packet telecommunications network (
|Receiving Data in a Sensor Network - A sensor network has a plurality of wireless sensors which transmit to an intermediate receiving device which relays data to a central server. A method is provided for receiving data packets at the intermediate receiving device from a plurality of the transmitting devices. Data packets are sensed on a communication medium at the receiving device and the total traffic intensity of data packets from the transmitting devices is estimated. A detection threshold for data packets is provided and adapted as a function of the total intensity. The receiving device receives data packets with a signal strength above the current detection threshold.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR RELAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of allocating a radio resource for a relay station in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprise allocating a relay zone to the relay station in a subframe and transmitting a relay control channel to the relay station by using the relay zone, wherein the subframe comprises a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in a time domain and a plurality of subcarriers in a frequency domain, wherein the subframe is divided into a user zone used by a user equipment in a cell and the relay zone used by the relay station, and wherein the relay zone comprises some of the plurality of subcarriers. According to the present invention, a subframe structure provides backward compatibility with a legacy wireless communication system. A relay station can effectively find a radio resource allocated to the relay station, thereby decreasing a decoding time.
|Automatic tuning of communication protocol performance - A method or device may optimize applications on a parallel computing system using protocols such as Message Passing Interface (MPI). Environment variables data may be used as well as a test kernel of an application to optimize communication protocol performance according to a set of predefined tuning rules. The tuning rules may specify the output parameters to be optimized, and may include a ranking or hierarchy of such output parameters. Optimization may be achieved through use of a tuning unit, which may execute the test kernel on the parallel computing system, and may monitor the output parameters for a series of input parameters. The input parameters may be varied over a range of values and combinations. Input parameters corresponding to optimized output parameters may stored for future use. This information may be used to adjust the application's communication protocol performance "on the fly" by changing the input parameters for a given usage scenario.
|Context Aware Wireless Data Access Point Changeover - A first wireless connection is initiated between a station and a first access point (
|TELECOMMUNICATIONS METHODS FOR INCREASING RELIABILITY OF EARLY TERMINATION OF TRANSMISSION - An embodiment of the invention provides a telecommunications method to be performed by a first telecommunications device while trying to transmit a data block to a second telecommunications device. According to the embodiment, the first telecommunications device determines whether a first set of early termination criteria is satisfied. Then, if the first set of early termination criteria is satisfied, the first telecommunications device further determines whether a second set of early termination criteria is satisfied. The second set of early termination criteria is different from the first set of early termination criteria. If both the first set of early termination criteria and the second set of early termination criteria are satisfied before the first telecommunications device finishes transmitting the data block, the first telecommunications device reduces a transmission power.
|COMPUTER PRODUCT, TESTING APPARATUS, AND TESTING METHOD - A computer-readable medium stores a testing program that causes a computer having a storage device storing netmask lengths and address block utilization information associated with address blocks, to execute a process that includes acquiring first packets transmitted to a first apparatus, first addresses being regarded as transmission sources; referring to the storage device and acquiring a count of address blocks to which the first addresses belong and a netmask length; calculating based on the acquired address block count and netmask length, the netmask length less a bit count according to the number of the first addresses; referring to the storage device and selecting from among unused address blocks, an address block having a netmask length less than or equal to the calculated netmask length; and transmitting to a second apparatus, second packets obtained by setting the transmission sources of the first packets to second addresses in the selected address block.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING FEMTO BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for detecting a femto Base Station (BS) of a Mobile Station (MS) in a wireless communication system including a macro BS and a femto BS are provided. The method includes receiving a request, from the macro BS, to monitor an UpLink (UL) signal of an MS permissible by the femto BS to access, and monitoring the UL signal of the MS permissible to access.
|System and Method for Mapping Internet Protocol Television Interference - A method in a server for monitoring an Internet Protocol television (IPTV) service for a customer premises is disclosed. A first geographical location of a customer premises is retrieved, and a second geographical location of an amplitude modulation broadcasting facility within a threshold distance from the customer premises is retrieved. A first signal transmission power rating for the amplitude modulation broadcasting facility during daytime hours is retrieved, as is second signal transmission power rating for the amplitude modulation broadcasting facility during nighttime hours. A time of day that the IPTV service failure occurs is determined based on the first signal transmission power rating for the daytime hours and the second signal transmission power rating for the nighttime hours.
|Internet protocol service level agreement router auto-configuration - Once the user has configured which call paths to monitor, VOIP automatically creates all the required IP SLA operations, including turning on the responder on the destination side. When these operations disappear, either due to their periodic expiration or due to a router reset, so the service dynamically recreates the IP SLA operations as necessary.
|Method of Monitoring Search Space of Enhanced Downlink Control Channel in Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access System - A method of monitoring search space of enhanced downlink control channel (EPDCCH) for a user equipment in an orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) system includes determining whether to blind decode a monitoring downlink control information (DCI) candidate in a search space of a EPDCCH according to a code rate of the monitoring DCI decoding candidate, wherein the search space is determined according to a fixed threshold associated to a number of available resource element in a physical resource block pair for the EPDCCH.
|Measurement data record method for detecting hybrid mobile tune away - An apparatus in one example has: a first communication network optimized for high-speed packet data services; a first database operatively coupled to the first communication network; a second communication network for providing both voice and slow data-rate data services; a second database operatively coupled to the second communication network; and an operations platform operatively coupled to the first and second databases. The first communication network optimized for high speed packet data will generate in the first database a record which will have at least: mobile ID type, mobile ID, connection ending time, cell, sector, carrier information; and last signal strength value. The second communication network providing both voice and low speed packet data will generate, in the second data base, a record that will have at least mobile ID type, call start time, call length, mobile ID (ESN/MEID), call type (data or voice), cell, sector, carrier information; and call disposition. The operations platform will link the records on the two databases based on mobile ID, call ending time, and the call start time. The linking of the two records with matching mobile ID and time stamps will give information about mobile tuneaway and the reason for the tune away.
|METHOD FOR MONITORING DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN USER EQUIPEMENTS - The method for discontinuously monitoring downlink control channel in a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes receiving a discontinuous reception (DRX) Start Offset from a base station to be used for both a first DRX Cycle and a second DRX Cycle, and starting an On Duration Timer at a subframe that satisfies either a first condition for the first DRX Cycle or a second condition for the second DRX Cycle, wherein a first DRX offset used in the first condition is based upon the DRX Start Offset received from the base station, and wherein a second DRX offset used in the second condition is based upon a remainder of the DRX Start Offset received from the base station after a modulo operation by the second DRX Cycle.
|Method of resolving network address to host names in network flows for network device - The present invention provides a system and method for using network flows records exported from network routers to provide information about the traffic entering/exiting the device. Network flow information exported from network devices identify the network devices involved in the flow using their network address. An application displays a user friendly host name of the network device. This method describes the steps necessary to efficiently resolve the network device address to their domain names.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING OF A NETWORK DEVICE - A method and apparatus for monitoring of a network device are disclosed. For example, the method receives a monitoring record from a network device, and determines whether the network device is listed in an active pool of monitored network devices. The method then automatically enables the monitoring of the network device if the network device is not listed in the active pool of monitored network devices.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USING PROTOCOL CHECKSUMS TO CONVEY DATA - The present invention provides a system and method for transmitting data, including transmitting a first data packet having at least one checksum value across a network, generating a second data packet substantially similar to the first data packet, the second data packet having a checksum value, modifying the checksum value of the second data packet, transmitting the second data packet with the modified checksum value across the network, and assessing a network performance metric based at least in part upon the modified checksum value.
|METHOD OF CONTROLLING HEADER COMPRESSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND TRANSMITTER - The wireless base station notifies the missing to the transmitter upon detection of missing of a data segment received from the transmitter, and the transmitter controls the header compression state of the data segment addressed to the wireless terminal upon the reception of the notification of the missing.
|SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention provides a method for finding a backup node for a node in a sensor network. Firstly, determining a node which is in a state of waiting for being an agent node among a plurality of nodes adjacent to the node to be backed up for using the agent node to find the backup node. The states of waiting for being backed up is that the quantity of electricity of the node to be backed up drops below a preset value. According to the present invention, the node to be backed up does not need to communicate with a large number of nodes. It only needs to determine an agent node among the adjacent notes to do the substantial search for a backup node.
|METHOD, SYSTEM AND ENTITY OF REALIZING EVENT DETECTION - A method and a system of realizing event detection are provided, which detect a status of an Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity access network (IP-CAN) bearer corresponding to a policy and charging control (PCC) rule by binding an Event-Trigger parameter to the PCC rule, thereby realizing small-granularity detection for the specific PCC rule and reducing the load of the system. Furthermore, a status of the IP-CAN bearer or an IP flow is realized by binding the Event-Trigger parameter to an IP-CAN identifier (ID) or an IP flow ID, so as to avoid the problem about too large granularity of the binding of event detection and IP-CAN session and reduce the burden of the IP-CAN bearer detection and message exchange.
|REPORTING AND RESOLVING CONFLICTING USE OF A NODE IDENTIFIER - Conflicting use of a node identifier in a wireless network is reported and resolved. In some aspects, a wireless node receives wireless signals and determines, based on those signals, that more than one node uses the same node identifier. The wireless node may then report the conflicting use to a network node. Here, the wireless node may delay for a period of time before reporting the conflicting use. In some aspects, an access point that discovers a conflicting use (e.g., based on a received signal that indicates that another access point is using that same node identifier) may report the conflicting use and/or elect to use a different node identifier. In some aspects, a stateful procedure is used to resolve a conflicting use where, upon identification of a conflicting use, an access point negotiates with another access point to cause one of these access points to use a different node identifier. In some aspects, a stateless procedure is used to resolve a conflicting use where, upon identification of a conflicting use, an access point delays for a period of time before determining whether a different node identifier is to be used at one of the nodes.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING AUDIO CONTENTION IN NETWORKS - A method and an apparatus for managing an audio contention are disclosed. For example, the method receives a request by a device, and enters into a first state by the device, wherein the first state allows the device to use an audio channel in an upstream direction, wherein the device in the first state determines at least one of: a failure outcome for the request, a success outcome for the request or a continue outcome for the request.
|METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING DIAMETER SIGNALING ROUTER WITH INTEGRATED MONITORING FUNCTIONALITY - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a system for providing a Diameter signaling router with integrated monitoring functionality. The system includes a Diameter signaling router comprising a network interface for receiving, from a first Diameter node, a first Diameter message having Diameter information. The system also includes an integrated monitoring module located within the Diameter signaling router for copying at least a portion of the first Diameter message and providing the copied information associated with the first Diameter message to an application.
|METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK INTERCEPTION - A method, a device, and a system for network interception are provided. The method for network interception includes the following steps. A matching rule obtained by parsing an interception policy. Received data are selected by adopting a deep packet inspection (DPI) according to the matching rule so as to obtain an interception result, in which the received data are obtained by adopting data preprocessing to filter packet data according to a service customizing rule obtained by parsing the interception policy. The system for network interception includes a service probe server (SPS) and a service analyze server (SAS). Thus, various packet data services transmitted over an Internet protocol (IP) network can be intercepted.
|METHOD FOR SEARCHING CONTROL SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION (CA) - The present invention relates to a wireless access system supporting carrier aggregation and carrier aggregation technology, and discloses methods for effectively detecting control signals for a plurality of cells and apparatuses supporting same. In an embodiment of the present invention, a method for detecting control signals in a wireless access system supporting multiple carrier aggregation (CA) and cross carrier scheduling may comprise calculating the start point of a reference search space in an expanded search space, calculating start points of the next search spaces which are spaced apart from the reference search space by a predetermined offset value, and performing blind decoding on the reference search space and subsequent search spaces to search control signals from a base station.
|Method and Node in an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) Network - A converter node
|Parallel Detection of Remote LPI Request and Send Zero Mode - Embodiments of the present invention enable robust and quick parallel detection of the remote LPI request signal (rem_lpi_req) and SEND ZERO mode (SEND_Z) defined in the Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) standard. Embodiments do not rely on energy detection for detecting SEND_Z. Therefore, SEND_Z can be detected reliably and with minimal latency. In addition, since SEND_Z and rem_lpi_req are detected in parallel, embodiments are not concerned with the false detection of rem_lpi_req (before SEND_Z is detected) or the need to disable detection of rem_lpi_req (after SEND_Z is detected).
|METHODS AND ARRANGEMENT FOR UTILIZATION RATE DISPLAY - An arrangement in a network device for displaying statistical data pertaining to data traffic that traverses the network device is provided. The arrangement includes a power supply arrangement for providing power to circuitry of the network device. The arrangement also includes a set of network ports, which includes a set of input network ports for receiving the data traffic and a set of output network ports for outputting the data traffic from the network device. The arrangement further includes logic arrangement for analyzing data traffic and for displaying statistical data pertaining to the data traffic. The arrangement yet also includes a visual display arrangement, which is configured to display the statistical data, whereas the data traffic is configured to traverse the network device between the set of input network ports and the set of output network ports irrespective whether power is provided to the circuitry of the network device.
|Monitoring Probe for Identifying A User Plane Identifier of a User Device - Methods of identifying a user plane identifier of a user device by a monitoring probe in communication with a network device, the monitoring probe, and the system using the same are disclosed. According to an embodiment, the monitoring probe includes a monitor, a comparator and a user plane identifier output. The monitor monitors a network device for receipt of a first control plane message comprising a first control plane identifier and a user device identifier, and monitors the network device for receipt of a second control plane message comprising a second control plane identifier and a user plane identifier. The comparator compares the first with the second control plane identifier to determine whether both control plane identifiers correspond to each other. The user plane identifier output outputs the user plane identifier being identified as that of the user device, when both control plane identifiers correspond to each other.
|SIGNAL ANALYSIS/CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD, SIGNAL CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A signal analysis/control system includes: a signal analysis unit which analyzes an input signal of a transmission unit and generates analysis information; and a signal control unit which controls the input signal of a reception unit by using the analysis information. Thus, the signal analysis is performed in the transmission unit. This reduces the calculation amount concerning the signal analysis in the reception unit. Furthermore, the reception unit can control each of the constituent elements of the input signal according to the signal analysis information obtained in the transmission unit.
|Network Virtualization Operations Using a Scalable Statistics Collection Framework - Some embodiments provide a scalable framework to retrieve statistics relating different aggregated entities. In some embodiments, the aggregated entity is a pair of ports. The pair of ports can be physical ports of one or more physical forwarding elements. The pair of ports can be logical ports of one or more logical forwarding elements. In some embodiments, the aggregated entity is a machine or a group of machines. In some embodiments, the aggregated entity is an access control list (ACL).
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DEVICE OPERATIONAL MODES BASED ON CONTEXT INFORMATION - An approach is provided for managing device do-not-disturb operational modes based on context information. A do-not-disturb manager determines context information associated with a device, a user of the device, or a combination thereof. The do-not-disturb manager also processes and/or facilitates a processing of the context information to cause, at least in part, an activation of one or more operational modes of the device. The do-not-disturb manager also causes, at least in part, a disabling or enabling of one or more functions of one or more applications associated with the device based, at least in part, on the activated one or more operational modes.
|System for Aggregating Statistics Relating to a Logical Forwarding Element - Some embodiments provide a system that implements a set of tools to define a set of one or more logical forwarding elements from a number of physical forwarding elements and a scalable framework to retrieve statistics relating each logical forwarding element. In some embodiments, the statistics relate to the logical ports of a logical forwarding element. The system of some embodiments allows a network administrator to retrieve a total packet count and byte count for one or more logical ports of the logical forwarding element, even though the logical ports may be distributed across multiple physical forwarding elements.
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING A BUFFER STATUS REPORT - A method and device of sending Buffer Status Reports (BSRs) are provided herein. The method includes: determining the type priority sequence of BSR by a user terminal, and selecting and processing one BSR based on the type priority. A user device is also provided. In the process of implementing the provided method and device, the terminal may select and process one BSR when the sum of the BSR qualified for triggering the sending and the BSR marked as pending is greater than one. The provided method and device may reduce resource waste because there is no situation that at least two BSRs sending processes are triggered at one time and at least two BSRs are sent at one time.
|RECONFIGURABLE MULTI-CHIP PROCESSING PLATFORM FOR CONCURRENT AGGREGATION OF WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for providing a reconfigurable multi-chip WWAN processing platform on a communications device. The processing platform allows the device to access multiple WWANs and multiple WWAN technologies concurrently. A first multiplexer is communicatively coupled with a number of baseband processing chips. A first baseband processing chip is selectively coupled with a first transceiver and a first UICC module to establish a first connection. A second baseband processing chip is selectively coupled with a second transceiver and a second UICC module to establish a second connection operable concurrently with the first connection. A multiplexer controller performs a configurable search for available networks. One or more networks are selected. The controller selects a specific transceiver for each selected network based on the capabilities of the transceiver. Baseband processing chips that consume less power serve as proxies for other baseband processing chips that consume more power.
|Systems and methods for content type classification - A method for determining a type of content includes receiving a first packet, determining a state of classification for the first packet or for a session with which the first packet is associated, receiving a second packet, and determining a content type for the second packet based at least in part on the determined state. A method for determining a type of content includes receiving a packet associated with a session, determining whether a content type has been determined for the session or for an other packet associated with the session, and classifying the packet to be the content type based at least in part on a result from the act of determining. A method for determining a type of content includes receiving a first packet from a first port, the first port adapted for receiving at least two types of content, and determining a content type for the first packet or for a session with which the first packet is associated. A method for determining a type of content includes receiving a packet associated with a session, and determining a state of classification for the packet or the session.
|Ethernet switch-based network monitoring system and methods - A network data monitoring device provides for the flexible, programmable port-to-multi-port steering of data packet traffic between network port pairs, with tap data streams being directed to any of a plurality of monitor ports. The network data monitoring device is constructed utilizing one or more switching integrated circuits programmed to disable layer-2 routing and impose port-to-multiport data packet steering. Physical layer protocol encoding/decoding circuits enable connectivity to physical network media connectors though a system of fail-safe relays. A system controller, preferably implemented by a microprocessor, is connected to all switching integrated circuits and relays for configuration, status and control. Hardware-based logic selectively in complement to the switching integrated circuits provides for the programmable filtering, modification and programmable steering of data packets through the device.
|System and Method for Testing Automated Provisioning and Maintenance of Operations Support Systems - The present invention provides a complete virtual multi-vendor EMS based network that behaves identical to the network elements of the EMS clients. A virtual network simulator is built that has the ability to faithfully simulate the behavior of any vendor's EMS to represent the data objects required by the TMF 814 specification. This allows automatic provisioning and maintenance of the Operation Support Systems to fully test new functionality against complete EMS based network without depending upon the availability of any physical equipment, thereby providing much quicker, low cost, extremely life-like testing environment.
|TRANSPARENT PROVISIONING OF SERVICES OVER A NETWORK - An apparatus and method for enhancing the infrastructure of a network such as the Internet is disclosed. A packet interceptor/processor apparatus is coupled with the network so as to be able to intercept and process packets flowing over the network. Further, the apparatus provides external connectivity to other devices that wish to intercept packets as well. The apparatus applies one or more rules to the intercepted packets which execute one or more functions on a dynamically specified portion of the packet and take one or more actions with the packets. The apparatus is capable of analyzing any portion of the packet including the header and payload. Actions include releasing the packet unmodified, deleting the packet, modifying the packet, logging/storing information about the packet or forwarding the packet to an external device for subsequent processing. Further, the rules may be dynamically modified by the external devices.
|AUTOMATIC MODIFICATION OF VOIP PACKET RETRANSMISSION LEVEL BASED ON THE PSYCHO-ACOUSTIC VALUE OF THE PACKET - An exemplary technique disclosed herein is that the transmitter of a VOIP stream can assess the psycho-acoustic importance of each packet, and then use a protocol that supports redundant transmission to retransmit only the packets that are judged to be important for voice quality and intelligibility. Illustratively, a packet containing a plosive might be retransmitted redundantly because of its disproportionate contribution to intelligibility, but a packet that occurs entirely within a long-duration fricative transmitted only once. An exemplary aspect may also support multiple levels of transmission redundancy based on multiple levels of packet importance, with the levels varying based on the relative psycho-acoustic importance of each packet and/or the degree of network congestion.
|Monitoring Performance Metrics Associated With a Wireless Network - An access point device operating within a wireless local area network (WLAN) includes a network interface operable to facilitate communication with a network operator over an IP network. The network operator is located outside of a range of the WLAN. The access point device also includes a wireless network interface operable to facilitate communication between the access point device and a user device. The access point device further includes a processor operable to gather a first performance metric associated with the access point device and receive a second performance metric gathered by the user device in response to an instruction from the access point device to gather the second performance metric. The processor may facilitate transmission of the first and second performance metrics over the IP network to the network operator.
|PACKET TUNNELING - Network devices, systems, and methods are provided for packet processing. One network device includes a network chip having a number of network ports for the device. The network chip includes logic to select original data packets, based on a set of criteria, received from or destined to a particular port on the device and to tunnel the selected data packets to a second network device having a different destination address to that of the selected data packets.
|TELECOMMUNICATION PORT TESTING APPARATUS - A telecommunication port testing apparatus includes a first power interface, two first telecommunication ports, a first impedance stabilization network (ISN), a first impedance matching network, and a second impedance matching network. The first ISN includes an input, an output, and a signal detecting pin. The first power interface is connected to the input of the first ISN through the first impedance matching network and one of the two first telecommunication ports in that order. The output of the first ISN is grounded through the other one of the two first telecommunication ports and the second impedance matching network in that order.
|Apparatus for and method of monitoring QoS metrics of VoIP voice traffic using SIP/RTP - An apparatus for measuring QoS metrics of VoIP voice traffic using SIP and RTP in a router or a network, not in a user terminal, and a method of measuring QoS metrics of VoIP voice traffic using the apparatus.
|Varying the Position of Test Information in Data Units - Variable positioning of test information in data units is disclosed. A method of preparing data units with test information located in varying locations is disclosed. The test information includes a signature. A method of receiving data units having test information in varying locations is disclosed. Upon receipt, the test information is located based on a signature included with the test information. The test information may be located in data units between a header at the beginning of the data unit and a frame check sequence field at the end of the data unit. The location of the test information may vary between data units in different flows, and between data units in different streams. The methods may be achieved in a network communications unit included in, for example, a network card, a network testing system and a computer.
|PACKET TRANSFER APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING COPY PACKET - A packet transfer apparatus includes a data analyzing unit, a memory control unit, and a control unit that holds a copy condition table and has a control information comparing unit. The data analyzing unit refers to a header of a received packet to analyze control information and transmits an analysis result to the control unit. The control unit searches the copy condition table on the basis of the analysis result and transmits a search result to the memory control unit. The memory control unit generates a record of a copy packet whose packet length is shortened in a memory calling management table on the basis of the search result.
|UNIVERSAL BROADBAND BROADCASTING - A universal broadband broadcasting service is provided. A spectrum-sharing database stores attributes associated with a shared spectrum, a policy controller controls access to the shared spectrum by broadcast service entities, and a gateway receives IP multicast traffic from the broadcast service entities and communicates the IP multicast traffic to a broadcast single frequency network.
|Managing Recordings of Communications Sessions - A device for recording the content of live communications sessions allocates each session with a unique identifier which is also communicated to a server, exchange, switch or endpoint having control of that session. A log of events occurring in the session is updated with the unique identifier of the recorded content, and following the session, the log of events is communicated to the recording device, indexed under the unique identifier, and stored with the recorded content of the session itself
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING RESOURCES OF A PACKET NETWORK BASED ON COLLECTED NETWORK PERFORMANCE INFORMATION - A system and method for provisioning resources of a packet network, including monitoring at least one network performance information parameter associated with communications of data packets. The at least one network performance information parameter(s) may be compared with at least one respective threshold value indicative of degradation of communications of the data packets. A determination may be made that the network performance information parameter(s) crosses the respective threshold value(s). In response to determining that the network performance information parameter(s) crosses the respective threshold value(s), a network resource may be provisioned to compensate for the degradation of communications of the data packets.
|EFFICIENT LOCATION DISCOVERY - Techniques are generally described for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network. In some examples, methods for determining locations of a plurality of communication devices in a network may comprises formulating the determination as a quantitative problem based at least in part on one or more attributes between individual communication devices and one or more beacon nodes whose locations are known, wherein the quantitative problem is expressed in terms of an objective function, one or more constraints, and one or more models, and solving the quantitative problem to determine the location of at least a portion of the one or more communication devices, wherein the solving includes manipulation of at least the objective function, one of the one or more constraints or one of the one or more models. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed.
|COMMUNICATION PATH CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION PATH CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The problem of the present invention is, in a network configured from wireless links that can use an adaptive modulation function, when using 1+1 protection, to maintain communication without dropping of data occurring even if there is a drop in the transmission rate as a result of adaptive modulation. The invention of the present application having: an investigation means that, for every communication method that can be used in each of a normal pathway and a backup pathway, investigates an available band that is a band that can be allocated when the transmission rate of the normal pathway and the backup pathway has decreased; and a control means that, on the basis of the investigated available band and a band that a flow is requesting, sets marking in a manner so that the packets of the same flow in the normal pathway and the backup pathway can complement each other.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEPLOYING AND EVALUATING NETWORKS IN INDOOR ENVIRONMENTS - A method for deploying and evaluating a network system includes providing an electronic two- or three-dimensional representation of a layout of a building, placing a plurality of nodes of the network system in the building, and communicatively coupling the nodes together to form the network system. The nodes are inspected dependent upon a regulatory requirement and/or the representation of the layout of the building. The network is evaluated dependent upon data collected during the inspecting and dependent upon a network protocol design and/or an interference model. The inspecting of the nodes and the evaluating of the network are performed automatically by use of at least one electronic processor.
|Multi-Hop Network Topology System and Method - A wireless communication system and method for a network having a tree topology. An initial path from a base station to an end relay node is selected. The path selection includes an active communication path and a redundant communication path. The path selection is based on at least one policy factor. The at least one policy factor is monitored and the path is updated based on a change to the monitored at least one policy factor.
|Packetized Interface For Coupling Agents - In one embodiment, the present invention includes a fabric on a first semiconductor die to communicate with at least one agent on the die according to an on-chip protocol and a packetization layer coupled to the fabric to receive command and data information from the fabric on multiple links and to packetize the information into a packet for transmission from the die to another die via an in-package packetized link. Other embodiments are described and claimed.
|SCALABLE SCHEDULER ARCHITECTURE FOR CHANNEL DECODING - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for processing wireless communications. According to one aspect, a processing unit may receive a plurality of code blocks of a transport block and schedule the plurality of code blocks to be decoded in parallel with a plurality of decoders. Each decoder decodes at least one code block as an independent tasks. The processing unit further collects the decoded information bits from the plurality of decoders and forwards the collected decoded information bits for further processing. In one aspect, the processing unit includes an output agent to temporarily store the decoded information bits while waiting for all code blocks of the transport block to be decoded.
|METHOD OF REPORTING MEASUREMENT INFORMATION IN PACKET BASED ON CELLULAR SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for efficiently reporting measurement information required for handover in active-state terminals executing a power-saving operation in a packet-based communication system. The method includes the steps of: (a) receiving a discontinuous reception (DRX) period, a discontinuous transmission (DTX) period, and a measurement information report parameter that are decided by a base station; and (b) measuring channel quality according to a measurement information report period included in the measurement information report parameter, and reporting measurement information formed based on the measurement information report parameter by using radio resources allocated by the base station.
|PROCESSING POLLING REQUESTS FROM RADIO LINK CONTROL PEERS - This innovation relates to systems and methods for transmission of protocol data units, and more particularly to processing polling requests from a radio link control peer. A radio link control transmitter can poll a receiver to obtain a report regarding the status of a set of data packets, and the polls can be sent in-band with a data packet. The receiver can determine to wait before sending the status report based on one or more characteristics of the received data packets.
|METHODS FOR DETECTION OF FAILURE AND RECOVERY IN A RADIO LINK - A method, telecommunication apparatus, and electronic device for detecting a status of a radio link are disclosed. A transceiver
|ERROR HANDLING FOR NAMED SIGNAL EVENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention provides a technique for handling damaged named signal event (NSE) packets that are received in association with a voice over packet based telephony call. The received packets for a telephony call may include voice packets as well as NSE packets. Upon receipt of the packets at a physical layer, the packets are processed at a link layer to detect damaged packets having link layer errors. The incoming packets are sent to an audio application at an application layer for further processing. For damaged packets, link layer error indicia is generated at the link layer and sent to the audio processing application. The audio application will use the link layer error indicia to identify damaged packets or payloads associated with damaged packets, and determine whether the payloads corresponding to the damaged packets include NSE information defining an NSE. Damaged NSE packets are processed accordingly.
|High Speed Control Channel Monitoring in a Multicarrier Radio Access Network - User equipments (UEs) will monitor each frequency in a multicarrier wireless radio access network for at least one control channel that may contain downlink data allocations or other such messages from the network. This monitoring may be dynamically controlled with a physical layer indication received by the UE from a node B that designates a number of carrier frequencies of all of the carrier frequencies of the network. In response to this physical layer indication, the UE will monitor at least one control channel in the designated carrier frequency or frequencies.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IP SESSION KEEPALIVE MONITORING, HOME GATEWAY AND NETWORK DEVICE - A method and a system for Internet Protocol (IP) session keepalive monitoring, a home gateway and a network device are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a User Equipment (UE) or an IP edge node, a Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) message sent by a Home Gateway (HGW), in which a first discriminator field value included in the BFD message is a difference between an IP address prefix of the UE and an IP address prefix of the HGW; and monitoring, by the UE or the IP edge node, whether an IP session between the IP edge node and the UE is keepalive according to the first discriminator field value in the BFD message. "Multihop BFD" is used as a keepalive monitoring mechanism of a "Multihop IPv6 Session", thereby realizing keepalive monitoring of the "Multiple hop IPv6 Session".
|Analyte Monitoring System and Methods - Methods and systems for providing data communication in medical systems are disclosed.
|DIRECT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A direct communication system and a data forwarding method thereof are provided. The direct communication system includes a first direct communication apparatus and an evolved nodeB, and the first direct communication apparatus belongs to a first direct communication group. The first direct communication apparatus groupcasts a first communication data based on the first direct communication group. After receiving the first communication data, the evolved nodeB receives a first feedback message from a second direct communication apparatus of the first direct communication group. The evolved nodeB decides a re-forwarding of the first communication data in the first direct communication group according to the first feedback message.
|DIAGNOSING PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH ROUTE GROUPS IN A NETWORK - A system and method directed to diagnosing a problem associated with a route group in a network are disclosed. A problem associated with a route group is diagnosed by comparing inventory information associated with a route group to current route information associated with a router, where the router is associated with the route group. The process followed for diagnosing a problem associated with a route group depends on whether there is a mismatch between the inventory route information and the current route information.
|CALL DATA CORRELATION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for collecting diagnostic messages and collating them into correlated groups to be matched to specific calls, to identify and diagnose issues with those calls.
|UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE FOR ANTENNA RADIATION CHARACTERIZATION - The unmanned aerial vehicle for antenna radiation characterization is an unmanned aerial vehicle having a propulsion system and a transceiver. Control signals are transmitted from a base station to position the unmanned aerial vehicle adjacent an antenna of interest. The unmanned aerial vehicle for antenna radiation characterization further includes a signal strength antenna for receiving an antenna signal generated by the antenna of interest for calculating or determining the received signal strength of the antenna signal. A received signal strength signal is then transmitted back to the base station, in real time. The received signal strength signal is representative of a set of received signal strengths of the antenna signal corresponding to a set of three-dimensional measurement coordinates such that the received signal strength signal represents a three-dimensional radiation pattern associated with the antenna of interest.
|Distributed Flow Analysis - There are disclosed apparatus, methods, and a storage medium for testing a network. A plurality of flows may be received and performance statistics for the flows may be measured and stored. At least a portion of the performance statistics may be analyzed in near real-time using a hierarchical array of processors.
|Method and Apparatus for Performing Buffer Status Reporting - The present invention provides a method for performing Buffer Status Reporting (BSR) in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system. The method includes steps of forming a Medium Access Control (MAC) Packet Data Unit (PDU), the MAC PDU including padding bits with a bit amount larger than the size of a BSR MAC control element, triggering a padding BSR procedure, reporting a short BSR MAC control element when the padding bits of the MAC PDU cannot accommodate a long BSR MAC control element, and indicating the short BSR MAC control element triggered by the padding BSR procedure through a sub-header corresponding to the BSR MAC control element in the MAC PDU.
|APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TUNNELING LOOP DETECTION - Disclosed is a technique whereby a packet transferring apparatus (particularly, a tunnel entry point made to carry out packet encapsulation) becomes capable of detecting a tunneling loop signifying that a packet loops along the same route while undergoing encapsulation. With this technique, at packet transfer, a loop detection module of a router according to the present invention stores a TEL value (value of tunnel encapsulation limit for limiting the number of times of duplication of tunnel) set in an encapsulation header of this packet or stores a TEL value set in an encapsulation header of a packet sent back as an ICMP error In addition, the loop detection module analyzes an increase/decrease variation pattern of the stored TEL value relative to time and, in a case in which the pattern agrees with a unique pattern (sawtooth-like pattern) appearing at the occurrence of a tunneling loop, estimates that a tunneling loop has occurred.
|Method for Determining if an Encrypted Flow of Packets Belongs to a Predefined Class of Flows - A method to determine if an encrypted flow of packets (F) belongs to a predefined class of flows (ω
|METHOD OF PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a random access procedure in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a random access preamble, and monitoring a downlink control channel in a transmission time interval (TTI) window for a random access response, the TTI window comprising a plurality of TTIs, wherein a TTI is an interval to search a random access-radio network temporary identity (RA-RNTI) transmitted on the downlink control channel and monitoring the downlink control channel for the random access response is stopped when the random access response including an random access preamble identifier corresponding to the transmitted random access preamble is received.
|Mobile activity status tracker - A technique and apparatus to provide status tracking of presence and/or location of a mobile, wireless device to a requesting entity even outside of a particular wireless system. This allows wireless service providers the ability to monitor and log changes in the status of mobile stations within and/or outside their networks. Embodiments are disclosed wherein presence and/or location information is provided to entities outside of a particular servicing wireless network using the mechanisms of call processing components of a mobile network (e.g., call setup procedures), and using standard mechanisms currently available to any appropriately conforming Mobile Switching Center (MSC) element. A mobile activity status tracker (MAST) is disclosed which contains a database of information similar to the information contained in the Home Location Register. The MAST tracks and reports status and activity of mobile wireless devices in a wireless network using mobile registration message, mobile inactivity message forwarding, and/or mobile automatic notification of subscriber status to TCP/IP entities (e.g., application servers on the Internet or Intranet). The MAST system duplicates the same or similar information contained in a corresponding HLR, but is available as an external database entity which is not restricted by SS7 standards. The tracking need not track call-specific information, e.g., called telephone numbers or information regarding conversations sustained by the tracked wireless subscribers.
|MEASUREMENT COORDINATION FOR DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS MEASUREMENTS IN A TIME DIVISION DUPLEX SYSTEM - The invention disclosed in this application describes methods to coordinate spectrum measurement periods in access points or base stations in a time division duplex (TDD) system where the super frame is divided into uplink and downlink portions for use in cognitive radio systems.
|Method and Apparatus for Supporting Packet Data Services in Service Area Boundary Regions - A method of providing packet data service is based on selectively switching packet data traffic for a mobile station operating in a boundary region between two service areas from a shared packet data channel to a dedicated packet data channel, or vice versa. For example, a source base station can be configured to switch packet data traffic for a mobile station from a shared packet data channel to a dedicated packet data channel as it approaches a shared channel service boundary. Additionally, the source base station can be configured to change the packet data service to the mobile station from a dedicated packet data channel to a shared packet data channel, such as when the mobile station moves back into the source base station's service area.
|DYNAMIC SCROLLING-TICKER FOR INITIATING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES - A system and method for initiating communications between a first wireless device and a second wireless device. The method includes the steps of detecting the status of the first wireless device, notifying the second wireless device via a scrolling ticker message based on the detecting step and establishing a communication session between the first and second wireless devices. The detecting step includes generating an alert based on a predefined event. The system for establishing a communication path between a first mobile device and a second mobile device includes an IMS core, a presence server communicatively coupled to the IMS core and in communication with the first mobile device, a scrolling ticker server in communication with the presence server and with the second mobile device, wherein the presence server communicates availability of the first mobile device and the scrolling ticker notifies the second mobile device of the availability of the first mobile device.
|H-ARQ TIMING DETERMINATION UNDER CROSS-CARRIER SCHEDULING IN LTE - Techniques are provided for carrier aggregation and H-ARQ timing in LTE or the like. For example, there is provided a method, operable by a mobile device, that may involve identifying a first component carrier and a second component carrier among a plurality of component carriers to be aggregated, wherein a first number of subframes of a subframe type in the first component carrier is less than a second number of subframes of the same subframe type in the second component carrier. The method may further involve receiving a configuration to monitor a control channel for the second component carrier on the first component carrier. The method further may further involve determining a reference uplink-downlink subframe configuration for the second component carrier based at least in part on the subframe type and the received configuration for the control channel.
|Radio Access for a Wireless Device and Base Station - A wireless device configures cell groups comprising a primary cell group and secondary cell group(s). The wireless device receives a control command for transmission of a random access preamble on a first secondary cell. The wireless device receives a random access response on the primary cell. The random access response comprises a timing advance command and an uplink grant. The wireless device applies the timing advance command to uplink transmission timing of a first secondary cell group comprising the first secondary cell. The wireless device transmits uplink data on the first secondary cell in radio resources identified in the uplink grant.
|STANDBY METHOD AND MOBILE ROUTER - Embodiments of the present invention provide a standby method and a mobile router. In the embodiments of the present invention, a mobile router determines a working mode in current time, and then according to the working mode, obtains a standby processing cycle that corresponds to the working mode, so that when no terminal device performs a data service through the mobile router, the mobile router can execute a sleeping operation and an awakening operation according to the standby processing cycle, which can avoid a problem that in the prior art, after a mobile router enters a standby status, the mobile router is handed over between sleeping and awakening frequently according to a fixed frequency, thereby reducing power consumption of the mobile router according to an actual application requirement.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SPECTRAL SCANNING WITHIN A NETWORK - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a spectral scanning controller configured to interrupt service at a wireless access point (WAP) such that the WAP performs spectral scanning during service interruption. The spectral scanning controller is configured to interrupt service at the WAP at a first scanning frequency when the spectral scanning controller is in a first configuration. The spectral scanning controller is configured to interrupt service at the WAP at a second scanning frequency different from the first scanning frequency when the spectral scanning controller is in a second configuration. The spectral scanning controller is configured to move from the first configuration to the second configuration in response to a change in at least one of a service demand, a service quality, a spectral scanning demand or a spectral scanning quality.
|H-ARQ ACKNOWLEDGMENT DETECTION VALIDATION BY RE-DECODING - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate reliably receiving a sequence of data packets in a wireless communications environment. In particular, mechanisms are provided that enhance hybrid automatic repeat request protocols through validation of acknowledgment message detection by re-decoding. A transmitter sends a data packet from a sequence of packets in one or more data transmissions. A receiver acknowledges the data packet upon obtaining sufficient transmissions to decode the packet. The receiver re-decodes a successive data transmission in combination with previously received transmissions to validate if the transmitter detected the acknowledgment.
|METHOD FOR ACCESSING HYBRID NETWORK, AND GATEWAY APPARATUS, WIRELESS TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for accessing a hybrid network including a wide area network and a distributed network, a gateway apparatus, a wireless terminal and a gateway communication system are disclosed for reducing the power consumption of the wireless terminal which is an access gateway. The method comprises: sensing by a gateway apparatus a relay request slot on a downlink common control channel of the wide area network; transmitting by a wireless terminal a relay request signal requesting to relay a data packet to be transmitted, in the relay request slot on the downlink common control channel; and if the relay request signal from the wireless terminal is sensed in the relay request slot, establishing by the gateway apparatus a connection with the wireless terminal in a distributed network environment. As such, the gateway apparatus accesses the wireless distributed network only when the surrounding wireless terminals require data relay, without sensing signals on both networks simultaneously, in order to reduce the power consumption.
|Systems, Methods, and Apparatus for Recording Network Events Associated with a Power Generation or Delivery System - A network recorder adapted for use within power generation, delivery and protection systems and/or process control systems is disclosed. The network recorder itself comprises a network port coupled to a communications network utilized by a monitoring, control, automation, and protection system. A storage device stores packets that are communicated on the communications network in conjunction with other calculated or measured information. The network recorder also includes a processor that generates an event report on reception of a trigger, where a trigger can be any external event, including the operation of a relay contact, or the occurrence of a packet or sequence of packets indicating a protection operation by a power protection device within the power protection system. The generated event report includes packets that were communicated on the communications network temporally coincident with the trigger.
|PROGRAM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING INFORMATION - An information collecting apparatus judges whether the received packet corresponds to a monitoring target, adds identifying information to the judged monitoring target packet, adds process information indicating a user policy used in processing of the monitoring target packet at each function processing units to the monitoring target packet, and stores each process information added to the monitoring target packet, in association with the identifying information added to the monitoring target packet.
|METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION BASED ON DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME - A method for transmitting channel quality information based on a differential scheme is disclosed. When channel quality information of a predetermined number of sub-bands selected by a receiver in a frequency selective channel is transmitted, total average channel information is transmitted. Channel information of the selected sub-bands is transmitted as sub-band differential information associated with average channel information. In this case, the sub-band differential information may be denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range including only positive (+) values. If at least two channel quality information is transmitted by a MIMO system, channel quality information of one channel is transmitted, then channel quality information of the other channel is transmitted as spatial differential information. In this case, the spatial differential information is denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range asymmetrical on the basis of "0".
|CHANNEL ESTIMATION MEHTOD AND APPARATUS USING DATA CHANNEL - A channel estimation method and apparatus that use a data channel are provided for improving channel estimation accuracy in a wireless communication system. The channel estimation apparatus includes a channel value extraction unit that extracts a first estimation value from a potential pilot signal received through a pilot channel and extracts a second estimation value from a potential data signal received through the data channel. The apparatus also includes a weight calculator that calculates a weight for determining a utilization ratio of the potential data signal in channel estimation from an error rate of the potential data signal. The apparatus further includes a channel estimator that estimates a final estimation value using the first estimation value and the second estimation value weighted by the weight calculated by the weight calculator.
|MEDIA GATEWAY AND STATISTIC REPORTING METHOD - The present invention relates to the communication field, and discloses an MG and a statistic reporting method thereof. The statistic reporting method includes: judging whether the current statistic parameter value meets the reporting condition when the statistic parameter value changes; if the value meets the reporting condition, reporting the current statistic parameter value and/or the corresponding event to the MGC, thus meeting different statistic and monitoring requirements more flexibly and efficiently. The MGC sends an event parameter to the MG beforehand, and transfers the reporting condition through the event parameter or its sub-parameter; or the MG presets the reporting condition. The reporting condition may be: (i) to report the statistic parameter value when the value deviates from the preset target value and/or resumes the preset target value; (ii) to report the statistic parameter value when the value overruns the preset target value; (iii) to report the statistic parameter value when the value enters and/or leaves the preset target value interval; or (iv) any combination thereof.
|Measurement Event Evaluation for Triggering Measurement Reports - Measurement event evaluation is of interest in a user equipment (UE) configured with multiple downlink component carriers (CCs). The UE performs measurements of a neighbor and a specific one of the configured CCs, being used as a reference CC. The UE evaluates, based on the measurements of the neighbor and the reference CC, being a specific one of the configured CCs, an evaluation criterion for triggering a measurement report from the UE. In this way, the number of event evaluations and measurement reports can be reduced, since a specific reference CC is used for the purpose of measurement event evaluation in a scenario when the UE is configured with multiple CCs.
|Method and Apparatus for Testing Mobile Terminals in an OFDM System - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for testing mobile terminals in an OFDMA system, in which all or part of available downlink radio resources in a cell are transmitted. A processing unit in a test apparatus splits the resources used for transmission into contiguous unities in the frequency domain such that one or more of said unities comprise resources allocated to one or more mobile terminals under test, and at least one of said unities comprise resources allocated to virtual users.
|Monitoring Performance of Telecommunications Network - A method of monitoring performance of a telecommunications network transmitting in real time multimedia data from a content provider to a device operating in the network is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of receiving said multimedia data; collecting information about the connection used to receive the multimedia data; producing a receiver report; appending said report with an identifier of a segment of the telecommunications network in which the device operates and transmitting said report to said telecommunications network.
|Adaptive Power Savings for Aggregated Resources - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to adaptive power savings in aggregated resources in communications devices. According to an embodiment, managing an aggregated resource in a communications device includes monitoring at least one current operational condition of the communications device, identifying based upon a policy configuration and the monitored at least one current operational condition one of the member resources of the aggregated resource as an eligible member resource to configure to a power-saving state, and reassigning traffic flows from the eligible link to at least one other link of the plurality of member resources.
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CHANNEL INSPECTION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To perform a channel inspection, a wireless communication device: monitors a common announcement channel (CACH) until detecting that a first set of identified parameters associated with a signal on a first channel matches a second set of known parameters for the first channel; performs an inspection on the first channel to determine whether the signal is of interest; and when the signal is not of interest, marks the first channel to prevent another inspection from being performed on the first channel until after the channel mark is removed. The communication device then leaves the first channel and continues to monitor the CACH for a change in the first set of identified parameters or an indication of an idle first channel, wherein the communication device removes the channel mark on the first channel.
|DETECTION OF ACCESS POINT LOCATION ERRORS IN ENTERPRISE LOCALIZATION SYSTEMS - Method and apparatus for validating location information associated with an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) by subjecting neighborhood node proximity information retrieved from an AP and neighborhood node location information retrieved from a database to a likelihood ratio tests (LRT). The neighborhood node proximity information retrieved from an AP comprises a list of nodes exhibiting at the AP a signal strength above a threshold level T, or link quality information associated with those nodes having a signal received by the AP.
|UNCOVERING THE DIFFERENCES IN BACKBONE NETWORKS - The claimed subject matter provides systems and/or methods that discover comparative differences in performance of Internet Service Provider networks. The system can include devices, components, and/or processes that partitions measurement processes into cycles and measures at least one Internet Service Provider network every cycle, develops and distributes to interrogation nodes a list of destination Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to interrogate, and utilizes results delivered or retrieved from interrogation nodes to generate a report on the comparative performance of Internet Service Provider networks queried.
|TESTING DYNAMICALLY ADDRESSED NETWORK DEVICES - A method may include receiving, at a first network device, a message from a second network device. The method may include determining whether the message is a test setup message, where the test setup message includes a network address associated with the second network device. A test sequence may be initiated with the second network device based on the network address when it is determined that the message is a test setup message.
|METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION TIMING OF BASE STATION ANTENNA FOR TDD WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND BASE STATION ANTENNA USING THE SAME - A method for controlling a transmission/reception timing of a BS antenna for TDD wireless communications is provided, in which a control signal and an RF signal are separated from a modulated signal received from a BTS, a TDD synchronization signal is monitored from the received modulated signal, a periodic RF signal is checked from downlink transmission and uplink reception RF signals, an error between the TDD synchronization signal and the periodic RF signal is calculated, and a transmission/reception switching control signal is output according to the error.
|COMMUNICATION NETWORK MONITORING - Techniques described herein generally include methods, devices and systems related to monitoring a flow of data packets in a communication network. Some example devices may include one or more of a stream capture unit, and/or an analyzer. The stream capture unit can be coupled to a communication network, and configured to monitor a flow of data packets associated with communication steams in the communication network, and identify a first stream of data packets and a second stream of data packets from the monitored flow of data packets. The first stream and the second stream are associated with a single destination. The analyzer can be coupled to the stream capture unit and configured to identify an event associated with from the first stream identified by the stream capture unit, identify information related to the identified event from the second stream identified by the stream capture unit, and determine a response based on the event and the information related to the event.
|Simulation of Multiple Nodes in an Internetwork - A method is provided for simulation of multiple network nodes in an internetwork. A range of a plurality of network addresses are assigned to a simulation node. The simulation node monitors network communications to listen for packets. Upon receipt of a packet having a destination address within the assigned range, a command is forwarded to an end-use application, such as firmware. The end-use application processes the command and returns a result. A response packet having the result is transmitted to the back office server with the destination address of the received packet as the source of the response packet.
|MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PDCP STATUS REPORT THEREOF - A mobile communication system, and method for transmitting a PDCP status report thereof capable of preventing the occurrence of data loss when re-establishing an RLC. When an RLC re-establishment occurs due to an RLC internal error, a receiving PDCP entity triggers a status report to transmit it to a transmitting PDCP entity even if PDCP entities are not replaced by others. The transmitting PDCP entity checks whether a received state of each PDCP SDU based on the triggered PDCP status report, and then re-transmits PDCP SDUs having not successfully received by the receiving PDCP entity.
|METHOD FOR ROUTING-ASSISTED TRAFFIC MONITORING - A method for routing-assisted traffic monitoring includes providing a set of flows, each flow having an associated ingress routing device and an associated egress routing device. A controller determines a micro-flowset routing for the set of flows, the micro-flowset routing defining which of a set of directed links connecting a plurality of routing devices are used to route each of the flows from the respective ingress routing device to the respective egress routing device. The controller transmits flow information to at least a first routing device of the plurality of routing devices according to the micro-flowset routing, the flow information defining which of the set of directed links are to be used to route at least one flow entering the first routing device to a second routing device of the plurality of routing devices.
|Home Phoneline Network Alliance Responder for IPTV Installations - A device for testing a home phoneline network alliance performance of a local network is disclosed. The device includes a first network interface, a second network interface, a test module, and a processor. The first network interface is adapted to connect with the local network through a first type of cable. The second network interface is adapted to connect with the local network through a second type of cable. The test module is connected to the first network interface and to the second network interface, the test module is adapted to receive a test signal transmitted over a cable in the local network. The processor is connected to the test module and is adapted to execute a plurality of program instructions to determine a signal quality for the test signal received over the cable and to output a performance result signal for the cable in the local network based on the signal quality.
|Apparatus and Method for Testing a Wireless Transceiver - An apparatus for testing a communication circuit includes a dynamic range module. The dynamic range module includes signal strength adjustment module and a control module. The signal strength adjustment module adjusts a peak signal strength of test packets transmitted according to a predetermined test sequence. The control module selectively controls the signal strength adjustment module to adjust the peak signal strength based on the predetermined test sequence.
|Method for partitioning network flows based on their time information - To organize flows records into buckets and optimize their indexed access to/from storage medium, a bucket identifier is associated with each flow record. The bucket identifier is derived from some other characteristic of the network flow, such as a timestamp or source identification associated with the network flow. In this way, contention is decreased as analysis can occur on the aggregated flow records, while new flow records are stored.
|QOS IN HETEROGENEOUS NOC BY ASSIGNING WEIGHTS TO NOC NODE CHANNELS AND USING WEIGHTED ARBITRATION AT NOC NODES - Systems and methods described herein are directed to solutions for NoC interconnects that provide end-to-end uniform- and weighted-fair allocation of resource bandwidths among various contenders. The example implementations are fully distributed and involve computing weights for various channels in a network on chip (NoC) based on the bandwidth requirements of flows at the channels. Example implementations may involve using the weights to perform weighted arbitration between channels in the NoC to provide quality of service (QoS). The weights may be adjusted dynamically by monitoring the activity of flows at the channels. The newly adjusted weights can be used to perform the weighted arbitrations to avoid unfair bandwidth allocations.
|Performance Monitoring in a Communication Network - In a mobile communication network, the data traffic is mapped to a number of bearers (
|SUPERSET PACKET FORWARDING FOR OVERLAPPING FILTERS AND RELATED SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Systems and methods are disclosed that allow for improved management and control of packet forwarding in network systems. Network devices and tool optimizers and a related systems and methods are disclosed for improved packet forwarding between input ports and output ports. The input ports and output ports are configured to be connected to source devices and destination devices, for example, network sources and destination tools in a network monitoring environment. The network devices and tool optimizers disclosed can use superset packet forwarding, such that ingress filter engines are configured with ingress filter rules so as to forward a superset of packets to output ports associated with overlapping filters. Egress filter engines are configured with egress filter rules to then determine which of the superset packets are actually sent out the output ports.
|METHOD TO PERFORM A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM - A method for performing wireless communication in a data-collection system includes a) listening whether a channel is free or busy and if the channel is free, transmitting; b) if the channel is busy, generating a random number and associating therewith a first interval of time to determine the instant of the start of transmission and further whether said channel is busy, identifying a second variable interval of time, monitoring the data exchanged in said channel with other devices that occupy the channel, queuing a third interval of time obtained from said first interval of time onto said second interval of time and transmitting at the end of said third interval of time. The second interval of time has a duration that is equal to the time wherein the channel remains in busy status.
|Determining a Logic State of a Device - A system includes a driver device configured to transmit a first signal through a communication line to a device that is external to the system; wherein the communication line is configured to (i) receive signals from the system and to transmit signals to the system, and (ii) receive signals from the device that is external to the system and to transmit signals to the device that is external to the system; a reference device configured to generate a reference value; and a receiver configured to: receive, through the communication line, a second signal affected by an output from the device that is external to the system; and determine a logic state of the device external to the system based on: a value associated with the second signal on the communication line; a value associated with the first signal transmitted by the driver device; and the reference value.
|HOME NODE IDENTIFICATION, INTERFERENCE REDUCTION, AND ENERGY SAVINGS - Systems and methods for reducing interference and saving power for home Node Bs are disclosed. Home Node Bs can be configured to remain in sleep mode until needed based on various criteria, periodically operating transmit and receive components in order to detect mobile devices that may need the services of the home Node B. Mobile devices can indicate one or several target home Node Bs using one or more node identifiers within a proximity indication message. Closed subscriber group identifiers and membership data may also be included in a proximity indication message. Node or cell identities, along with membership data, may be stored in a fingerprint database or white-list on a mobile device.
|Dynamic State Machine - In certain embodiments, a method includes receiving, using one or more processors, a trigger expression. The method may include processing, using the one or more processors, the trigger expression, the trigger expression comprising a first one or more terms comprising a first one or more fields, to generate a reduced trigger expression. The reduced trigger expression includes a second one or more terms comprising a second one or more fields and being logically equivalent to the trigger expression. The method may include generating, using the one or more processors, a dynamic state machine by generating a first data structure comprising each of the second one or more fields, generating, based on the first data structure, an expanded trigger expression by adding one or more additional terms for possible state transitions, and generating, based on the expanded trigger expression, a second data structure.
|METHOD OF CSI REPORTING, USER EQUIPMENT AND ENODE B - Provided is reporting one or more long term CSI components to an eNode B, wherein at least one long term CSI component being reported with multiple values; and reporting a transmission scheme assumption indicator (TSAI) together with a set of short term CSI components to the eNode B, wherein the TSAI indicating the eNode B of a value of the multiple values of the at least one long term CSI component to be currently used and of the set of short term CSI components being conditioned on the value indicated by the TSAI, wherein the short term CSI components being reported more frequently.
|Dynamic Switch Contact Protection - A dynamic switch contact protection circuit and technique to protect a channel switch within an electrical system by limiting transients when the switch is turned on or turned off. The protection circuit comprises switching between a high resistance path and a low resistance path. The high resistance path comprises a resistor. A bypass switch is connected in parallel to the resistor to affect the low resistance path. The protection circuit can connect or disconnect switch cards to the electrical system enabling the creation of a larger switching structure. Disconnected switch cards within a switching structure preserves system bandwidth by limiting capacitive loading. Electing which switch to close last or open first can prolong the length of usage of the switches.
|Systems and methods for accessing voice transmissions - Various systems and methods for intercepting transmissions are disclosed. In one embodiment, a system is disclosed that includes a media gateway communicably coupled to a soft switch and an acquisition facility. A first processor and a first computer readable medium is associated with the soft switch. The computer readable medium includes instructions executable by the processor to receive a transmission originating from a first communicator and indicating at least a second communicator, and to direct the transmission to the acquisition facility via the media gateway. A second processor and second computer readable medium are included, and the second computer readable medium includes instructions executable by the second processor to direct the transmission from the media gateway to the second communicator such that direction of the transmission to an acquisition facility is obscured from at least the second communicator. Various other systems and methods are also disclosed.
|Hierarchical and Incremental Multivariate Analysis for Process Control - A technique for analyzing two or more data streams respectively generated from two or more components of a controllable process includes the following steps. In a first step, a statistical analysis is performed on each of the two or more data streams to generate first analysis results in the form of respective statistical results for the two or more data streams. In a second step, at least a portion of the statistical results from at least one of the two or more data streams is combined with at least a portion of the statistical results from at least another one of the two or more data streams to yield second analysis results. The controllable process is adjustable based on at least one of the first analysis results and the second analysis results.
|SCALABLE PACKET ANALYZER AND RELATED METHOD - A scalable packet analyzer receives data packets from a data packet source for packet analysis and includes a plurality of policy engine arrays, each having a plurality of packet analysis microengines. A policy algorithm loader module is operative with each packet analysis microengine for loading a policy algorithm to each packet analysis microengine such that each packet analysis microengine analyzes specific sections of the data packet in parallel within each policy engine array based on the applied policy algorithm to obtain data about the data packet for further data packet processing.
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MONITORING DOWNLINK CHANNELS - Disclosed are a method and a device for monitoring a downlink control channel in a wireless communication system. The method for monitoring a downlink control channel in a wireless communication system may comprise the steps of determining whether a common search space in a subframe exists in a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) region or in an enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH) region; and when the common search space exists in the ePDCCH region, monitoring, in the ePDCCH region, a downlink control channel for hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgement (ACK) or non-acknowledgement (NACK) information.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A BUFFER STATUS REPORT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure proposes a method for transmitting a buffer status report informing of the data to be transmit in uplink. The method for transmitting buffer status report of a terminal in a wireless communication system includes checking, when allocating uplink resource for new data transmission, whether first buffer status report triggered but not cancelled exists, generating, when the first buffer status report exists, uplink data including the buffer status report, checking whether second buffer status report triggered but not cancelled exist except for the buffers status report included in the uplink data, and determining whether to cancel the second buffer status report depending on whether the first buffer status report is a regular buffer status report or periodic buffer status report. With the proposed method, the terminal is capable of transmitting the padding BSR without extra cancellation operation, resulting in reduction terminal's operation complexity.
|ANTENNA ARCHITECTURE AND OPERATIONAL METHOD FOR RF TEST CONNECTOR REDUCTION - A method and system configures a wireless communication device to support various radio frequency test modes. A controller determines whether an RF test cable is connected between test equipment and a test connector while a corresponding transceiver(s) is operating. In response to determining that the RF test cable is connected between test equipment and the test connector while the corresponding transceiver is operating, the controller provides an antenna tuner configuration(s) corresponding to the operating transceivers to support a test mode which, for example, can include any of a carrier aggregation (CA) test mode and a diversity transmission test mode. However, if the RF test cable is not connected between test equipment and the test connector while the corresponding transceiver(s) is operating, the controller determines an antenna tuner configuration corresponding to a normal/non-test device communication mode. The controller configures the antenna tuner(s) using the determined antenna tuner configuration(s).
|Method and Apparatus for Communication Data Over a Data Network - A Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer (DSLAM) is modified to monitor when a line synchronizes (i.e. sets up a DSL connection) and to automatically generate a notification to be sent to a management device of the access network if the rate has changed from the last time the line synchronized.
|Multiple packet routing system (MPRS) - A method and system for Multiple Packet Routing is disclosed. A first endpoint may be connected to a sound input/output device and a network. The first endpoint may be capable of breaking a call signal sent from the input/output device into a stream of packets and sending two or more duplicate streams over the network. A monitor may be connected to the network and the transmitter, and the monitor may be capable of monitoring a network characteristic and controlling a number of duplicate streams sent by the first endpoint based on the network characteristic. A second endpoint may be connected to the network. The second endpoint may be capable of receiving at least a portion of each of the two or more duplicate streams and recreating the call signal using the received portions of each of the two or more duplicate streams.
|SYNTHETIC CLIENT - A system with a device including a hardware processor is configured to perform operations: receiving, by the device, a message over a wired medium, wherein the message has a frame including (a) a MAC address as a source MAC address for the frame and (b) a second MAC address as a destination MAC address for the frame, extracting, by the device, the frame from the message received over the wired medium, and wirelessly transmitting, by the device, the frame without modifying the source MAC address and without modifying the destination MAC address.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING NETWORK COMMUNICATION - A method for monitoring communication on a network. The method includes configuring a classifier using a monitoring rule, receiving a plurality of packets from the network; analyzing each of the plurality of packets by the classifier to determine to which of the plurality of packets satisfies the monitoring rule; forwarding any of the plurality of packets that satisfy the monitoring rule to a first hardware receive ring (HRR) located on a first physical network interface (NI), forwarding any of the plurality of packets that do not satisfy the monitoring rule to a second HRR, and transmitting a first number of packets from the first HRR directly to user level memory, wherein the user level memory resides on a host operatively connected to the first physical NI.
|Diagnostics of Deployed Devices Based on Network Traffic - This disclosure is directed to performing diagnostics on deployed devices that use network connectivity to transmit data in response to at least partially automated processes. In some embodiments, a diagnostic entity may monitor network traffic from deployed devices. The diagnostic entity may aggregate at least some of the network traffic to create profiles for at least some of the deployed devices and/or for some activities. The diagnostic entity may then identify outlier devices/activities from observed network behavior of deployed devices and/or activities based on the accessed network traffic and the profiles. The diagnostic entity may generate reports and/or perform or cause some corrective operations in response to identification of the outliers. In various embodiments, the diagnostic entity may predict network usage information for a group of devices and may possibly suggest revisions to service plans and/or usage of the deployed devices based at least partly on the predicted usage.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING USER FEEDBACK IN ASSOCIATION WITH CONTENT IN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are described for enabling users to provide feedback in relation to content. Such a method includes receiving a stamp registration request from a first client terminal, wherein the stamp registration request includes first content identification information for identifying a first content item and first stamp information representing first user feedback relating to the first content item. The first stamp information identifies a first visual stamp object and a first stamp location representing a position of the first visual stamp object relative to a visual representation of the first content item in a user interface. Embodiments of the invention also include registering the first stamp information in association with the first content identification information and providing the first stamp information to a second client terminal in conjunction with responding to a content request from the second client terminal identifying the first content item.
|METHOD OF IMPROVING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION FUNCTIONALITY AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present invention provides a method of improving discontinuous reception (DRX) functionality. The method includes entering a DRX cycle, executing a first equation according to a system frame number, a subframe number, and a DRX cycle parameter, for generating a first result, executing a second equation according to a DRX start offset and the DRX cycle parameter, for generating a second result, and starting an on duration timer for monitoring a Physical Downlink Control Channel when the first result is equivalent to the second result.
|COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - A communication apparatus capable of being connected to a plurality of lines to perform communication shifts to a sleep mode when a condition for shifting to the sleep mode is satisfied, and measures a time during which the sleep mode continues. The communication apparatus returns from the sleep mode when the measured time reaches a predetermined time, and determines whether it is connected to at least one of the plurality of lines. If it is determined that the communication apparatus is connected to at least one of the plurality of lines, the communication apparatus is not powered off.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station in a downlink of a wireless communication system requires downlink channel status information of terminals to transmit link-adaptive transmission to the terminals. This channel status information is generated as a terminal receives a reference signal to be transmitted via the downlink, and fed back to the base station through a control channel of the uplink. Therefore, an increase in the transmission cycle of the reference signal and the feedback cycle of the channel status information may increase a difference between the channel status having been fed back from a terminal to the base station and the channel status at the point when data is actually transmitted to the terminal, thereby causing inefficient link-adaptive transmission and deteriorating the system performance. The present invention thus provides a method and apparatus for designing an uplink periodic feedback structure for reducing the channel status difference in case a reference signal for the estimation of a downlink channel status is transmitted over a prolonged cycle, and distributing a feedback overhead of terminals in terms of the system.
|Discontinuous Reception in Carrier Aggregation Wireless Communication Systems - A communication system is presented, which is capable of sending a transmission over an interface having at least two aggregated component carriers including a primary component carrier and at least one secondary component carrier, wherein the primary component carrier has a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) associated therewith and wherein the PDCCH is capable of signaling allocations for the primary component carrier and the at least one secondary component carrier. A method of operating a network element including sending to a user equipment a transmission indication indicative of the transmission in the PDCCH of the primary component carrier. A method of operating a user equipment includes monitoring downlink control signaling for a transmission indication indicative of a transmission to the user equipment only on the PDCCH of the primary component carrier.
|Monitoring pattern separation between component carriers based on user equipment RF layout - A network learns a user equipment's capability information whether the UE is capable of simultaneous and independent operation in multiple component carriers. The network configures a monitoring (e.g., discontinuous reception, RSRP/RSRQ measurements, PDCCH reception) pattern for each of multiple component carriers CCs that are configured for the UE in dependence on the received capability information. The capability information derives from the UE's RF layout; if the capability information says the UE is capable of such simultaneous and independent operation the network can assign for the CCs different monitoring patterns that are independent of one another and the UE will have no gaps where it cannot take or send a measurement. This knowledge is particularly useful if the CCs are frequency non-contiguous with one another. If the capability information says the UE is not so capable, the network must assign monitoring patterns to that UE for all its configured CCs that are not independent of one another.
|MOBILE TERMINAL TEST APPARATUS AND MOBILE TERMINAL TEST METHOD - To provide a mobile terminal test apparatus and a mobile terminal test method capable of setting the setting items more easily and more accurately than in the related art and testing mobile terminals. A mobile terminal test apparatus
|DEVICE AND METHODS FOR INCREASING WIRELESS CONNECTION SPEEDS - Various embodiments include wireless client device comprising an application subsystem including a processor and a storage device coupled to the processor, a communication subsystem coupled to the application subsystem, the communication subsystem including a media access control (MAC) device and a physical (PHY) device, wherein the physical device is operably coupled to the processor of the application subsystem, wherein the physical device is operable to receive a wireless signal, to analyze the wireless signal for at least one aspect of wireless performance, and to determine if the at least one aspect of wireless performance can be improved, wherein, if it is determined that the at least one aspect of wireless performance can be improved, the physical device is operable to pass the wireless signal to the processor of the application subsystem for processing of the wireless signal within the processor.
|SIP Information Extraction - SIP information extraction is disclosed. A method includes receiving a user selection to create a test involving the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). Test information is received from the user, including a user selection to extract data included in SIP messages. A user interface guiding a user in specifying SIP data extraction instructions is provided, including receiving source selection instructions, data selection instructions, and data refinement instructions from the user. A test is then executed involving SIP messages. The test includes applying the SIP data extraction instructions to obtain extracted refined SIP message data and using the extracted refined SIP message data to create test SIP messages that include the extracted refined SIP message data or verify if the extracted data conforms to SIP standards or specialized implementations. The method may be implemented in software and performed on one or more network cards and in one or more network testing systems, and may be implemented by one or more computing devices.
|Correlation of data of a control and/or data transmission system and of a system model representing it - The invention proposes data correlation methods for testing the functionality of a system element to be used inside a control and/or data processing system as well as, in essentially the opposite direction, for designing a system model having at least one transmission function for modeling a control and/or data transmission system with at least one system element. In order to perform this method, the invention further proposes a data-processing device, particularly a mobile data-processing device, which comprises a signal unit (
|Method for Processing Quality of Service of a Data Transport Channel - A method for processing quality of service of a signaling data transport channel in a packet transmission network comprising at least one management node (
|Diagnostic Tool and Method for Retrieving Subscriber Information from Nodes Located Within a Layer 2 Aggregation Network - An in-band diagnostic tool and method are described herein that are capable of retrieving subscriber information from one or more nodes located within a layer 2 aggregation network. In one application, the diagnostic tool and method can be used by a customer service representative to retrieve subscriber information (e.g., user privileges, current bandwidth usage, available bandwidth) related to a customer that receives television, Internet etc. from an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) network (which is an application-specific layer 2 aggregation network).
|METHOD FOR REMOTELY MONITORING SYSTEM - A method for remotely monitoring a system is provided. In the present invention, when a computer system receives a network packet sent by a remote device, it determines whether the network packet is a remote management control protocol (RMCP) packet. If the network packet is a RMCP packet, the data content of the RMCP packet is parsed and a corresponding monitoring operation is executed to obtain a monitoring result. Finally, the monitoring result is transmitted back to the remote device. Accordingly, the computer system can be remotely monitored through the network without using a Baseboard Management Controller (BMC), so that the hardware cost can be saved.
|Method For Processing Information Reporting, Information Reporting Device And System - A method for processing information reporting, including: obtaining event information when an REFE detects an event; and processing reporting of event information according to a control policy. An information reporting device, which is configured with: an event detecting unit, adapted to detect an event; a policy controlling unit, adapted to obtain a control policy corresponding to the event, and instruct a reporting processing unit to perform processing according to the control policy; and a reporting processing unit, adapted to generate and send the information report.
|TUNNELING REPORTS FOR REAL-TIME INTERNET PROTOCOL MEDIA STREAMS - A router, switch, or other network node generates reports that contain packet level statistics and other information for a monitored media stream. The media stream reports reduce the amount of bandwidth typically required for sending monitored media stream information back to a central analysis device. However the computation of other media stream analytics, such as long term statistical averaging or quality metric computation, is performed by the central analysis device to remove some of the processing burden from the individual network nodes.
|METHOD TO ENSURE THAT LIFE-CRITICAL DATA IS TRANSPORTED EFFECTIVELY AND SAFELY - The invention relates generally to a method to ensure that mission-critical data is transported safely and effectively across a wireless LAN, and more particularly, to a method which determines network latency under model network loads and ensures that the RF signal strength requirements are met for all RF coverage areas supported by the wireless network, allowing for data transmission which is effective and complete, with acceptable latency and loss, and no unacceptable corruption of the data.
|Parallel Packet Processor with Session Active Checker - There are disclosed an apparatus, process, and computer readable storage media for processing received packets. The apparatus may include a plurality of packet processors. A session active checker may identify a session associated with a first received packet and may determine if any other packet belonging to the identified session is currently being processed by any of the plurality of packet processors. The first receive packet may be sent to a selected one of the plurality of packet processors when no other packets belonging to the identified session are currently being processed.
|NETWORK DEVICE AND NETWORK SYSTEM - In a ring network including an old master node
|Network identity clustering - A computer-implemented method for communication analysis includes monitoring communication sessions, which are conducted by entities in a communication network. Identifiers that identify the entities are extracted from the monitored sessions. The identifiers extracted from the sessions are grouped in respective identity clusters, each identity cluster identifying a respective entity. A subset of the identity clusters, which includes identifiers that identify a target entity, is merged to form a merged identity cluster that identifies the target entity. An activity of the target entity in the communication network is tracked using the merged identity cluster.
|COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD - A communication control apparatus transfers received data from an external unit to a first memory unit, and at the same time transferring a header portion of the received data to a second memory unit, and performs addition operations the received data transferred to the first memory unit to obtain a checksum value of the received data. It analyzes the header portion transferred to the second memory unit in response to the completion of transferring the header portion to the second memory unit. Then, it acquires an addition value for the region except object regions of checksum for determining an error in the received data, and determines the error in the received data using the result of the addition operation for the received data by the adding unit and the addition value acquired by the acquiring unit.
|DETECTING DELIMITERS FOR LOW-OVERHEAD COMMUNICATION IN A NETWORK - Communicating between stations over a shared medium comprises: transmitting a waveform from a first station over the shared medium at a time that is based on a shared time reference shared by multiple of the stations, the waveform including at least a first symbol, having a predetermined symbol length, comprising a first set of frequency components at predetermined carrier frequencies modulated with preamble information stored in a second station and a second set of frequency components at predetermined carrier frequencies modulated with information to be communicated to at least one station, with the carrier frequencies of the first and second sets of frequency components being integral multiples of a frequency interval determined by the inverse of the symbol length; monitoring the shared medium at a second station, before transmission of the waveform from the first station, to detect a start of the first symbol of the waveform at one of multiple time slot boundaries, the monitoring including, after each of multiple time slot boundaries, periodically sampling a series of values received over the shared medium starting at the beginning of the most recent time slot boundary and processing the sampled values to generate a metric value that indicates whether the start of the first symbol of the waveform has been detected; and in response to detecting the start of the first symbol of the waveform, demodulating the first symbol of the waveform from values sampled based on the shared time reference.
|MULTI-ANTENNA RADIO CHANNEL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TWO-WAY RADIO CHANNEL MEASUREMENT - The present invention relates to a multi-antenna radio channel measurement system and method for a two-way radio channel measurement, including: Control & Console Software to select a radio measurement mode, generate a probing signal for measurement, receive input parameters to be measured, and deliver the parameters to a baseband unit; a baseband unit (BBU) to set a transmission/reception frequency band and bandwidth and set a timing using the selected radio measurement mode and the received input parameters; a timing unit to synchronize a time with another radio channel measurement system to generate a transmission/reception synchronization signal, and provide the transmission/reception synchronization signal to the BBU; a transceiver unit (TRXU) to up-convert the probing signal for measurement and down-convert the reception channel signal; and a radio frequency (RF) front-end unit (RFFU) to switch to a suitable antenna according to a timing control signal of the BBU.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PACKET TRANSFER - An apparatus includes a plurality of receiving ports and a plurality of transmitting ports. The apparatus stores, in a memory thereof, transfer control information for transferring a packet to a node that is able to transfer the received packet, and monitors packets received via the plurality of receiving ports. Upon receiving a first packet conforming to a predetermined communication protocol and containing a frame including destination information being registered in the transfer control information, the apparatus rewrites a header of the first packet, based on the transfer control information, and transmits the first packet whose header has been rewritten via corresponding one of the plurality of transmitting ports indicated by the transfer control information.
|OPPORTUNISTIC TRANSMISSIONS WITHIN MOCA - Embodiments may be disclosed herein that provide systems, devices, and methods of operating a Multimedia over Coax (MoCA) network. One such embodiment is a method comprising: aggregating packets, including at least control packets and acknowledgement packets, with other packets.
|METHOD FOR CLASSIFYING PACKET ON MOBILE TERMINAL - A method for classifying a packet on a mobile terminal according to the present invention includes: receiving a transmission request of IP packet data from an upper layer; determining whether there is a packet classifier for classifying the IP packet data; generating the packet classifier by obtaining a service grade and a service parameter for the IP packet data if it is determined that there is no packet classifier for classifying the IP packet data; and requesting a connection identifier of the generated packet classifier to transmit the IP packet data.
|APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING UBIQUITOUS SENSOR NETWORK PROTOCOL - An apparatus for analyzing a USN protocol includes a packet analyzer and a protocol analyzer. The packet analyzer collects packets communicated between USN sensor nodes through at least one or more channels. The protocol analyzer processes/displays the collected packets using an XML schema defined according to the USN protocol. Thus, the USN protocol analyzing apparatus can decode/encode packets collected through a plurality of channels.
|COOPERATIVE DIAGNOSIS OF WEB TRANSACTION FAILURES - A client-based collaborative approach called WebProfiler is used for diagnosing Web transaction failures. The WebProfiler leverages end-host cooperation to pool together observations on the success or failure of Web transactions from multiple vantage points. These observations are utilized by a collaborative blame attribution algorithm to identify a suspect network entity that caused the Web transaction failure.
|Method for Testing a Communication Network by Means of a Terminal - The invention relates to a method for testing a communication network by means of a terminal, which is provided with a screen and is used for exchanging information via a telecommunication network. The inventive method comprises the following steps: a step for periodically totally or partly retrieving values of the terminal screen pixels, a step for computing on the base of said pixel values one or several parameters representative for the screen content and a step for transmitting said one or several parameters to storing and/or analyzing means.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO SIGNALING REQUEST TO TRANSMIT TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatus related to the communication of traffic in peer to peer communications are described. A peer to peer communications system includes traffic slots, and for a pair of devices (first and second) having a connection a first transmission request resource and a second transmission request resource are associated with a traffic transmission interval of the traffic slot, the first request resource preceding the second request resource. The first device can utilize the first resource to transmit a request to transmit traffic to the second device, and when it does, it also uses the second resource to transmit additional information corresponding to the request and/or traffic. If the second device doesn't detect a request on the first resource, then it can use the second resource to transmit a request to first device to transmit traffic to the first device.
|Routing Packets on a Network Using Directed Graphs - A method of routing a data packet between a first node and a second node on a communication network includes defining a first graph through the first node and the second node and zero or more intermediate nodes, associating several nodes which belong to the communication network with the first graph, associating a first unique graph identifier with the first graph and providing at least partial definitions of the first graph and the first unique identifier to at least some of the nodes associated with the first graph. The method then sends data packet with the graph identifier from the first node, and directs the data packet to the second node via the zero or more intermediate nodes using the graph identifier. This method may include forwarding the packet to a neighbor node of an intermediate node if the intermediate node and the neighbor node are nodes associated with the first graph and if the intermediate node and the neighbor node are connected by at least one direct communication connection.
|A SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING AD HOC NETWORKS IN COOPERATION WITH SERVICE PROVIDER NETWORKS - Systems and methods for using ad hoc networks in cooperation with service provider networks. Multi-network devices communicate with each other as peers in an ad hoc network while each accessing a service provider network. The multi-network devices may each receive the same real-time multimedia stream, be it broadcast or unicast, while sharing stream parity information. The peers may take corrective action to maintain uninterrupted playback of the real-time multimedia stream with no or minimal loss in perceived quality. The peers may further cooperate to facilitate bandwidth and power optimization, fast channel switching, and real-time mobile traffic and network analysis, displays and alerts.
|Method For Transitioning Between Multiple Reception Levels - There is provided a method for enabling a user equipment (UE) to transition between a non-discontinuous reception (Non-DRX) level and at least one discontinuous reception (DRX) level. The UE in a DRX level wakes up periodically to monitor a scheduling channel. The method includes receiving a DRX indicator in a Non-DRX level with continuously monitoring the scheduling channel and transitioning from the Non-DRX level to a DRX level indicated by the DRX indicator. The UE can transition between multiple DRX levels by an explicit command/signaling.
|Optimized statistics processing in integrated DPI service-oriented router deployments - A method of processing statistics in integrated deep packet inspection routers, including one or more of the following: getting a first entity, determining that an application statistic has changed for the first entity, getting application statistics for a first application of the first entity, determining that the application statistics for the first application of the first entity have changed, and processing the application statistics for the first application of the first entity.
|CONTROL APPARATUS, COMPUTER SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A control apparatus includes: a communication identification unit that identifies a predetermined communication between or among predetermined apparatuses by matching a packet received via a switch against a preset pattern(s); and a switch control unit that sets, at least in the switch, control information in which match conditions for determining the predetermined communication between or among the predetermined apparatuses and a processing content(s) applied to the communication between or among the apparatuses are associated with each other.
|Method and Arrangement in a Communication System For Exchanging a Status Report - Methods and arrangements in a first node for requesting a status report from a second node. The first node and the second node are both comprised within a wireless communication system. The status report comprises positive and/or negative acknowledgement of data sent from the first node, to be received by the second node. The methods comprises the steps of: detecting if any data units have been lost during the transmission, generating a status report, based on the made detection concerning lost data units, buffering the generated status report in a buffer, updating the buffered status report when a change concerning lost data units is detected, receiving a trigger for sending a status report to the second node, and transmitting the status report to the second node, as a response to the received trigger.
|REPORT METHOD AND ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE AND RADIO DEVICE USING THE METHOD - A frame specifying unit frames in such a manner that a frame containing at least a plurality of slots is repeated and in such a manner that a part of the plurality of slots contained in each frame are reserved for use on an access control apparatus. An empty slot identifying unit detects a slot, which is usable for the communications between radio apparatuses, from among the remaining part of the plurality of slots. A selection unit selects a slot from among the part of the plurality of slots in order to broadcast information on the detected slot. A modulation unit and an RF unit broadcast information on the slot detected by the empty slot identifying unit, using the selected slot.
|COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR THE SAME - A communication device is provided that includes a communication unit configured to perform communication of a voice signal with a party device via a communication line, a wireless communication unit configured to perform wireless communication of a data signal with an external device, and a controller configured to perform first wireless communication and second wireless communication in parallel, using the wireless communication unit. The first wireless communication is adapted to enable wireless communication of the voice signal between a voice communication device and the communication unit via the wireless communication unit. The second wireless communication is adapted to enable wireless communication of the data signal between the external device and the wireless communication unit.
|Method, Apparatus, and Computer Program Product for Wireless Signal Storage With Signal Recognition Detection Triggering - Various methods for wireless signal storage with signal recognition detection triggering are provided. One method may include receiving a plurality of wireless signals via a plurality of frequency channels, storing representations of the plurality of wireless signals in a signal buffer, and receiving a trigger request for a signal of interest. In this regard, the trigger request may have been generated based on an analysis of at least one wireless signal within the plurality of wireless signals to thereby identify the signal of interest. The method may also include retrieving a representation of the signal of interest from the signal buffer based on the trigger request, and analyzing the retrieved representation of the signal of interest with associated signal characteristics to determine a location of a source of the signal of interest. Similar apparatuses and computer program products are also provided.
|COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A cellular communications system is provided in which a user device selects a cell with which to register based on whether or not a candidate cell can provide an emergency call service. This determination is preferably determined having reference to a radio access technology associated with the candidate cell and, where the cell is an E-UTRA cell, having reference to information provided in system information output by the cell.
|ROBUST UE RECEIVER - Methods, systems, apparatus and computer program products are provided to improve the reliability of data reception. In one provided embodiment, a communication signal is parsed by a communication device to identify repeat request identifiers. The device determines an inter-arrival time of two instances of the same identifier and processes the communication signal based on a comparison between the inter-arrival time and a predetermined time. This Abstract is provided for the sole purpose of complying with the Abstract requirement rules that allow a reader to quickly ascertain the disclosed subject matter. Therefore, it is to be understood that it should not be used to interpret or limit the scope or the meaning of the claims.
|METHOD OF IMPLEMENTING PACKET SEARCH BY DOUBLE SLIDING WINDOWS - A method of implementing packet search by double sliding windows is provided. The method adopts a three-level barrel shift register to store input packet data, and a position of a sliding window
|DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. These services may include caching of data, data or video compression techniques, push-based services, charging, application serving, analytics, security, data filtering, and new revenue-producing services, as well as others. This architecture allows performing new mobile network services at the edge of a mobile data network within the infrastructure of an existing mobile data network.
|METHOD OF AVOIDING INTERFERENCE IN A MULTI-PICONET - A wireless device in a first piconet using a first time-frequency code senses interference from a second piconet using a second time-frequency code that is different from the first time-frequency code. The wireless device detects a beacon period of the second piconet. The wireless device reserves at least one medium access slot corresponding to the beacon period of the second piconet among a plurality of medium access slots of the first piconet.
|ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - One embodiment is a source router that monitors the performance of an Ethernet network. The source router generates an Ethernet connectivity check request frame that includes a transmission timestamp, and transmits the Ethernet connectivity check request frame to a destination router. The source router receives a reply from the destination router that is transmitted in response to receiving the Ethernet connectivity check request frame and determines a round trip time between the source router and the destination router based on a time of receipt of the reply and the transmission timestamp.
|WIRELESS TRANSMITTING DEVICE AND WIRELESS RECEIVING DEVICE - A wireless transmitting device (
|Method, Mobile Device and Communication System to Determine the Type of a Network Node - A network node, a mobile device, a communication system, a method for detecting the type of a network node, the method for transmitting the type of a network node and the use of a data frame for determining the type of a network node is described. To distinguish between different types of network nodes, a signal pattern including an attribute is transmitted/received. The attribute is type-indicative of the type of the network node. Different ways of implementing the type-indicative attribute are described.
|Electronic message delivery system including a network device - In a computer network system based on an open system interconnection model, where the computer network system includes at least a network layer (Layer 3) and an application layer (Layer 7), a system and a method for managing electronic message traffic into and out of the computer network system including defining a communication channel between Layer 3 and Layer 7 for exchanging data directly therebetween for use in enhancing flow of the electronic message traffic.
|REDUCTION OF UNNECESSARY DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL RECEPTION AND DECODING - A method for channel signaling is described. The method includes determining (e.g., by a UE) whether at least one DL subframe is a valid reference resource. If the at least one DL subframe is not a valid reference resource, reporting measurements of a DL channel measured during the at least one DL subframe is inhibited. The method may include determining (e.g., by an eNB) whether reporting of the at least one DL subframe of a DL channel is required. If reporting is not required, a message configured to cause the at least one UE to inhibit reporting measurements of the DL channel (e.g., CQI measurements) measured during the at least one DL subframe is sent to the UE. Determining whether the at least one downlink subframe is a valid reference resource is based at least in part on the message. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described.
|SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMISSIONS DURING A TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to enhance capacity of a wireless communication network through spatial reuse of the shared communication medium, using an autonomous parallel operation without central coordination and header frames. Example embodiments of the invention include a signaling method that defines and sets up a Simultaneous Transmissions mode between two pairs of devices to reuse a transmission opportunity (TXOP). In example embodiments of the invention, an arrangement may be made between device pairs (each pair comprising a transmitter device and a receiver device) to allow selected pairs to communicate at a same time. The example signaling method defines example signaling for setting up simultaneous transmitter/receiver pairs in a network and operating the transmitter/receiver pairs in simultaneous transmission. If a device in a setup pair detects some other transmission than that is not allowed by one of its device pair arrangements, the device ceases its transmission.
|Selective Scanning of Network Packet Traffic Using Cloud-Based Virtual Machine Tool Platforms - Network tool optimizer devices and related methods are disclosed that provide selective scanning of network packet traffic using cloud-based virtual machine tool platforms. Rather than require local network analysis tool resources, the disclosed embodiments identify subsets of packet traffic of interest, and these subsets are forwarded to a cloud-based server system where cloud-based virtual machine tool platforms are used to process the subsets of traffic of interest. Results from this processing are then provided back to adjust the operation of the network tool optimizers. Some further embodiments use local capture buffers and remote cloud replay buffers to stored subsets of traffic locally for later communication to cloud server systems where cloud-based tools analyze replays of the captured network traffic. Some further embodiments also use results from cloud-based tools to initiate local virtual machine tool platforms that are used to further analyze traffic of interest.
|AUTONOMIC PROVISIONING OF HOSTED APPLICATIONS WITH LEVEL OF ISOLATION TERMS - A method and a system are described that involve autonomic provisioning of hosted applications with level of isolation terms. In one embodiment, the system includes an infrastructure registry to provide a set of heterogeneous infrastructure resources, an autonomic provisioning service unit to select a subset of the heterogeneous infrastructure resources, (the subset of resources to fulfill a service level agreement (SLA) with a corresponding level of isolation), and a monitoring unit to collect information about the subset of resources and send the collected information to the autonomic provisioning service unit.
|NETWORK APPARATUS AND SELECTIVE INFORMATION MONITORING METHOD USING THE SAME - The present invention presents a network apparatus and a selective information monitoring method using the network apparatus, which allow a user to monitor only required information (the field information of packets) from all received packets. The network apparatus one or more physical interfaces connected to a monitoring target host and configured to receive network packets from the monitoring target host, and a switch fabric module including a configurable monitoring module configured to perform filtering so that selective information is extracted from the network packets collected through the one or more physical interfaces.
|REMOTE TESTING AND MONITORING TO A CELL SITE IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods provide remote performance monitoring and testing to a cell site in a cellular communications network. The systems and methods include a network management center having remote monitoring and testing capabilities utilizing an intelligent customer service unit that traps and makes available alarm information on the transport link.
|METHOD OF NETWORK MANAGEMENT BY ASSISTANCE FROM TERMINAL USING CONTROL-PLANE SIGNALING BETWEEN TERMINAL AND NETWORK - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate network management and optimization. As described herein, a network and a device communicating with the network can exchange network management information, thereby supporting a Self Organized Network (SON) architecture for improved network management and optimization performance. A Non-Access Stratum (NAS) layer protocol and/or an Internet Protocol (IP) application, in combination with a set of associated network management messages, can be utilized to exchange network management information between a device and a network. As further described herein, various procedures can be utilized to install a SON policy to a device in order to define device behavior for operations such as collecting and reporting information related to network management. Additionally, a set of standardized events can be defined, based on which a device can detect the occurrence of an event and report the occurrence to an associated network.
|FIELD DEPLOYABLE MESSAGE COMPROMISER - A method and apparatus are disclosed for establishing a field deployable message compromiser which is connected between two network elements and identifies and removes predetermined messages from an incoming message stream. Subsequent to removal the test protocol processor may perform one or more of several actions according to the results of statistical calculations. These actions include allowing the message to drop, replacing the message after a delay, replacing the message after altering the payload of the message, and replacing the message after altering the message type. The disclosed field deployable message compromiser is particularly useful for providing a means to perform in situ field testing of network performance indicators under desired statistical conditions.
|Network Topologies for Energy Efficient Networks - One embodiment identifies all one-hop neighbor nodes and two-hop neighbor nodes of a node; determines an active set of one-hop neighbor nodes for the node, comprising: includes in the active set each one-hop neighbor node that is either an edge node or connected with at least one two-hop neighbor node with which no other one-hop neighbor nodes are connected; and if the active set is not yet complete, then: determine all combinations of one-hop neighbor nodes that are not already in the active set; and tests each combination in order of each combination's total-energy value to determine whether a specific combination is able to complete the active set; if no combination is able to complete the active set, then including all one-hop neighbor nodes in the active set; and communicates a message to each one-hop neighbor node in the active set indicating that it is in the active set.
|VERIFIABLE AND ACCURATE SERVICE USAGE MONITORING FOR INTERMEDIATE NETWORKING DEVICES - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, an intermediary networking device provides a service intermediary or intermediate connection between a network and one or more communications devices; implements a service policy set for assisting control of the intermediate networking device use of a service on the network, in which the service policy set includes one or more service policies, each policy being associated with either the intermediate networking device or a communications device; and monitors use of the service based on the service policy set; and in which the one or more of the communication devices include a service usage notification capability, and the implementation of the first service policy set is verified.
|SYSTEMS, METHODS AND DEVICES TO ENABLE MANAGEMENT OF WIRELESS NETWORK RESOURCES - The present disclosure provides systems, methods and devices for selectively adjusting a quality of service QoS of communication between a wireless access point and a UE based on both a value indicative of system resources and closed subscriber group (CSG) subscription data, such that a member has priority access to system resources over a non-member. The systems, methods and devices described herein allow an access point operating in a hybrid mode to discriminate between CSG members and non-members, without having to terminate communication links in order to provide CSG members with particular QoS levels. In some embodiments, non-members can maintain or establish new communication links with lower QoS levels in order to utilize unused and available capacity, thereby increasing the utilization of system resources available through femto nodes operating in a hybrid mode.
|Hardware Time Stamping and Synchronized Data Transmission - Hardware time stamping and synchronized data transmission disclosed. In a method, a reference time stamp and a local time stamp are obtained. A synchronization offset is prepared based on the local time stamp and the reference time stamp. Instructions are received to send a plurality of data units at a specified time. The plurality of data units are sent at the specified time based on referring to a local time obtained from a local clock and the synchronization offset to simultaneously send a packet storm comprising the plurality of data units. The method may be achieved by a network communications unit on a plurality of network cards included in a network testing system.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING NETWORK - A network monitoring apparatus retrieves packets flowing on a path to be monitored on a network using a packet capturing unit. A packet analyzing unit analyzes the retrieved packets. Although the network monitoring apparatus discards some of the packets using a sampling unit, a sampling rate is determined by a sampling-rate regulating unit. A resource-usage-amount measuring unit measures how many resources are actually used inside the network monitoring apparatus and the sampling rate determined by the sampling-rate regulating unit is based on a resource usage amount.
|HANDLING SESSION LINKING STATUS IN GXX UPDATE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method of linking sessions at a Policy and Rules Charging Node (PCRN). The method may include: receiving a gateway control session establishment request from a first gateway, the establishment request indicating a first session linking status; establishing a gateway control session between the gateway and the PCRN; receiving a second message from the first gateway for the established gateway control session including a Session-Linking-Indicator AVP indicating a second session linking status; determining whether the PCRN has linked the gateway control session to an IP-CAN session; if the PCRN has not linked the gateway control session to an IP-CAN session, replacing the first session linking status with the second session linking status for the established gateway control session; and linking the gateway control session with an IP-CAN session according to the second session linking status.
|REALIZATION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR REMOTE MONITORING - A realization method, apparatus and system for remote monitoring, the remote monitoring technique is used between interphones, which includes the following contents: a monitored party receives a remote monitoring request from a monitoring party, the remote monitoring request includes a target control information; the monitored party answers confirming information to the monitoring party after receiving the remote monitoring request successfully, and analyzes the target control information, and then selects transmission mode; the monitored party enters monitored state, starts transmission automatically, and implements the transmission according to the selected transmission mode. Applying the embodiments of the present invention, the remote monitoring function of a interphone will be improved, and the monitoring party can initiatively control the transmission time of the monitored party; or transmission interval and times of the monitored party, so as to realize the repeat monitoring is realized. Furthermore, the target control information of the present invention is not set completely by Customer Program Software (CPS), it also can be set according to the human-computer interface operation, the transmission time of the monitored party is controlled agilely.
|Methods, Apparatuses, System, Related Computer Program Product and Data Structure for Power Control and Resource Allocation - It is disclosed a method (and related apparatus) including transmitting, to each selected one of a plurality of terminals, a network control message including a plurality of limit values, each of the limit values being related to a first network communication parameter in relation to a second network communication parameter and being individually set for the selected terminal, based on a detected communication condition of each one of the plurality of terminals; and a method (and related apparatus) including configuring the terminal according to the first network communication parameter in relation to the second network communication parameter based on the received network control message including the plurality of limit values.
|DISTANCE MEASURING METHOD - Provided is a distance and position measuring method. A distance measuring method based on packets transmitted and received between a first node and a second node obtains first timing for transmitting a first packet from the first node, second timing for receiving the first packet in the second node, third timing for transmitting a second packet corresponding to the first packet from the second node, fourth timing for receiving the second packet in the first node, fifth timing for transmitting a third packet from the second node, and sixth timing for receiving the third packet in the first node to estimate a clock frequency offset based on the obtained timings, measures a first distance and a second distance based on the clock frequency offset and some of the timings, and measures a distance between the first node and the second node based on the first distance and the second distance.
|Method and Apparatus for Robust Transmission of Control Information in a Wireless Communication Network - A base station includes transmitter and associated processing circuits. The transmitter circuits are configured to transmit control information and data traffic to mobile terminals in repeating transmission intervals, each interval having defined control and data portions. The processing circuits are configured to dynamically determine that the control portion has insufficient resources for transmitting control information to one or more of the mobile terminals, and, in response, at least temporarily transmit control information in the data portion, rather than in the control portion, for a selected one or more of the mobile terminals. Correspondingly, a mobile terminal is configured to selectively search for and decode control information in the data portion of one or more transmission intervals, rather than in the control portion.
|ELECTRONIC DEVICE, SYTEM ON CHIP AND METHOD FOR MONITORING A DATA FLOW - An electronic device is provided which comprises a plurality of processing units (IP
|Network Switch With Onboard Diagnostics and Statistics Collection - The network switch is configured to enable monitoring of switched data. The network switch includes a housing and one or more port cards. Each port card has one or more physical ports and includes switching circuitry to selectively create a communication path between two physical ports. The network switch also includes packet analyzer circuitry, situated within the housing, to monitor data packets switched via a communication path between two physical ports without substantially degrading signal integrity of the data packets.
|Diagnostics for Serial Communication Busses - The serial communication bus includes a first module coupled to a second module via a serial cable. Each of the first and second modules comprise one or more of: a power interface, a controller, memory, a first interface, and a second interface. The power interface is configured to receive operating power for the respective module from an external power source. The controller is configured to obtain digital diagnostic data representative of operational characteristics of at least the respective module. The memory is configured to store the digital diagnostic data. The first interface is configured to allow an external host to read the digital diagnostic data from the memory. The second interface, which is distinct and separate from the first interface, is configured to serially communicate data to the second module via the serial cable.
|Method and Apparatus for Configuring Component Carriers in Carrier Aggregation - A method and an apparatus for configuring component carriers in carrier aggregation are provided. The method comprises: user equipment (UE) receiving a configuration message of the component carriers (S
|IDENTIFYING CLONED DEVICES - Methods and apparatuses for locating cloned CPEs in a communication system are provided. A clone detector receives from each access router in a communication system the MAC addresses of CPEs registered with the access router. The clone detector compares the MAC addresses to identify a cloned MAC address. The clone detector determines the service address for the cloned MAC address and identifies neighboring CPEs to the service address. The clone detector determines the access router to which the neighboring CPEs are registered and identifies a CPE having the cloned MAC address and registered to any other access router than the access router to which the neighboring CPEs are registered as a cloned CPE.
|Method and apparatus for compensating for performance degradation of an application session - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for compensating for a performance degradation of an application session in a plurality of application sessions associated with a network link. The performance of each application session in the plurality of application sessions associated with the network link is determined. The performance of each application session in the plurality is then compared. From this comparison, a lowest performance application session in the plurality of application sessions is identified. Corrective action is performed on packets scheduled to be transmitted over the lowest performance application session.
|ROOT CAUSE PROBLEM DETECTION IN NETWORK TRAFFIC INFORMATION - A device retrieves a first subset of events from data associated with a network, and determines one or more discriminating features of the first subset of events using a feature selection method. The device also retrieves one or more additional subsets of events, different than the first subset of events, from the data associated with the network, and cross validates the one or more discriminating features based on the one or more additional subsets of events. The device further detects a feature that is a root cause of a problem in the network based on the cross validated one or more discriminating features.
|System and method for characterizing communication network capacity in a geographic area - A system for characterizing network capacity that stores premise addresses of subscribers and weighted values for the corresponding capacity of the network. Geographic areas containing subscribers are displayed and portions or all of them may be selected by a user. The system generates first descriptors for the selected geographic areas. The system generates an average capacity for the premise addresses for the selected geographic areas and the first descriptors are assigned to corresponding elements of a first matrix based on the weighted value for the calculated average capacity for the premise addresses. The system generates a second matrix representing the relationship of all of the premise addresses and their respective capacity in the selected geographic area based on spatial population descriptors. The system further generates a third matrix using mathematical DCT formulas representing the overall capacity of the network in a geographic area.
|TUNNELING LOOP DETECTION CONTROL APPARATUS - Disclosed is a technique whereby a tunnel entry point, which encapsulates a packet (generates a tunnel packet), can detect the presence of a tunneling loop causing a packet to loop the same path while encapsulated. According to this technique, upon receipt of a packet from a source node (source)
|Method and Apparatus for Discovery and Tracking of Location of Networked Devices - Techniques are disclosed for discovery and tracking of locations of devices attached to a computing system network. By way of example, an automated method for determining a location of a target element in a distributed network includes the following steps. One or more locations of one or more sample topology elements in the distributed network are learned. Location mappings are generated, the location mappings representing associations between the learned locations of the one or more sample topology elements and one or more network attributes. A location of a target element is estimated using the location mappings.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AUTOMATED PROCESSING OF A VIRTUAL CONNECTION ALARM - A method and apparatus for providing automated processing of a virtual connection alarm on a packet network, e.g., a Virtual Private Network (VPN), are disclosed. For example, the method receives an alarm related to at least one virtual connection for a virtual private network (VPN) from a provider edge (PE) router, and determines whether the VPN has reached a first threshold for a maximum number of virtual connections or a second threshold for a pre-determined percentage of the maximum number of virtual connections. The method generates a new ticket or updating an existing ticket in response to the alarm if either the first threshold or the second threshold is reached.
|Cell Association in Multi-Radio Access Technology Networks - One of at least two available radio access technologies may be selected for a given radio communication. For example, quality of service or network loading may be used to make the selection.
|Method and system for reporting interference information, and UE - The disclosure discloses a method for reporting interference information, which includes: User Equipment (UE) reports frequency information of a first radio technology or the frequency information of the first radio technology and additional interference information to a network side when detecting that an interference state of in-device coexistence interference is changed; or UE reports frequency information of a first radio technology to a network side when detecting that an interference state of in-device coexistence interference is changed, and the UE reports additional interference information to the network side after receiving from the network side an instruction of requiring reporting the additional information. The disclosure further provides a system for reporting interference information and UE. By means of the technical solution of the disclosure, the UE is capable of reporting the frequency information and the additional information to the network side.
|MANAGING TRACE REQUESTS OVER TUNNELED LINKS - In one embodiment, a head-end node of a tunnel, relative to a tail-end node, receives a trace request, and in response, generates an out-of-tunnel trace request based on the trace-request. The trace request is transmitted in-tunnel to the tail-end node, while also transmitting the out-of-tunnel trace request to at least one subsequent node. The head-end node may then receive a trace response from the tail-end node based on the in-tunnel trace request, as well as a trace response from each of the subsequent nodes based on the out-of-tunnel trace request.
|System and method for skype traffice detection - Networks carry various kinds of traffic and ISPs are keen to analyze the traffic so as to be able to support QoS on the distinct traffic flows. Traffic can be broadly categorized into two types: plain traffic and encrypted traffic. Further, each of these traffic types is based on either a standard protocol or a proprietary protocol. While it is fairly straightforward to analyze traffic that are based on standard protocols, it is extremely difficult to analyze encrypted traffic based on proprietary protocols. A system for Skype traffic detection involves analyzing encrypted traffic based on proprietary peer to peer protocol. The proposed approach is based on building Skype traffic models and using the same to determine Skype traffic in the network traffic.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ANALYZING RF SIGNALS IN ORDER TO DETECT AND CLASSIFY ACTIVELY TRANSMITTING RF DEVICES - Exemplary embodiments of methods and apparatuses to analyze RF signals in order to detect and classify RF devices in wireless networks are described. In one embodiment, a method includes detecting one or more radio frequency (RF) samples. Next, the method includes determining burst data by identifying start and stop points of the one or more RF samples. Next, the method includes comparing time domain values for an individual burst with time domain values of one or more predetermined RF device profiles. Next, the method includes generating a human-readable result indicating whether the individual burst should be assigned to one of the predetermined RF device profiles. Next, the method includes classifying the individual burst if assigned to one of the predetermined RF device profiles as being a WiFi device or a non-WiFi device with the non-WiFi device being a RF interference source to a wireless network.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN MULTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of monitoring a control channel in a multiple carrier system is provided. A user equipment monitors a plurality of candidate control channels within a control region of a subframe and receives reference control information on a reference control channel which is successfully decoded. The user equipment monitors the control region on a basis of the reference control information and receives link control information on a linked control channel which is successfully decoded. The link control information includes resource assignment information used to receive or transmit data packets via a plurality of component carriers.
|AD HOC NETWORK SYSTEM AND METER READING INFORMATION COLLECTING METHOD - In a system that transmits and receives data through a high-level relay in a mesh ad hoc wireless network including the high-level relay and ad hoc wireless nodes, an increase in data traffic to the high-level relay, and the ad hoc wireless nodes in proximity to the high-level relay, a reduction in use efficiency of a wireless bandwidth of the high-level relay and in the proximity to the high-level relay in association with the increase in the data traffic, and a reduction in the efficiency of an entire mesh ad hoc wireless network are prevented. In the mesh ad hoc wireless network having the high-level relay, and the ad hoc wireless nodes each having a smart meter function unit, meter reading information collection implemented by the high-level relay is delegated to the ad hoc wireless nodes from the high-level relay by one hop, and the use efficiency of the wireless bandwidth in proximity to the high-level relay is improved.
|IDENTIFYING AND TRANSITIONING TO AN IMPROVED VOIP SESSION - An additional session is established for voice over internet protocol communication between a pair of endpoints in a network, wherein a current session is already established between the endpoints and is currently used for data packet communication between endpoints. Qualities of each of the sessions for voice over internet protocol communication are assessed and compared, and the endpoints signaled to select the session having the higher assessed quality as a current session for further data packet communication between the endpoints, and to remove the lower quality session from use as a session for the further data packet communication between the endpoints, or to use the lower quality session as a secondary session for data communication between the endpoints. More particularly, the assessed qualities of each of the current and additional sessions meet a basic requirement defined to provide voice over internet protocol data packet communication between the endpoints.
|MONITORING APPARATUS AND MONITORING METHOD - A monitoring apparatus for monitoring packet communication by a plurality of information processing apparatuses. The monitoring apparatus includes a receiving unit for receiving packets transmitted from the plurality of information processing apparatuses, a storage unit for storing a first identification value of a first packet and a first transmission source address of the first packet, and a processing unit for comparing a second identification value of a second packet with the first identification value of the first packet when a second transmission source address of the second packet matches the first transmission source address of the first packet to detect duplication of IP addresses when a difference between the first identification value and the second identification value exceeds a predetermined value.
|LOW POWER CONSUMPTION REAL-TIME WIRELESS DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD - The method of transmitting data in real time with low power via a wireless line in which channel status is searched to prevent data loss by transmitting and receiving retransmission a packet every time when there is an interference, and to minimize power consumption necessary for transmission and reception by transmitting and receiving the retransmission packet at a specific period when there is no interference. The method includes: transmitting real time packet data containing reply requesting information from a master to a slave; determining channel status by analyzing whether the master receives the reply packet and reply information; and adjusting the number of times of requesting the reply packet by selectively recording the reply requesting information contained in a control information field of the real time packet data according to the determined channel status. Power consumption due to the transmission and reception of the reply packet can then be reduced.
|System and Method of Data Access for Mobile Stations - Method and apparatus for data access for a mobile terminal comprising a module for determining whether first and second modes of wireless network coverage is available, a module for selecting the first mode if available, a module for attempting access via the second mode on failure to establish access via the first mode and a module for monitoring availability of the first mode. Even when a connection is established via the second mode, availability of the first mode is monitored and access attempted, when second mode connection is idle.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING IN DENSE NETWORK OPERATIONS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus transitions to a dormant state and transmits a very low duty cycle signal (LDCS) while in the dormant state. The apparatus may transmit an LDCS configuration to a second entity, the second entity being one of an LPN that is not in a dormant state and a macro cell. The apparatus may further monitor for a RACH messages at a predetermined RACH delay after transmitting the LDCS. The apparatus may transition to a DRX/DTX mode. The DRX/DTX mode may be matched to at least one connected UE.
|Mobility For Multipoint Operations - Systems and methods are provided for receiving data from multiple cells. A wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU) may receive data from cells in a multi-point set that includes a primary serving cell and one or more assisting serving cells. The WTRU measures the quality of cells in the multipoint set as well as neighboring cells. Based on the cell quality, the WTRU triggers a reporting event, such cell adding event, cell removal event, or cell replacement event, and sends a measurement report to the network. The WTRU receives an indication of a change to the multi-point set from the network, and modifies the multi-point set accordingly.
|Dispatching Method in a CDMA System and Single Mode Chip - The present invention discloses a scheduling method in a code division multiple access system and single-mode chips, which method comprises the following steps: a single-mode chip of a terminal respectively calculating a paging slot and a paging frequency point of two subscribers with different international mobile subscriber identities of this terminal; doubling the length of a current paging period of each subscriber in the situation that the paging slots are the same and the paging frequency points are different; and scheduling two subscribers to monitor alternately within the extended paging period. The present invention facilitates the achievement of double treats in the CDMA system.
|MOBILE SERVICE ROUTING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A data flow is received from a mobile network relating to a mobile subscriber. Subscriber data is received for the subscriber identifying a service path corresponding to the subscriber and at least one service policy corresponding to the subscriber, the service path including a set of network service nodes in a plurality of network service nodes. Packets of the data flow are routed according to the service path, the packets corresponding to a request for a resource. At least one packet is appended with service header data identifying the service policy. Each service node performs at least one service based on received request data, each service node in the set of service nodes performing a service defined in a service subscription of the subscriber. At least one particular service node in the set of network service nodes performs a particular service based at least in part on the service policy.
|Method and system for telecommunications using layer 3 packets obtained from a sequence of layer 2 radio link control layer data frames - A telecommunications system includes a first node. The system includes a base station that communicates with the first node. The system includes a radio network controller in communication with the base station. The system includes a computer in communication with the radio network controller that reassembles a sequence of layer 3 packets from a sequence of layer 2 radio link control layer data frames that originates from the first node. The system includes a network in communication with the computer and the radio network controller. The system includes a second node in communication with the network. A method for identifying performance of wireless packet communications.
|METHODS OF PACKET ELEMENT TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of packet element transmission for a mobile device of a wireless communication system includes generating a control element including a triggered capability report and a header of the capability report when the mobile device has sufficient resources to transmit both of the capability report and the header thereof in a transmission opportunity.
|Information on Reference Signal Structure for Neighboring Cell Measurements - The present invention relates to cellular radio communication and in particular to providing information on neighbour cells to enable terminals to perform neighbour cell measurements. In the prior art the terminal attempts to make neighbour cell measurements in a reference signal structure that is the same in the neighbour cell as in the cell the terminal camps in. The present invention is based on the insight that the reference signal structure may differ between neighbouring cell for example in the situation of an MBSFN area that is restricted to a region of all cells of a radio network, or in the situation of TDD mode being applied there may be different regions with different allocation of sub-frames for transmission in the uplink and downlink directions. The present invention solves the problem by broadcast information in a cell indicative of the reference signal structure in neighbour cells.
|SYSTEMS, METHODS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR CONTROLLING HIGH SPEED NETWORK TRAFFIC IN SERVER BLADE ENVIRONMENTS - Systems, methods and computer program products for controlling high-speed network traffic in server blade environments. Exemplary embodiments include a method for controlling high-speed network traffic in a server blade network, the method including identifying a port under test, identifying a debug port, identifying a code state of interest from the port under test and generating a modified IDLE word in response to an identification of a code state of interest from the port under test.
|Low Power Multiple Channel Mixing Architecture For Detecting Wake-Up Signals and Related Falsing Protection Algorithm - A low power multiple channel receiver mixing architecture for detecting wake-up signals over multiple communication channles in sniff processing performed in an implantable medical device (IMD). The architecture includes a direct conversion real receiver configured to scan a selected center channel and a Weaver receiver configured in parallel to the direct conversion real receiver to simultaneously scan side channels, together simultaneously detecting whether a wake-up signal is being received over the center and side channels with minimal power consumption. The architecture further utilizes a falsing protection algorithm that reduces power consumption during sniff operations by inhibiting the sniffing of channels likely to provide a false indication of a wake-up signal based the presence of unwanted signals on those channels. The falsing protection algorithm restricts those channels from sniff processing likely to provide a false indication of a wake-up signal, such that sniff processing can aborted, prevented, limited or otherwise altered to conserve power consumption.
|METHODS FOR COLLECTING AND ANALYZING NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA - Techniques are described to collect and analyze network performance data. Servers are modified so connection data, including data re-transmitted, is stored on each server of a data center that serves data to clients. Each server then sends the connection data stored to a collection server that aggregates the data. The collection server sorts the connection data from the servers based upon the data center where the server is located and clusters of the location or routing of the client. The location of the client may be based on a geographic mapping of the client, routing by the autonomous system number, or an IP address prefix. A high rate of re-transmissions from a particular data center to a particular client location may indicate problems in a certain area of the network. The routing of data transmissions may be altered to a different data center or by assigning a different routing.
|RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a radio communication system having a data channel for the transmission of data packets from a primary station to a secondary station, a plurality of downlink control channels are used to signal information relating to packet transmission. A problem with this scheme is that with a fixed control channel allocation system throughput (T) for a given offered load (O) can be significantly reduced in a worst case scenario (for example two secondary stations using the same control channel). One solution uses an indicator signal to inform a secondary station of the control channel it should receive, but this adds significant complexity to the system. The present invention provides a simpler scheme having similar benefits by shuffling the allocation of control channels to secondary stations, according to a defined sequence for each secondary station, thereby avoiding the worst case scenario.
|PROTOCOL DATA UNIT RECOVERY - Information can transfer from a transmitter to a receiver; however, the transmission can consume valuable resources. Therefore, a number of times a transmission is attempted can be tracked and compared against a threshold value. If the transmission occurs too many times—based upon the comparison—then a reset can occur. Tracking can occur for a protocol data unit and/or a control protocol data unit to determine if a reset should occur.
|Method And Arrangement In A Telecommunication System - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement in a telecommunication system, in particular to methods and arrangements for supporting maintenance activities of units in a telecommunication network.
|Method and Apparatus for Testing Mobile Terminals in an OFDM System - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for testing mobile terminals in an OFDMA system, in which all or part of available downlink radio resources in a cell are transmitted. A processing unit in a test apparatus splits a set of contiguous resource blocks into separate contiguous portions. A first contiguous portion of the set of resource blocks is allocated to users of a first type, and a second contiguous portion of the set of resource blocks is allocated to users of a second type. A transmitter in the test apparatus transmits test signals to the users of the first type and the second type using the at least one contiguous set of resource blocks.
|SYSTEM AND NETWORK FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MONITORING - A technique for wireless network monitoring involves scanning channels using clients instead of access points. An example of a method according to the technique may include, for example, receiving from a wireless access point a command to perform a channel scanning function, listening on a channel associated with the channel scanning function, and sending RF data found on the channel to the wireless access point. Another example of a method according to the technique may include, for example, scanning a first channel, switching from the first channel to a second channel, sending data on the second channel to an access point, switching from the second channel to the first channel, and resuming scanning on the first channel. A system according to the technique may include one or more scanning clients, proxy clients, multi-channel clients, or other clients that are capable of scanning channels in lieu of an access point.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AWARENESS INFORMATION OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for providing awareness information over an ad-hoc mesh network. Flooding messages (e.g., containing either queries for or awareness information) are transmitted between neighboring nodes of an ad-hoc mesh network. The nodes then retransmit the flooding messages within the ad-hoc mesh network based on predetermined criteria. Reply messages containing requested awareness information are generated to the queries and routed back to the querying node over the ad-hoc network.
|VARIABLE ABORT TIMER - Depending on channel conditions, a variable abort timer can be set in relation to wireless communication of data packets. Additionally, available buffer size can be evaluated and used to set a length of the variable abort timer. When a packet sequence is sent, packets can become lost in communication. When a lost packet is recognized, the timer can be initiated and a request for re-transmission of the lost packet can is sent. If the lost packet does not arrive during running of the variable abort timer, then the packet sequence can be processed without the missing packet.
|Femto base stations and methods for operating the same - Femto base stations and methods described herein suppress the need for an external GPS antenna and cable, while still providing a network service provider with the ability to obtain the desired GPS location coordinates and the user with the flexibility of placing the femto cell at the location of their choice within a home regardless of GPS signal strength.
|CARRIER AGGREGATION TESTING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING THE SAME - A carrier aggregation testing method for a wireless communication system, includes the steps of allocating a primary component carrier between a User Equipment and a carrier aggregation testing apparatus being configured to act as a Base Station with regard to the User Equipment, allocating at least one functionally limited secondary component carrier between the User Equipment and the carrier aggregation testing apparatus, aggregating the at least one functionally limited secondary component carrier with the primary component carrier, executing a carrier aggregation test being based on a functionality of the at least one functionally limited secondary component carrier.
|METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK, A SECONDARY STATION AND SYSTEM THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method of communicating in a network, comprising a secondary station transmitting to a primary station a data packet comprising a report, the secondary station monitoring before transmission of the packet whether said packet includes an indication of the order of transmission in a sequence of transmitted packets, and adding an indication of the order of transmission in a sequence of transmitted packets.
|PACKET PROCESSOR, PACKET CONTROL METHOD, AND PACKET CONTROL PROGRAM - A packet processor having one or two or more packet processing units is provided with a packet detector which detects whether or not a packet exists in a packet processing unit, and outputs a packet detection signal indicating a result of the detection, and a clock frequency controller which controls a clock to be supplied to the packet processing unit based on the packet detection signal.
|Manual configuration for sites that cannot give read/write credentials to a voice over internet protocol (VOIP) monitor - Read-only VoIP node configuration includes monitoring the VoIP network to determine the performance of the various nodes, and data from nodes is collected and stored. Where the nodes are not currently operating or cannot be monitored, no data is assigned in the non-operating nodes. The monitoring results are presented to a user, and misconfigured or faulty nodes are identified based upon predefined criteria. Information is then provided to a user to guide the user through the process of configuring the identified faulty/misconfigured node. The configuration commands for an appropriate network device may be presented to user so that user (with write authority) may implement and carry out the configurations commands.
|Mobile Communication System And Communication Method Thereof - A communication method in a mobile communication system that transmits different data to which transmission sequence numbers have been attached, over each of a plurality of paths from a mobile station to a radio network controller via a plurality of base stations; where the radio network controller monitors the communication state of each path, determines to transmit the data over all of a plurality of paths, transmit the data over two or more specified paths, or transmit the data over only one specified path, based on the communication state of each path, and notifies the mobile station of the determined path/paths; and where the mobile station transmits different data to which different transmission sequence numbers have been attached, over said notified path/paths, and the radio network controller rearranges the data received from each path by reference to the transmission sequence numbers and transmits the rearranged data to a core network.
|REFERENCE SIGNAL PATTERNS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for allocating resources for use in transmitting reference signals (RSs). According to certain aspects, a large set of enumerated possible CSI-RS resources ("CSI-RS patterns") may be defined and a base station may select a CSI-RS pattern from a subset of the available patterns, with the subset determined by a transmission configuration.
|NETWORK SERVICE OPERATIONAL STATUS MONITORING - Network service operational status monitoring methods and apparatus are disclosed. Responsive to a service status request associated with a network service, an operational status of the network service is determined by an intermediary between a service status requester and the network service. The operational status is a service-specific operational status of the network service in some embodiments. Operational status may be determined through a multi-level procedure in which subsequent levels after a first level of the multi-level procedure are or are not performed depending on a result of a preceding level of the procedure. A multi-level procedure may involve a service connectivity check and a service operational check, for instance.
|Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device may perform a first determination process of determining whether the access point operates in accordance with a first type of authentication protocol in which an authentication is performed by an authentication server or operates in accordance with a second type of authentication protocol in which an authentication is performed by the access point, and make a diagnosis of a wireless connection state of the wireless communication device based on a determination result of the first determination process so as to create a diagnosis result. In a case where the wireless connection state is a connection error state, the diagnosis result may include at least one of a reason by which the connection error state has occurred and a countermeasure for resolving the connection error state. The wireless communication device may output the diagnosis result outside.
|POWER CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A method includes buffering an initial amount of data of a data set transmitted from a MAC. When an amount of time for data associated with the data set to fill a PHY buffer approaches an amount of time for a far-end PHY to transition from a second far-end PHY power mode to a first far-end PHY power state, a remaining amount of data of the data set transmitted from the MAC is buffered and the data is transmitted to the far-end PHY after it transitions to the first far-end PHY power state. When the amount of time for data associated with the data set to fill the buffer exceeds the amount of time for the far-end PHY to transition to the first far-end PHY power state, a data delay indicator is transmitted to the MAC to preempt the MAC from transmitting the remaining amount of data.
|Device coexistence within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Device coexistence within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Different respective communication devices operating using different respective communication channels having different respective channel bandwidths may be implemented within a given communication system. For example, different respective communication devices may belong to different basic services sets (BSSs) (e.g., a 1 MHz BSS operating using channel bandwidths of 1 MHz, and a 2 MHz BSS operating using channel bandwidths of 2 MHz). To effectuate coexistence among different respective devices operating using different respective channel bandwidths, devices but longing to the 1 MHz BSS monitor for and listen for 2 MHz wide communication activity, and those 1 MHz BSS communication devices defer to any detected communication activity on any portion of the 2 MHz channel.
|Method for the Monitoring of Transmissions of a Bidirectional Interface - A method for the monitoring of transmissions in a transmission branch of a bidirectional interface, which besides the transmission branch has a reception branch standing in connection with the transmission branch, has the steps a) sending out of information by means of the transmission branch, and b) evaluation of defined characteristics of the sent information via the reception branch of the same interface, whereby preferably depending on the evaluation of the sent information a setting of parameters of the transmission branch is effected, so that future information is sent out with use of these parameters.
|Method and Device for Determining Resumption of Suspended Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service, and User Equipment - The disclosure discloses a method for determining the resumption of a suspended Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS), which comprises: when the MBMS service is intended to be resumed after being suspended, triggering a network side to send an MBMS Control Channel (MCCH) notification message for indicating a change of an MCCH message; determining, by User Equipment (UE), that the suspended MBMS service is resumed by reading the MCCH notification message and a changed MCCH message. The disclosure also provides a device and a UE for determining the resumption of an MBMS. The technical solution of the disclosure provides a better supplement for reception of an MBMS service in a present MBMS system, and further improves Quality of Service (QoS) of the MBMS system and a UE user's experience.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING OTHER SECTOR INTERFERENCE (OSI) INDICATION - Techniques for mitigating interference in a wireless communication system are described. In one design, a sector may determine multiple fast other sector interference (OSI) indications for multiple subzones, with each subzone corresponding to a different portion of the system bandwidth. At least one report may be generated for the multiple OSI indications, with each report including at least one OSI indication for at least one subzone. Each report may be encoded to obtain code bits, which may then be mapped to a sequence of modulation symbols. A sequence of modulation symbols of zero values may be generated for each report with all OSI indications in the report set to zero to indicate lack of high interference in the corresponding subzones. This allows a report to be transmitted with zero power in a likely scenario. A regular OSI indication may also be determined for the system bandwidth and transmitted.
|Virtualized Open Wireless Services Software Architecture - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, for virtualized open wireless services software architecture. A method includes, in a mobile network, monitoring hardware resources for utilization, receiving a request to instantiate a service, selecting a hardware resource that is underutilized, and mapping the service to the underutilized hardware resource.
|METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR ENHANCED TRANSMISSION SELECTION-CAPABLE SIMULATED TRAFFIC GENERATION - Various aspects of the disclosed technology relate to the generation for test purposes of test traffic, in a manner compliant with advanced flow control.
|METHOD AND NETWORK MONITORING PROBE FOR TRACKING IDENTIFIERS CORRESPONDING TO A USER DEVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and network monitoring probe for tracking identifiers corresponding to a user device are provided. The probe monitors a source base station (BS) for receipt of at least a first control plane message comprising a first control plane identifier and a first user device identifier; the probe also monitors the source MME for receipt of a second control plane message comprising a second control plane identifier, a second and a third user device identifier; when the first and the second control plane identifiers are identical and the first and the second user device identifiers are identical, the first and third user device identifier are respectively stored or output as an identified first and second user device identifier of the user device, and it is determined that the user device commences a S1-based handover when the first control plane message is determined as a handover required message.
|Systems and methods for automatic configuration of customer premises equipments - A system for automatically configuring a device which is compatible with the Technical Report TR-069 of the DSL Forum, said system comprising a first automatic configuration server compatible with the Technical Report TR-069 of the DSL Forum, which is adapted and arranged for communicating with said device and for automatically configuring at least part of the configurable parameters of said device, said device by means of the CPE WAN Management Protocol defined in Technical Report TR-069 of the DSL Forum, wherein said system further comprises a proxy server arranged between said device and said automatic configuration server.
|Displaying a Wideband Spectrum Using a Narrowband Receiver - Methods of aggregating spectrum data captured from a narrowband radio to form a spectrum covering a much wider frequency band. Frequency data, such as FFT spectrum data captured from a narrowband receiver such as an IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi receiver are combined to display representative real-time FFT, average FFT, and FFT duty cycle data of a wideband spectrum. Data is captured from narrow band radios such as access points, station monitors, or client devices on a wireless network. A wideband spectrum may be aggregated from data captured from one or from multiple devices. Data may be stored for later analysis and display.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING WITH OBJECTS ON A NETWORK - In accordance with the teachings of the present invention, a communication system (
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DATA COMMUNICATION IN AN ENERGY DISTRIBUTION NETWORK - A system for communicating information on an energy distribution network is disclosed. In one embodiment, the system includes a local supervisor on a communication network, wherein the local supervisor can collect data from one or more energy generation/monitoring devices. The system also includes a command center on the communication network, wherein the command center can generate one or more commands for controlling the one or more energy generation devices. The local supervisor can periodically transmit a data signal indicative of the data to the command center via a first channel of the communication network at a first interval. The local supervisor can also periodically transmit a request for a command to the command center via a second channel of the communication network at a second interval shorter than the first interval. This channel configuration provides effective data communication without a significant increase in the use of network resources.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DEPLOY AND MONITOR NETWORK LAYER FUNCTIONALITIES - Example methods and apparatus to deploy and monitor network layer functionalities are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes receiving an Internet Protocol (IP) packet at an input of a server, the IP packet being received from a communicatively coupled router, identifying the IP packet as a production IP packet or a non-production IP packets, when the IP packet is the non-production IP packet, manipulating data within the IP packet to monitor network layer functionality, forwarding the manipulated non-production IP packet to the router, and when the IP packet is the production IP packet, forwarding the production IP packet to the router without manipulating data within the IP packet.
|TELECOMMUNICATION METHOD - The invention relates to methods of using a trainable software module used in the handover procedure employing the location based information for the self optimization of wireless communication networks, in particular for the self optimization of cellular mobile networks. Embodiments of the invention address the problems of radio link failures and rapid handovers immediately after transferring a wireless appliance from one base station apparatus to the other at certain cell border locations by evaluating which base station apparatus a wireless appliance should have its wireless connection transferred to using either a database or a trainable software module.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CARRIERS - A method and apparatus supporting multiple carriers is provided. A user equipment receives a self-control format indicator (CFI) indicating a size of a control region of a first carrier by using the first carrier. The user equipment receives downlink control information (DCI) comprising a cross-CFI indicating a size of a control region of a second carrier over a first downlink control channel in the control region of the first carrier. The user equipment monitors a second downlink control channel in the control region of the second carrier.
|WIRELESS MESH NETWORK NODE TEST ARRAY - A wireless mesh network test system comprises a plurality of mesh network nodes, each comprising an antenna connection. An antenna network couples the antenna connections of the plurality of nodes, and a plurality of attenuators are distributed in the antenna network such that the attenuators simulate distance between the wireless mesh network nodes.
|ANTENNA TESTING DEVICE - An antenna testing device for testing an antenna assembled in a portable wireless communication device includes a data processing unit configured to receive signals from a CPU of the portable wireless communication device, a feedback unit, and a duplexer. The data processing unit sends the signals to the antenna by the feedback unit and the duplexer. The feedback unit feeds back mixed feedback signals mixed with signals leaked from the antenna to the data processing unit. The data processing unit judges whether the antenna is working properly according to the mixed feedback signals.
|Enhancement of Download Multi-User Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Wireless Communications - A method implemented in a user equipment configured to be used in a multi-user (MU) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) wireless communications system is disclosed. In an aspect, the user equipment transmits to a base station a first channel state information (CSI) report determined according to a single-user (SU) MIMO rule and a second CSI report determined according to an MU-MIMO rule.
|Enhancement of Download Multi-User Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Wireless Communications - A method implemented in a user equipment configured to be used in a multi-user (MU) multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) wireless communications system is disclosed. In an aspect, the user equipment transmits to a base station a first channel state information (CSI) report determined according to a single-user (SU) MIMO rule and a second CSI report based on a residual error.
|Packet monitoring - Network devices, systems, and methods are provided for packet processing. One network device includes a network chip having logic and a number of network ports for the device for receiving and transmitting packets therefrom. The logic is encoded with application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) primitives to check header fields and payload content in the packets.
|MEASUREMENT PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A measurement processing method is provided. The method includes performing physical layer filtering on measurement sample data obtained in measurement to obtain measurement values. Time-frequency domain normalization filtering may be performed on the obtained measurement values to obtain a measurement result, which, in turn may be evaluated. A measurement processing apparatus is further provided. The measurement processing solutions solve problems in the prior art such as that time domain and frequency domain characteristics of the measurement values are not considered when Layer 3 filtering is performed, and that the system must process more measurement sample data if Layer 3 filtering is not used. In the solutions, time-frequency domain normalization filtering is performed on the measurement values obtained after physical layer filtering to obtain a final measurement result, so that a more accurate measurement result is obtained, thus optimizing the network performance.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING CHANNEL ACCESS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A transmission initiation interval timing structure is used in combination with a lower layer timing structure, e.g., physical layer timing structure. A device selects a subset of packet transmission initiation intervals and then limits initiation of packet transmission to those intervals thereby reducing the potential for collisions. Packet transmission may occur outside the initiation interval in which the transmission is initiated. In some embodiments, packet transmission length is intentionally limited to sizes which can be transmitted in a fraction of the amount of time the physical layer allows a single device to continuously transmit, e.g., in an amount of time which is equal to or less than the duration of a packet transmission initiation interval. This increases the probability that multiple devices will be able to successfully transmit small packets at short intervals on a regular basis even when carrier sensing techniques are used.
|Troubleshooting Link and Protocol in a Wireless Network - Methods, apparatuses, and systems directed to facilitating troubleshooting wireless connectivity issues in a wireless network. In accordance with one embodiment of the present invention, either a diagnostic supplicant in the wireless client or a diagnostic manager initiates a troubleshooting protocol between the diagnostic supplicant and the diagnostic manager over a diagnostic link in response to one or more events. In one embodiment, after the diagnostic supplicant establishes a link to a diagnostic manager via a diagnostic link, the diagnostic supplicant generates and transmits a problem report to the diagnostic manager. The problem report initiates a troubleshooting protocol between the diagnostic manager and the diagnostic supplicant.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NOISE TOLERANT SIGNAL PROCESSING IN PILOT ASSISTED DATA RECEIVERS - The present disclosure provides systems and methods for noise tolerant signal processing in a pilot assisted data receiver, including: given received pilots with common pilot components and individual pilot components, computing coefficients associated with the individual pilot components of the received pilots; and applying the computed coefficients to the received pilots to obtain conditioned pilots. The individual pilot components result from relatively slow changes of the received pilots relative to the common pilot components. The common pilot components result from relatively fast changes of the received pilots relative to the individual pilot components.
|Dynamic Enabling of Wider Channel Transmissions with Radio Monitoring - Wider bandwidth transmissions are dynamically enabled in a wireless networking environment. During a transmit opportunity time interval for a wireless network device, a transmission is sent in a primary channel in a frequency band in which the primary channel and a secondary channel may be used simultaneously to send a wider bandwidth transmission. Activity is monitored in the secondary channel. A determination is made as to whether the secondary channel is free based on the monitoring. When it is determined that the secondary channel is free, the wider bandwidth transmission is sent in the primary and secondary channels.
|SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATING A PLURALITY OF MODULES USING A POWER/DATA BACKBONE NETWORK - A Virtual Electrical and Electronic Device Interface and Management System (VEEDIMS) support architecture is provided. In one example, the VEEDIMS support architecture includes a vehicle layer and a shop layer. The vehicle layer has a module and a controller positioned in a vehicle. The module is configured to couple to a device via an input/output (I/O) interface compatible with the device and configured to couple to the controller via a cable adapted to simultaneously carry bi-directional data and uni-directional power to the module. The shop layer is separate from the vehicle layer and has a browser configured to communicate with an HTTP server in the module and an analysis tool configured to receive and analyze event driven and time series data from the controller.
|Method and Apparatus for Handling Stale PDN Context - Apparatus and methods are described herein for managing data network connections. When a gateway or user equipment receives a message indicating the active data network connections associated with the sending party, the gateway or user equipment checks a locally stored list of active data network connections to determine whether there is a match. If at least one active data network connection does not match, the receiving device sends a message to the sending party indicating the locally stored active data network connections.
|METHOD OF MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of monitoring a control channel in a wireless communication system includes monitoring a physical down-link control channel (PDCCH) during a monitored duration, wherein the monitored duration is a part of a discontinuous reception (DRX) period, the DRX period specifying the periodic repetition of the monitored duration followed by a non-monitored duration. By monitoring a control channel during a DRX period, battery consumption of a user equipment can be reduced and an operation time of the user equipment can be increased.
|DEVICE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method and computing system for monitoring, on a first device coupled to a wireless network, wireless communication between a second device and a third device. A wireless transmission is received on the first device. The wireless transmission is from the second device to the third device. The wireless transmission is processed to extract a device identifier from the wireless transmission, thus defining an extracted device identifier. The extracted device identifier is compared to one or more known device identifiers, wherein each of the known device identifiers is associated with a known user. If the extracted device identifier matches a specific device identifier, included within the known device identifiers, the known user that is associated with the specific device identifier is identified.
|Using Client-Specific RGS To Improve Performance on Multi-SIM and Multi-RAT Devices - Various embodiments provide methods implemented in a mobile communication device (e.g., a multi-RAT communication device) for maintaining at least one separate RGS value for each of a plurality of RATs operating on the mobile communication device. Specifically, a device processor on the mobile communication device (e.g., a crystal oscillator manager) may maintain a separate, up-to-date RGS value for each of the plurality of RATs and may associate each of the plurality of RATs with their respective RGS values. By keeping track of the plurality of RATs' respective RGS values, the device processor may ensure that an appropriate RGS value is used to facilitate each RAT's individual operations, such as acquisition/re-acquisition operations, sleep scheduling calculations, and handover/inter-RAT measurement operations. As a result, various embodiments may improve the performance of each RAT and the overall performance of the mobile communication device.
|Dynamic Adaptation of Downlink RLC PDU Size - Embodiments herein dynamically adapt the size of downlink Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol data units (PDUs) sent by a radio network controller (RNC) to a user equipment (UE) via a base station. Notably, the RNC effectively matches downlink RLC PDU size to the radio conditions at the UE using one or more indirect indicators of those radio conditions. Example indirect indicators include active set size, common pilot channel power, and the number of positive RLC PDU acknowledgments received, to name a few. The embodiments therefore prove particularly advantageous to wireless communication systems based on existing standards that already provide the RNC with such indirect indicators, since no new or additional control signaling need be introduced. Method embodiments herein thus include determining one or more indirect indicators of radio conditions at the UE, and dynamically adapting the size of downlink RLC PDUs in dependence on those one or more indirect indicators.
|FRAME TRANSFER APPARATUS AND FRAME TRANSFER METHOD - It is intended to provide a frame transfer apparatus for transferring an LLDP frame to reduce a traffic load of the LLDP frame periodically sent for survival confirmation. The frame transfer apparatus within a network sends the LLDP frame by converting a TTL of the LLDP frame to be transferred to its maximum value of 65535. Also, the frame transfer apparatus makes the survival confirmation for a terminal, and sends as proxy the LLDP frame in which the TTL is set to 0, in place of the terminal, at a moment of expiration of the TTL, whereby the disconnection of the terminal from the network is appropriately notified to the other terminals. Thereby, the load of the LLDP frame periodically sent for survival confirmation within the network can be reduced.
|Systems and Methods for Adapting Network Capacity Assigned to a Partition - The present application discloses systems and methods for adapting network capacity assigned to a partition. In some embodiment, the method includes: partitioning available capacity of a system into at least a first non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) partition and a second non-GBR partition; determining that a performance goal for the first non-GBR partition is not met; and increasing a committed rate value associated with the first non-GBR partition and decreasing the committed rate value associated with the second non-GBR partition in response to determining that the performance goal is not met.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FILTERING IP PACKET IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for filtering an Internet Protocol (IP) packet in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes receiving an IP packet from a network, determining whether the received IP packet is an IP packet unallowable by an application Central Processing Unit (CPU), when the received IP packet is determined to be an IP packet unallowable by the application CPU, generating an IP packet indicating that the received IP packet is unallowable, and transmitting the generated IP packet to the network.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT INFORMATION TO AVOID DECODING CONFUSION - Systems and methods for sending and receiving acknowledgment information to avoid decoding confusion. A disclosed example includes sending an indication of whether data blocks received by the mobile station after a poll are or will be accounted for in acknowledgement information, receiving the poll from a network, the poll requesting acknowledgement information, and sending to the network the acknowledgement information requested in the poll.
|Data Packet Interception System - A method and apparatus for managing data packets in a network data processing system. The data processing system monitors for the data packets on the network data processing system. The data processing system sends a response data packet to a source endpoint that sent a request data packet in response to detecting the request data packet in the data packets requesting a first identifier for a first device at a target endpoint in the network data processing system. A response data packet has a selected identifier for a selected device in the monitoring data processing system. The data processing system processes a set of data packets in response to detecting the set of data packets having the selected identifier. The data processing system sends the set of data packets to the target endpoint with the first identifier for the first device in place of the selected identifier.
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ANALYZING DATA - The present invention discloses a method for analyzing data, which comprises: judging whether the read of each multiplexing block in a media unit has been completed according to the total length of the media unit and the length of the multiplexing block when reading the multiplexing blocks in the media unit; the media unit is a video unit, an audio unit or a data unit. The present invention imposes the structural features of multiplexing blocks, when the receiving quality of the mobile media broadcasting terminal is well, which dispenses with judging whether the multiplexing block is the beginning multiplexing block or the ending multiplexing block according to the beginning ID code and the ending ID code, analyzing with type and data unit type field, and CRC. Therefore, the multiplexing block analyzer steps and the procedure of data process of the receiver are predigested. It performs quick analyzing.
|METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method for planning a radio network, the method comprising determining for the components and parameters of the radio network an association with a location and a time. In a preferred embodiment, said association with a location is determined on the basis of geographical location and/or logical location. In planning the radio network, information on the association is utilized to improve quality of service of the radio network and to facilitate the work of the planning engineer.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - A method and apparatus for monitoring a downlink control channel in a wireless communication system is provided. A wireless device receives a discontinuous reception (DRX) command from a base station. The DRX command indicates an activation of at least one DRX pattern from a plurality of DRX patterns. Each of the plurality of DRX patterns includes an on-duration which specifies at least one subframes to monitor a downlink control channel within a DRX cycle. The wireless device monitors the downlink control channel in at least one subframe which belongs to on-duration of the at least one activated DRX pattern.
|System and Method for Managing State Transitions in a Wireless Communications Network - A system and method is disclosed for individually controlling User Equipment (UE) connections, dynamically and automatically, based on the applications and/or services that the connections carry. An eNodeB or other radio base station (RBS) monitors established connections between the UE and the RBS to detect applications running within those connections. Based on the stateful information of applications, the present invention proactively controls the state transitions of individual UEs between the CONNECTED and IDLE states thereby increasing radio link capacity and reducing control plane loading.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INITIATING TESTING OF MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system and method for initiating testing of a plurality of communication devices. The tester and devices under test (DUTs) are first synchronized as a way of confirming test readiness on the part of the DUTs, Following that, a test sequence is initiated by the tester. The synchronization and test initiation can be accomplished using signals with differing signal magnitudes or device identifiers. The test sequence can be a DUT transmit signal test in which each DUT transmits data packets in accordance with one or more predefined test sequences. Alternatively, the test sequence can be a DUT receive signal test in which the tester transmits data packets to the DUTs with differing signal frequencies or signal magnitudes.
|METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR GENERATING GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE TUNNELING PROTOCOL (GTP) ENCAPSULATED REAL-TIME TRANSPORT PROTOCOL (RTP) PACKETS IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) NODE SIMULATOR - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for generating GTP encapsulated RTP packets in an LTE node simulator. According to one method, and LTE node simulator uses a first processing unit to generate prepackaged headers for RTP payloads. The first processing unit communicates the prepackaged headers to a second processing unit separate from the first processing unit within the LTE node simulator. The second processing unit assembles GTP packets by combining the prepackaged headers with the RTP payloads. The second processing unit transmits the GTP packets to a device under test.
|METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHARGING OF PACKET DATA SERVICE - A method for controlling the charging of packet data service is disclosed, which includes: monitoring a number of event triggers; and when one of the event triggers is met, a TPF requesting charging rules from a CRF. In this way, the timing that the TPF requests charging rules from the CRF becomes controllable, and redundant information caused by the unnecessary charging rule from the TPF becomes avoidable, which enables interaction between the TPF and the CRF more effective and the charging control of packet data service reasonable and perfect.
|SWITCH THAT MONITORS FOR FINGERPRINTED PACKETS - A switch comprises a switching module coupled to a plurality of ports. The switching module receives and forwards a plurality of packets through the ports. The switch also comprises a management unit comprising a processor and an agent executable by the processor. The agent causes the processor to monitor each packet received by the switching module and determine whether each such packet contains a predetermined fingerprint. Upon determining that a packet contains the predetermined fingerprint, the processor causes additional information to be included in a copy of the fingerprinted packet and forwarded to a predetermined address. The switching module also forwards the packet containing the predetermined fingerprint, but without the additional information, to an address corresponding to a destination address contained in the packet. A method of programming the switches is also described as well as a management workstation used to program the switches and analyze the fingerprinted packets.
|Method, System and Apparatus for Dynamic Quality of Service Modification - A method and apparatus for dynamically modifying the quality of service (QoS) provided to a mobile communication device are disclosed. In one embodiment, a mobile communication device comprises a secure channel driver operable to establish a secure tunnel between the mobile communication device and a remote network via a wireless network, the secure tunnel operable to support multiple sockets opened therein; a first application operable to communicate with the remote network via a first socket within the secure tunnel and associated with a first QoS; a second application operable to communicate with the remote network via a second socket within the secure tunnel and associated with a second QoS, different from the first QoS; a QoS monitor operable to identify when the second QoS is appropriate to support the second application; and a QoS modification module operable to request the second QoS from the wireless network.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING WIRELESS CONNECTIONS AND RADIO RESOURCES - Systems and methods of efficiently providing network access for a portable electronic device while moderating power consumption are described. The electronic device may have a cellular radio and a network radio for communicating with an alternative network. In a default state, the electronic device may carry out communications using the cellular radio, and the network radio may be in an off state. Periodically, the electronic device may determine if the electronic device has moved. If so, a location of the electronic device may be determined and a check may be carried out to determine if the electronic device is in range of an available alternative network. If the electronic device is in range of an available alternative network, the network radio may be turned on and an attempt to connect to the alternative network may be made.
|Performance Monitoring in a Mobile Communication Network - Embodiments of the present invention relate to methods and network nodes in e.g. a LTE network for detecting congestion. In the method, a packet is received from a user equipment via a base station, the packet is analyzed to detect information of the packet and if the packet comprises a marker indicating congestion and if said marker is detected, ingress IP number of the tunnel used for said packet is extracted, and information of the marked packet and the extracted ingress IP number of the tunnel used for said packet are sent to a performance monitoring node such that identity information of the base station that has inserted the marker into the packet can be extracted at the performance monitoring node.
|High Performance Three-Port Switch For Managed Ethernet Systems - A method and apparatus for isolating and analyzing segments of a deployed, operational cable plant from a remote location. Individual cables, or segments, within an operationally deployed cable plant infrastructure may be isolated and analyzed without requiring a technician to physically inspect and perform an on-site analysis. The approach allows a cable segment to be isolated and analyzed without physically disconnecting the cable from the deployed infrastructure. By isolating and analyzing selected cable plant segments, an entire deployed cable plant infrastructure may be discretely analyzed and specific problems within the cable plant infrastructure may be identified. The approach allows the analyses to be performed from a remote location and is compatible with and may be integrated within a multipurpose network management system.
|Supporting an Access to a Destination Network Via a Wireless Access Network - For supporting an access to a destination network by a mobile device via a wireless access network, the mobile device generates a predetermined request, which is addressed to a connectivity test server in the destination network. The predetermined request is transmitted to the wireless access network. In case the predetermined request reaches the connectivity test server, it generates a predetermined response and transmits it to the mobile device via the wireless access network. The mobile device determines whether a response to the predetermined request is received from the wireless access network and whether a received response corresponds to the predetermined response.
|Methods, systems and apparatus for monitoring and/or generating communications in a communications network - A module for use in a communications network in which a plurality of signals are transmitted between respective first and second nodes, the module having an engine for receiving the plurality of signals over the network, for extracting protocol data therefrom and for providing the extracted protocol data to an analyser; and a processor for controlling operation of the engine and analyser. The invention also provides an apparatus for generating communications, systems including the module and/or the apparatus, and corresponding methods.
|RELAY CAPABLE WIRELESS APPARATUSES - Apparatuses and methods for wireless communications are disclosed. An apparatus includes a processing system configured to associate with a first remote apparatus, monitor a wireless medium for a request from a second remote apparatus, and determine whether to enable an interface between the first and second remote apparatuses in response to the request.
|ASSISTANCE DEVICE, ASSISTANCE METHOD AND PROGRAM - An assistance device is provided with: a communication setting information generator which, from among a plurality of wireless terminals, extracts a first predetermined number of transmission-use wireless terminals to be tested, and a second predetermined number of receiving-use wireless terminals that are different from the transmission-use wireless terminals, which are treated together as one set, and while varying combinations thereof, specifies a predetermined number of sets; and a communication setting information generator which, for each of the specified predetermined number of sets, generates an execution plan of tests for performing a test of causing a transmission-use wireless terminal to transmit information and causing a receiving-use wireless terminal to receive the information transmitted by the transmission-use wireless terminal, and sequentially executing tests for all of the predetermined number of sets.
|Dynamic Transmission Set Indication - The present invention proposes methods and apparatuses and computer program products for dynamic transmission set indication in scenarios in which a terminal is enabled for single cell transmission SiC as well as for coordinated multipoint transmission CoMP. To this extent, appropriate information is being fed back from the terminal to the base station via feedback signaling channels. The decision on which transmission mode defined by respective transmission set definitions is used can be taken by the terminal or, in a modified scenario, by the base station, based on the information fed back.
|ROUTE CONVERGENCE MONITORING AND DIAGNOSTICS - In one embodiment, a method includes assigning an identifier to a route computation at a network device, grouping route updates for the route computation, marking at least one route update for each group of route updates with the identifier, tracking flow of marked route updates at a plurality of routing components within the network device, and storing tracking data at the network device for use in convergence monitoring. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein.
|Communication Apparatus and ID Packet Recognition Method Thereof - A communication apparatus is provided. The communication apparatus includes an RF module and a scan module coupled to the RF module. The RF module receives an RF signal and generates an intermediary signal corresponding to the RF signal. The scan module recognizes a time-domain pattern corresponding to the intermediary signal, and determines whether the RF signal comprises an ID packet according to the recognized time-domain pattern.
|TELEPHONE WITH AUTOMATIC SWITCHING BETWEEN CELLULAR AND VOIP NETWORKS - A mobile communication device includes, in part, a cellular communication module, a first antenna adapted to receive and transmit data between the mobile communication module and a cellular network, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) communication module, a second antenna adapted to receive and transmit data between the Wi-Fi communication module and a VoIP network, a signal monitoring circuit, and a switching circuit adapted to switch an existing communication from the cellular communication module to the Wi-Fi communication module or vice versa.
|Operating A Demultiplexer On An Inter-Integrated Circuit ('I2C') Bus - Operating a demultiplexer on an I
|Communication Apparatus and Bluetooth ID Packet Recognition Method Thereof - A communication apparatus is provided. The communication apparatus includes an RF module, a down converter coupled to the RF module and a detector coupled to the down converter. The RF module receives an RF signal. The down converter down converts the RF signal in response to a channel select signal to generate a converted signal, wherein the channel select signal controls the down converter to alternately sweep a plurality of scan trains during a scan frame, and each of the scan trains comprises a plurality of channels. The power detector determines whether the RF signal comprises an ID packet according to the converted signal corresponding to the channels of the plurality of scan trains.
|SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS TO FACILITATE SIMULTANEOUS TRAFFIC-IDLE OR IDLE-IDLE DEMODULATION - Systems and methods for facilitating simultaneous operations are provided. The methods can include monitoring a common channel to evaluate cells or sectors in an active set, wherein monitoring is performed by a user equipment having a single receiver chain configured to receive traffic and idle information. The methods can also include demodulating channels, using the single receiver chain, including demodulating one or more emergency alerts, wherein demodulating is performed for a radio access technology and a protocol stack associated with the radio access technology.
|TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a vehicle-side transmitting apparatus that applies a multi-link system employing a logical plurality of communication lines and includes a transmitting unit that transmits transmission data that should be transmitted to a receiving apparatus of a communication partner, the transmitting unit monitors changes in transmission rates of communication lines A to C, calculates, based on rated transmission rates, information concerning changes in the communication lines A to C, and a transmission time until data that should be transmitted to a ground-side receiving apparatus is completed to be transmitted to the ground-side receiving apparatus, fluctuating transmission rates of the communication lines A to C, and determines, based on the calculated transmission rates, allocation amounts to the communication lines of data that should be transmitted this time.
|LI REPORTING OF UPDATED LOCATION INFORMATION FOR EPS - The present invention relates to a method to enhance resolution of location information of a mobile user in an Evolved Packet communication System. The system comprises a Mobility Management Entity that provides the user with at least one tracking area in which the user is able to move without location information being reported, The method comprises the following steps:
|USER TERMINAL DEVICE AND A METHOD OF NETWORK ACCESSING FOR THE DEVICE - A user terminal device includes: an antenna module, comprising a plurality of directional antennas and adapted to access a network through one or more directional antennas of the plurality of antennas; a processor, adapted to set the directions of the directional antennas, and select one directional antenna or a combination of multiple directional antennas of the plurality of antennas to access the network according to the performance parameters of each antenna. A method of network accessing for the user terminal device includes: step 1, the user terminal scanning a downlink channel in the direction of each directional antenna of the user terminal device at a pre-determined time period for acquiring the performance parameters of each directional antenna (S
|METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR DETERMINING AN INTEGRITY OF AN AIR INTERFACE - A method in a base station (
|METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR MISDIRECTED PACKET DRILL DOWN AND NEGATIVE PACKET CAPTURE AT A NETWORK TEST DEVICE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for misdirected packet drill down and negative packet capture at a network test device are disclosed. One exemplary method includes, at a network test device, receiving and storing, in the network test device, expected receive port information regarding a plurality of test packets. The method further includes transmitting the test packets to a device under test. The method further includes receiving at least some of the test packets from the device under test. The method further includes using the expected receive port information and the received test packets to identify misdirected test packets. The method further includes, for each of the packets identified as misdirected, determining a port of the network test device at which the packet should have been received and outputting an indication of the port of the network test device at which the packet should have been received.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONFIGURATION - A User Equipment UE sends a PDP context activation request with an invalid APN to an SGSN. When detecting an invalid APN the SGSN creates a PDP context activation request towards a GGSN and inserts a default APN. The GGSN detects the default APN and sends a RADIUS Accounting request message to a Device Management System DMS. The DMS initiates a device management configuration flow towards the UE using IP over the existing PDP context or an SMS bearer and responds with a RADIUS Accounting response message to the GGSN. When the RADIUS Accounting response message is received the GGSN will initiate a successful Create PDP context response towards the SGSN causing a successful PDP Context Activation Response towards the UE. An advantage of the invention is that it can detect devices having no GPRS configuration and devices having a faulty GPRS configuration.
|Relaying Data in a Communication System - The disclosure relates to communication of data in a wireless communication system that enables relaying of data between an originating node (
|METHOD FOR INITIALIZING PROTECTION DEVICE AND PROTECTION DEVICE IN WIRELESS MICROPHONE BEACON SYSTEM - A method for initializing a protection device PD comprising steps of: receiving by a beacon receiver beacon information from other protection devices around the PD; sending by the beacon receiver the received beacon information to a channel monitoring decision maker within a time period set in a channel monitoring timer; determining by the channel monitoring decision maker whether there exists any primary beacon transmission device PPD; if yes, deciding the PD as a secondary beacon transmission device SPD; if no, deciding the PD as a PPD; receiving by an initialization process decision maker a determination result from the channel monitoring decision maker and determining an operation status of the PD within a time period set in the initialization process timer; outputting by the initialization process decision maker the determination result to a transmitter of the PD to decide whether the transmitter has transmitted any data or request information.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DIAGNOSE OUTBOUND VoIP SERVICES - Example methods and apparatus to diagnose outbound voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) services are disclosed. An example method comprises monitoring activity in a first VoIP network to determine a first value representative of a peak number of communication sessions concurrently active between a second VoIP network and a public switched telephone network via the first VoIP network, and comparing the first value to a threshold to determine whether to automatically close a trouble ticket submitted against the first VoIP network.
|METHOD FOR CONNECTING NETWORK SEGMENTS HAVING REDUNDANCY PROPERTIES TO ANY NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for operating a local network, particularly an Ethernet network, having redundancy properties, wherein in a closed ring a redundancy manager monitors the sections of said ring, and wherein according to the invention at least one additional ring is connected as a partial ring which does not contain a redundancy manager, and segment controllers at both ends of the partial ring take on the monitoring of said partial ring by sending control packets into said partial ring.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROTOCOL PARSING - A method and apparatus for protocol parsing are disclosed, the method includes: performing flow table matching on a received packet to recognize a protocol of the packet; and when a protocol type of the packet is recognized and it is determined that the protocol type of the packet is a text-based protocol type, performing keyword matching on the packet according to a keyword matching rule in a keyword library corresponding to the protocol type of the packet, and extracting content of a keyword to be parsed in the packet; wherein, the keyword matching rule in the keyword library includes a keyword to be parsed that is expressed by using a regular expression and content of the keyword. The present invention applies to a device that parses a protocol of a packet.
|Quality of User Experience Analysis - The techniques described herein involve analysis of communication data included in trace file(s) of device(s) involved in a communication. These trace file(s) may each include data associated with multiple layers of a communication protocol stack of a respective device or data associated with a single such layer. The techniques may further involve one or more of determination of performance metrics associated with data at a specific layer of a specific device, correlation of the data between layers of a device, or correlation of data across multiple device(s) involved in the communication. The performance metrics or correlated data may then be analyzed based on thresholds or models to determine whether the performance metrics or correlated data exhibits a degraded quality of user experience. Also or instead, graphic or textual representations of the performance metrics or correlated data may be generated.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL IN A SYSTEM HAVING CELLS - A method and apparatus for performing communication associated with carrier aggregation are provided. The present description provides a method comprising: configuring, by a user equipment (UE), a primary cell (P-cell) and at least one secondary cell (S-cell); and monitoring, by the UE, at least one physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) transmitted on the at least one S-cell in a subframe if the P-cell is not configured as an uplink subframe in the subframe. In the method, the UE may operate in a half-duplex TDD mode. Further, first TDD configuration can be applied to the P-cell and second TDD configuration different from the first TDD configuration can be applied to the S-cell.
|System and Method for Determining Whether DOCSIS-Enabled Devices in a HFC Cable Network Are Co-Located - A system and method for determining if DOCSIS-enabled devices connected to an HFC cable network are co-located. Subscriber account data is acquired to determine the DEDs associated with a subscriber account. The MAC address of a DED is used to obtain the MAC domain to which the DED is assigned and a ranging offset value associated with the DED. An alert is issued if multiple DEDs associated with a subscriber account are associated with different MAC domains. The alert signifies that DEDs associated with the account are not co-located. Where DEDs associated with an account are associated with the same MAC domain, the normalized ranging offset values associated with the subscriber's DEDs are compared to determine if the difference in any two ranging offset values exceeds a predetermined threshold. If the difference in any two ranging offset values exceeds a predetermined threshold, an alert is issued. The alert again signifies that DEDs associated with the account are not co-located.
|INTEGRATED INTERMODULATION DETECTION SUB-SYSTEM FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Certain aspects are directed to an intermodulation detection sub-system. The intermodulation detection sub-system includes a test signal generation module, at least one intermodulation detection device, and a controller. The test signal generation module is integrated into a unit of a telecommunications system. The test signal generation module is configured to provide a test signal to a remote antenna unit of the telecommunications system. The intermodulation detection device is integrated into the telecommunications system. The intermodulation detection device is configured to detect intermodulation products generated by mixing a first signal component and a second signal component of the test signal. The controller is integrated into the unit. The controller is configured to control the test signal generation module and the at least one intermodulation detection device.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING THE HEALTH OF WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method and system for monitoring the health of a wireless telecommunication network. Network health is monitored without placing an administrative burden on the carrier network itself, instead, this burden is placed on components that lie outside the carrier network and pass communications through it. The data service provider infrastructure sends a request to a mobile device, asking that it return data regarding its location. The carrier networks handling the request insert location information into the packet that is sent to the mobile device, but this information is not sent to the data service provider infrastructure itself. The mobile device harvests this location information from the packets it receives and inserts it in a response packet that finds its way back to the data service provider infrastructure. The data service provider infrastructure is able to collate this location data and to analyze it, determining the carrier network's health.
|COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SWITCHING DEVICE - A CRC calculating unit calculates a DCS code for a DA field to a DATA field and an FCS code for the DA field to a DCS field. A DCS checking unit outputs a DCS check result with a calculated DCS code and a DCS code in the DCS field to a terminal operating unit. An FCS checking unit outputs an FCS check result with a calculated FCS code and an FCS code in the FCS field to an FCS converting unit. The FCS checking unit determines whether to forward through the frame or to forward the frame by storing the calculated FCS code in the FCS field based on the FCS check result. The terminal operating unit determines a processing mode based on the DCS check result.
|Network Device Trace Correlation - The techniques described herein present opportunities for service providers and/or network providers to optimize the Quality of User Experience (QoE) for data services by determining, using a broader network-based approach, the root cause of problems causing a service degradation. To determine the root cause of the problems, the techniques may collect different trace files from multiple different nodes in the telecommunications network. Each trace file includes a log of trace identifiers for numerous different data packets that have been generated, received, transmitted, relayed, and/or routed via the node in the telecommunications network, and each trace file log entry may be associated with a timestamp. Once collected, the techniques may correlate the different trace files from the multiple different nodes to identify, using a broader network-based analysis, service optimization opportunities.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A first UE receives a first uplink-downlink configuration from a network entity via broadcast signalling. The first uplink configuration designates a first set of subframes of a series of subframes as uplink subframes. The first UE also receives a second uplink-downlink configuration via dedicated signaling. The second uplink-downlink configuration designates a second set of subframes of the series of subframes as uplink subframes. The first set of uplink subframes and the second set of uplink subframes differ from one another by at least one uplink subframe.
|SYSTEM FOR ANALYSING NETWORK TRAFFIC AND A METHOD THEREOF - A method of analysing network traffic comprising the steps of providing reference network traffic information associated with a remote access server and obtaining current network traffic information associated with the remote access server. Current network traffic information is analysed using statistical analysis to determine whether values of the current network traffic information are within or outside a statistical range associated with the reference network traffic information. If a value of the current network traffic information is outside the statistical range, the value of the current network traffic information is an outlier which is included in an outlier information table, and an alert is generated. If a value of the current network traffic information is within the statistical range, a similarity value between the value of the current traffic information and outliers is determined. An action is then performed.
|Method of Monitoring Call State over Single Radio Voice Call Continuity - A method of monitoring a call state over a single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) handover, for a communication device in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes performing, by a modem processor of the communication device, the SRVCC handover from a first type call to a second type call when an SRVCC handover command is received from a network of the wireless communication system, sending, by the modem processor, a first indication for notifying an occurrence of SRVCC handover to an application processor of the communication device, and monitoring, by the application processor, a call state of the second type maintained in the modem processor after the first indication is received.
|USER DEVICE, BASE STATION, AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A user device includes a RI generating unit that generates a rank indicator based on a channel condition of a downlink, and a transmitting unit that transmits an uplink signal including the rank indicator to a base station. When the rank indicator is reported to the base station prior to category information of the user device being reported, the RI generating unit generates the rank indicator of a number of bits that has already been known to the user device and the base station.
|Sensor having an integrated Zigbee.RTM. device for communication with Zigbee.RTM. enabled appliances to control and monitor Zigbee.RTM. enabled appliances - A sensor device integrates ZigBee® technology into power switch device to provide monitoring and control of power usage, as well as operational control of connected devices. The sensor device uses a power line communication (PLC) network to transfer collected data and to provide remote control capability to connected appliances. The sensor device, in conjunction with a master switch device, a communication enabled switching device, and the power switch device, provides an integrated home environment for communication, streaming media, monitoring, and remote control of power usage, as well as remote operational monitoring and control of connected appliances in the home.
|SELECTING WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS FOR GEOFENCE MONITORING - Methods, program products, and systems for monitoring geofence exits using wireless access points are disclosed. In general, in one aspect, the mobile device can select, from multiple wireless access points, one or more wireless access points for monitoring a geofence. Selecting the one or more wireless access points can include determining multiple geographic regions corresponding to the geofence. The mobile device can select the one or more wireless access points based on a maximum total number of wireless access points to be selected and an access point allowance for each of the geographic regions. The access point allowance can indicate a maximum number of wireless access points to be selected for the geographic region. The mobile device can detect a potential entry or exit of the geofence by monitoring the selected one or more wireless access points using a wireless processor.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LINK PROTECTION USING SHARED SRLG ASSOCIATION - In one embodiment, certain SRLGs associated with members of a bundle are deemed to be "risk-free SRLGs", i.e., SRLGs whose failure may not substantially impact the capacity of the bundle to carry traffic in a computer network. In a bandwidth unaware embodiment a number of active members of the bundle is identified for each SRLG, and a bandwidth aware embodiment further specifies an available bandwidth capacity for each SRLG to determine risk-free SRLGs. A backup path or tunnel may be established and utilized to protect a communication link as long as the SRLGs shared are deemed to be risk-free SRLGs.
|Dynamic Flow Segregation for Optimal Load Balancing Among Ports in an Etherchannel Group - Dynamic load balancing techniques among ports of a network device are provided. At a device configured to forward packets in a network, a plurality of queues are generated, each associated with a corresponding one of a plurality of output ports of the device and from which packets are to be output from the device into the network. When the number of packets in the at least one queue exceeds a threshold, for new packets that are to be enqueued to the at least one queue, packets are enqueued to a plurality of sub-queues such that packets are assigned to different ones of the plurality of sub-queues. Each of the plurality of sub-queues is associated with a corresponding one of the plurality of output ports. Packets of the plurality of sub-queues are output from corresponding ones of the plurality of output ports.
|DATA SENDING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A data sending method and apparatus are provided. In an embodiment, the method includes: detecting whether a wireless terminal has data to be sent to a wireless network side, where the data to be sent includes signaling data or user data; when a result of detecting whether the wireless terminal has data to be sent to the wireless network side is that the wireless terminal has no data to be sent, confirming that a power amplifier of the wireless terminal is in a non-working state; and when the result of detecting whether the wireless terminal has data to be sent to the wireless network side is that the wireless terminal has data to be sent, confirming that the power amplifier of the wireless terminal is in a working state.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for monitoring a control channel in a multi-carrier system are provided. A terminal sets a common downlink carrier for monitoring a plurality of candidate control channels for receiving common control information among multiples carriers, and monitors the candidate control channels within a common search space of the common downlink carrier. The terminal receives common control information on a control channel which has been successfully decoded from among a plurality of candidate control channels. The invention can reduce a load due to blind decoding of the control channels and decrease battery consumption of the terminal.
|METHOD FOR PROCESSING UPLINK SIGNAL, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method for processing an uplink signal, a BS, and a UE are provided. The method includes: receiving an uplink signal that is generated according to CP configuration information and is sent by a UE, where the CP configuration information is used to identify a mapping relationship between a TTI and a CP type that is used by the uplink signal; and determining, according to the CP configuration information, a CP type corresponding to a TTI of receiving the uplink signal, and processing the uplink signal according to the determined CP type. The UE can use different CP types in the case of different TTIs. Therefore, the technical solutions provided in embodiments of the present invention provide support for solving the uplink delay without introducing too large overhead.
|ESTIMATING SPARSE MIMO CHANNELS HAVING COMMON SUPPORT - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of estimating, jointly, a set of multipath channels having a common path support, the method comprising the steps of, estimating jointly the common path support of the set of multipath channels using a spectral estimation technique, estimating path amplitudes, for each channel in the set of multipath channels, using the estimation of the common path support, to obtain an estimate of the set of multipath channels.
|Differentiated Handling of Data Traffic with Adaptation of Network Address Lookup - a method of differentiated handling of data traffic, the data traffic is related to a network resource (
|Method for Monitoring SIP Call-Flows by Tracking Message Transformation - Systems and methods are provided for monitoring session initiation communications without modifying the operational code of the session initiation protocol proxy servers through which the messages that constitute a given communication are routed. The inbound and outbound versions of session initiation protocol messages are identified at a plurality of proxy servers. The inbound and outbound message versions are correlated at each proxy server using user-defined correlation rules that test conditions of the message headers. The correlated inbound and outbound message versions are then examined for transformations, and these transformations are used to determine the actions taken by the appropriate proxy server on that message. These actions are used to check the proper operation of both the proxy server and the session initiation protocol communication.
|GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway apparatus monitors a communication signal transmitted from a terminal apparatus via a base station, and according to specifying information in the communication signal, the gateway apparatus selects a predetermined node apparatus from a plurality of node apparatuses connecting to external networks, and transmits the communication signal.
|Method of Minimization of Drive Tests Measurement Configuration Triggering - A method of MDT measurement configuration triggering for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises determining whether an event predefined in the mobile device occurs, and transmitting a message for indicating a network of the wireless communication system to configure a MDT measurement to the mobile device, to the network when the event occurs.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTICAST COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatus for supporting multicast groups in networks, e.g., wireless peer to peer networks, are described. A member of a multicast group, that does not intend to transmit in a traffic interval, generates and transmits a signal on a traffic transmission request resource indicating that the device transmitting the signal does not intend to transmit multicast traffic data to the multicast group. A member of the multicast group, that intends to transmit in the traffic interval, refrains from transmitting a signal and monitors. The devices in the group which did not transmit decide which one is allowed to proceed with its intended multicast traffic transmission based on relative priority within the group.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY REPORTING A CQI/CSI MEASUREMENT REPORT - To solve the above-mentioned problem, a method in which a terminal reports channel state information comprises the following steps: receiving, from a base station, information on a plurality of patterns to be used in a channel state measurement; receiving, from the base station, selection information for selecting a pattern from among the plurality of patterns that is to be used in the channel state information to be reported to the base station; measuring a channel state using the information on the plurality of patterns; and selecting a portion of the measured channel state based on the selection information, and reporting the selected portion to the base station. The above-described solution enables the efficient reporting of channel state information including CQIICSI, thus improving communication efficiency.
|TESTING APPARATUS WITH A PROPAGATION SIMULATOR FOR A WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE AND METHOD - An apparatus for testing the communication between a wireless access device and a wireless device in communication with the wireless access device is provided. The apparatus includes a housing having a first interior chamber adapted to receive a wireless access device and a second interior chamber adapted to receive a wireless device. The apparatus also includes a simulator device for simulating one or more propagation scenarios between the wireless access device and the wireless device. Probes are positioned in the first interior chamber and the second interior chamber. The probes are coupled to the simulator device and are adapted to exchange signals between the wireless access device and the wireless device.
|TESTING SYSTEM FOR A WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE AND METHOD - A system for testing a wireless access device having a plurality of radio modules is provided. The system includes a housing having an interior chamber. The interior chamber is adapted to receive a wireless access device. A plurality of probes are positioned for respective alignment with an antenna of a corresponding radio module of the wireless access device. The plurality of probes are adapted to receive radio signals from the wireless access device.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGE OF PRIMARY CELL DURING CARRIER AGGREGATION - Methods for performing change of primary cell during carrier aggregation operation are described. A mobile station (MS) receives a message to change a primary cell and to perform a random access communication with a new primary cell. Upon receiving a random access response message from the new primary cell, the MS starts transmitting a control channel to the new primary cell. In one embodiment, the MS releases the configuration of an uplink control channel and transmits uplink control information through an uplink shared channel. Upon completion of the primary cell change procedure, the MS starts transmission of an uplink control channel to the new primary cell.
|Ensuring Reception Quality for Non-Adjacent Multi-Carrier Operation - User equipment (
|METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ADAPTIVE MOBILE CLUSTER NETWORK - The invention discloses a method of establishing an adaptive mobile cluster network. The method comprises the steps of: (a) determining a network service requested by a mobile communication device; (b) according to the requested network service, determining at least one communication parameter needed by the mobile communication device; (c) according to the needed communication parameter, selecting a header device from a plurality of wireless communication devices by the communication device; (d) selecting a plurality of agent devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the header device; and (e) selecting a plurality of normal devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the agent devices, so as to establish the adaptive mobile cluster network.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR POWER EFFICIENT OPERATION OF LTE BASED MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to wireless communications and, more particularly, to techniques for power efficient operation of LTE MTC. A method is provided wireless communications by a user equipment (UE). The method generally includes signaling information regarding traffic requirements for the UE to a base station (BS) for use in persistent scheduling (PS), receiving signaling from the BS indicating PS opportunities of traffic for the UE, powering on the radio components for the PS opportunities, and powering down radio components between PS opportunities when traffic is not expected.
|NETWORK MONITORING AND ANALYSIS TOOL - A method for determining the performance of a communications network said method comprising the steps of transmitting a message from a mobile device to at least one server, each server within the at least one servers being configured to direct the message back to the mobile device; receiving at the mobile device the messages returned by each of the at least one server; calculating a time differential between transmission of the message by said mobile device and receipt of the messages, returned by each server of the at least one server, by said mobile device; and forwarding the calculated time differential to a primary server selected from the at least one server for storage is disclosed.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING DCI (DOWNLINK CONTROL INFORMATION) FORMAT SIZE - A method and apparatus are disclosed for handling DCI (Downlink Control Information) format size. The method includes configuring a UE (User Equipment) with one or more carrier segment(s). The method also includes deriving a size of a resource assignment field for a first PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) from a bandwidth configuration of a backward compatible carrier and a bandwidth of the carrier segment(s). The method further includes deriving a size of a resource assignment field for a second PDCCH from the bandwidth configuration of the backward compatible carrier and not from the bandwidth of the carrier segment(s). In one embodiment, the method also includes deriving a fixed size resource block assignment field in a RAR (Random Access Response) grant based on a UL bandwidth configuration of the backward compatible carrier without taking the bandwidth of carrier segment(s) on the UL into account.
|Method And Apparatus For Search Space Configuration For Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel - In one embodiment, the method of configuring a common search space (CSS) for at least one user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system with at least a first type of physical downlink control channel includes broadcasting at least one parameter of a common search space (CSS), none of the parameters being the number of orthogonal frequency-division multiplex (OFDM) symbols. In one embodiment, a method of configuring a default user equipment-specific search space (USS) for a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system with at least a first type of physical downlink control channel includes broadcasting at least one parameter of the default USS, none of the parameters being based on an identifier of the UE. The broadcasting may occur before UE-specific signaling. In one embodiment, a method of configuring or reconfiguring the USS may include transmitting at least one parameter of the USS with UE-specific signaling.
|Method and System for Timeout Monitoring - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for timeout monitoring of concurrent commands or parallel communication channels comprising assigning or de-assigning each one of the commands or communication channels to a corresponding one of a plurality of timeout timers when corresponding commands are to be transmitted or command acknowledges are received respectively.
|HIERARCHICAL NETWORK AND INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - The specification and drawings present a new method, apparatus and software related product (e.g., a computer readable memory) for network management through a hierarchical architecture with a control functionality of a network server (e.g., C-SON) in relationship to clusters comprising eNBs (access points), and for implementing coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission and reception in conjunction with inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) in wireless networks such as LTE wireless networks. In particular, embodiments of the invention describe control and coordination mechanisms among the network elements for different network architectures and use-case scenarios. Such mechanisms may be managed by a centralized self-organizing network controller such as C-SON and hierarchically via localized controllers (such as cluster coordinators) residing in macro eNBs depending on system architectural constraints and network state. A fault-tolerant mechanism then may be defined to recover from failure of controlling sub-elements so that the network remains stable at all times.
|COMMUNICATION CABLE BREAKER AND METHOD USING SAME - An industrial field bus communication cable breaking apparatus includes a housing, a first electrical connector coupled to the housing and configured to be connected to a first field bus communication cable, a first plurality of contacts disposed in the first electrical connector, a second electrical connector coupled to the housing and configured to be connected to a second field bus communication cable, a second plurality of contacts disposed in the second electrical connector, a control input configured to receive a control signal, and a plurality of switches. Each of the plurality of switches has a first end coupled to a respective one of the first plurality of contacts and a second end coupled to a respective one of the second plurality of contacts. Each of the plurality of switches is configured to simultaneously open and close based on the control signal.
|CHANNEL STATUS INFORMATION FEEDBACK APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SAME, BASE STATION, AND TRANSMISSION METHOD OF SAID BASE STATION - A method and wireless communication system using a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) antenna generate vectors and feedback channel status information.
|Serving Multiple Subscribers Through a Software-Enabled Access Point - Methods and apparatus for serving multiple subscribers through a software-enabled access point (softAP) are described. One example method generally includes establishing at least one wireless wide area network (WWAN) connection for one or more wireless local area network (WLAN) clients, wherein each WLAN client belongs to one of a plurality of subscriber groups, and monitoring use of each WWAN connection for each subscriber group of the plurality of subscriber groups.
|Flexible Network Test Apparatus - Apparatus, method, and storage medium for testing a network. A network card may include four transmit engines and four receive engines to respectively generate and process packets at a data rate of 10 GHz. The network card may be configured in a first mode to also include four 10 GHz network interface units coupled to respective ones of the four 10 GHz transmit engines and the four 10 GHz receive engines. The network card may be configured in a second mode to also include a coherent multiplexer to combine packets generated by the four 10 GHz transmit engines into test traffic at a 40 GHz data rate, a packet distribution engine to accept packets at a 40 GHz data rate and distribute the accepted packets between the four 10 GHz receive engines, and a 40 GHz network interface unit coupled to the coherent multiplexer and the packet distribution engine.
|NETWORK INTERFACE TEST DEVICE - A network interface test device for testing a plurality of network interfaces of a network apparatus includes a control unit, a first port, a switch unit, and a plurality of second ports. The control unit generates a control signal required for programming a router line in the switch unit. The programmed router line provides a path for switching a signal between the first port and the second ports. A parallel or cross network test can be performed on a test packet signal of an external network test interface at gigabit Ethernet transmission speed for example, using the switching path. Hence, the network interface test device enables a network test to be performed on a plurality of network interfaces by a network test interface.
|RESOURCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A resource management system and method for inter-cell interference coordination and channel information feedback in a mobile communication system are provided. The resource management method includes transmitting an Almost Blank Subframe (ABS) set from a first base station to a second base station, transmitting a reference resource configuration set for channel measurement and a Radio Link Monitor/Radio Resource Measurement (RLM/RRM) for radio resource measurement from the second base station to a terminal, and scheduling, at the second base station, the terminal in a subframe selected from the ABS set.
|EFFECTIVE TIMING MEASUREMENTS BY A MULTI-MODE DEVICE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for effective measurement in a second Radio Access Technology (e.g., TD-SCDMA) while receiving service in a first Radio Access Technology (e.g., GSM).
|DEVICE TO DEVICE ENHANCED VOICE GROUP CALL - Public safety networks, such as long term evolution (LTE) based public safety networks, can benefit from device to device enhanced voice group call. A method can include serving at least one user equipment. The method can also include controlling device-to-device cluster establishing for the at least one user equipment based on at least one reference signal. This use of device-to-cluster establishment based on at least one reference signal can be applied in various ways, including being applied to group calls.
|METHOD FOR MONITORING AND REPORTING EVENTS BY MEDIA GATEWAYS - A method for monitoring and reporting events by media gateways, including: presetting events in the media gateways; the media gateways monitoring the preset events and reporting the monitoring result to a media gateway controller during operation. The events may include: off-hook, on-hook, dialing, hook flash, network fault, quality alarm, and timer timeout, etc. By presetting events in the media gateways, the problem of system resulted from the fact that the media gateways can not obtain events issued from the media gateway controller due to various reasons can be avoided through presetting events in the media gateway and then monitoring and reporting the events by the media gateway automatically after the media gateways are started up. Thereby, system stability can be improved.
|CHANNEL ESTIMATING APPARATUS, CDMA RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND CHANNEL ESTIMATING METHOD - A corrected channel estimating apparatus is disclosed, which is capable of removing side-lobe components mutually leaking into transmission paths from channel estimates to increase the accuracy. A channel estimation unit calculates channel estimates for a plurality of transmission paths due to a signal that arrives through multipath. A channel estimate correction unit removes side-lobe components mutually leaking into the transmission paths from the channel estimates calculated by the channel estimation unit to correct the channel estimates. In this way, the corrected channel estimating apparatus estimates transmission paths of a multipath.
|ENVIRONMENT ANALYSIS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDOOR WIRELESS LOCATION - An environment analysis system for indoor wireless location by using locations of a plurality of access points (AP) includes, a first environment analysis tool (
|ACCESS GATEWAY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - An Access Gateway Management System (AGMS) allows telephone operating companies to transition their existing wireline customers over to Voice over the Internet Protocol (VoIP) technology without having to invest in new workflow processes, systems, or maintenance facilities by adapting the Operational Support Systems interfaces currently employed for managing legacy circuit-switched switching systems to manage Line Access Gateways (LAGs), which are the generic line termination systems employed in VoIP infrastructure. The AGMS also configures and adapts metallic loop test systems currently deployed for the purpose of routine maintenance and troubleshooting of subscriber lines terminating directly or indirectly (through access systems) on existing switching systems to continue to provide this functionality when the lines terminate on LAGs. Synchronization of the subtended LAGs is coordinated with the legacy network by the AGMS.
|Supporting an Access to a Destination Network Via a Wireless Access Network - For supporting an access to a destination network by a mobile device via a wireless access network, the mobile device generates a predetermined request, which is addressed to a connectivity test server in the destination network. The predetermined request is transmitted to the wireless access network. In case the predetermined request reaches the connectivity test server, it generates a predetermined response and transmits it to the mobile device via the wireless access network. The mobile device determines whether a response to the predetermined request is received from the wireless access network and whether a received response corresponds to the predetermined response.
|Method, System and Device for Using Terminal Identifier - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, a system and a device for using a user equipment identity, and the method includes: the network side configures, for a user equipment performing carrier aggregation, the uniform Radio Network Temporary Identity (RNTI)(s) in the cell where the carrier aggregation is performed; the network side and the user equipment perform data reception and transmission using the uniform RNTI(s) configured in the cell where the carrier aggregation is performed. By the invention, a user equipment with carrier aggregation technology is able to perform the data reception and transmission with each cell using the RNTI(s).
|Received Information Monitor Adaptive to Multiple Monitoring Modes in a Communication Device - An apparatus for monitoring of received information in a communication device comprises a first buffer having a plurality of storage elements adapted to store respective portions of the received information, a second buffer coupled to the first buffer and having a plurality of storage elements corresponding to respective ones of the storage elements of the first buffer, and controller circuitry coupled to the buffers and operative to detect a message sequence comprising a plurality of the portions of the received information. The second buffer stores a previously-detected message sequence loaded from the first buffer into the second buffer under control of the controller circuitry. The controller circuitry in detecting a current message sequence is configurable in at least first and second different monitoring modes each associated with a different message format. The monitoring mode of the controller circuitry may be adaptively configured based at least in part on a detected message sequence.
|INTERNAL/EXTERNAL NETWORK IDENTIFIER - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for marking one or more entities of a call as internal/external such that certain call features can be invoked by servers and other devices residing behind a gateway. More specifically, entities of a call can be marked as internal/external based employing an assessment algorithm to determine whether the calling endpoint is an internal or external endpoint and/or whether a user of the calling or answering endpoint is an internal or external user. Once this determination is made, the call can be marked accordingly such that the appropriate features can be invoked.
|REPEATER MONITOR SYSTEM AND REPEATER MONITOR METHOD - A monitor terminal transmits a monitor request command to monitor a repeater station designated by an operator to a monitor server via the Internet. The monitor server detects a monitor station located in the communication range of the designated repeater station from the content of the received monitor request command, and transmits a monitor instruction command to the detected monitor station via the Internet. The monitor station intercepts a radio signal during transmission from the repeater station to a radio communication device or vice versa. Upon reception of the monitor instruction command, the monitor station transmits the intercepted radio signal as monitor data to the monitor server. The monitor server transfers the monitor data to the monitor terminal. Upon reception of the monitor data transferred from the monitor server, the monitor terminal radio-transmits the received monitor data using a radio wave format receivable by the radio communication device.
|VIDEO PROCESSOR AND VIDEO PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - According to one embodiment, a video processor plays back streaming data while receiving the streaming data via wireless communication from a server which simultaneously transmits the same streaming data to a plurality of devices in a group. The video processor includes a wireless communication module, a playback module, a monitor, and a controller. The wireless communication module has power saving mode in which wireless communication function is turned on/off at predetermined intervals, and performs wireless communication while the wireless communication function is ON. The playback module performs processing to participate in the group, and plays back streaming data from the server while receiving the streaming data when the video processor participates in the group. The monitor monitors the processing performed by the playback module to participate in the group. The controller cancels the power saving mode when the monitor detects that the processing is performed to participate in the group.
|COMMUNICATION METHOD WITH USER EQUIPMENT AND H(e) NB FOR MINIMIZING ACCESS NETWORK EXTENSION IMPACT - A communication method is adapted to a mobile communication system including a user equipment, a core network, and a small-scale radio base station, namely, a H(e) NB. The H(e) NB relays packets of data between the user equipment and the core network by way of radio communication with the user equipment and by way of wired communication with the core network. The H(e) NB monitors communications of the user equipment so as to compare the user communication information with a threshold value used for discerning unauthenticated communication from received communication, thus reducing the amount of data transferred between the core network and the user equipment performing the unauthenticated communication with exploitation. Thus, it is possible to prevent throughputs of data from decreasing due to unauthenticated exploitation of the H(e) NB with respect to the authenticated subscriber.
|AGGREGATING AND CAPTURING SUBSCRIBER TRAFFIC - Data traffic, such as wireless data traffic egressing to the Internet, is aggregated at one or more regional aggregation hubs, and a portion(s) of data traffic associated with a subscriber(s) of interest is captured at the regional aggregation hub(s). Data traffic associated with subscribers can be aggregated at an access concentrator(s) and respective public Internet Protocol (IP) addresses can be given to respective subscribers. The data traffic can be aggregated at the regional aggregation hub(s) and data traffic associated with a subscriber(s) of interest can be identified based at least in part on the public IP address(es) of the respective subscriber(s) of interest. The data traffic associated with a subscriber(s) of interest can be captured and provided to a consumer (e.g., law enforcement, service provider) who desires such data.
|Technique for Peak Power Reduction - A peak power reduction technique for a transmitter stage configured to map a set of input symbols onto a set of orthogonal subcarriers to generate a modulated signal is proposed. The technique can be adaptively implemented responsive to a dynamically changing subcarrier allocation. In a method realization, the technique comprises the steps of receiving the modulated signal in a time domain representation, evaluating a power distribution of the modulated signal in the time domain to detect one or more power peaks, and processing the one or more peaks detected in the modulated signal taking into account the dynamically changing subcarrier mapping.
|Dynamic QOS Tagging for RTP Packets - Improved handling of RTP streams in digital networks. A switching device in a digital network such as a controller, bridge, or access point examines streams flowing through the device. The device monitors the initial UDP packets of a stream until a predetermined number of packets have been monitored. The device monitors and fingerprints the header portion of UDP packets, looking for RTP header bit patterns, ignoring certain RTP packet types, and caching others. This fingerprinting process attempts to match cached packet header information against subsequent packets in the stream to detect RTP streams. If the stream is determined to be an RTP stream, then the RTP type from the packet header is used to tag the stream. In one embodiment, such tags are QoS tags. Tagging may also be based on the control session port used.
|COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND DEVICE - A bearer management node maintains specific bearers eligible for restoration of communication services, while removing other bearers.
|VIRTUAL NETWORK INTERFACE WITH PACKET FILTERING HOOKS - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with using packet filter hooks to selectively re-direct network packets to a virtual network interface are described. In one embodiment, a method includes re-directing a network packet at a filter hook point in an Internet Protocol processing stack. The example method may also include re-directing the network packet to a virtual network interface.
|PROVIDING MULTIPLE RETRANSMISSION POLICIES FOR A SINGLE DATA STREAM BY MAPPING DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES CODE POINT (DSCP) BIT FIELDS TO MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT (MPDU) BIT FIELDS - One feature provides for a method operational at an access point in communication with a destination station where the access point receives a stream of data including at least one media access control protocol data unit (MPDU) having a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) field value, provides a retransmission policy to the MPDU based on the DSCP field value, and transmits the MPDU to the destination station via a wireless local area network. The stream of data may include a stream of video data having a layered modulation scheme, where the DSCP field value identifies at least one layer of the layered modulation scheme. The access point may use deep packet inspection to retrieve the DSCP value from the MPDU. In this fashion, multiple retransmission policies may be provided for a single data stream by mapping DSCP field values to MPDU bit fields, such as the Traffic Identifier field.
|SIMULATING TIME-VARYING CONDITIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Time-varying conditions in a wireless network are simulated using an architecture that includes an enclosure for shielding a wireless device under test ("DUT") from electro-magnetic interference, including other wireless devices; and at least one of: (1) a communications traffic generating device operable to generate communications traffic having selected characteristics; and (2) at least one dynamically adjustable attenuator in communication with the wireless device and the traffic generator. Embodiments of the architecture include wireless test equipment for testing operating range, roaming and capacity. The attenuator is used to adjustably attenuate signals between the device and the traffic generator over time during a test, whereby motion of the device is simulated. By connecting multiple access points, each associated with a dynamically adjustable attenuator, it is possible to force the DUT to roam between access points. The communications traffic generating device can be used to vary traffic over time during a test in order to test capacity, prioritization and admission control. For example, the communications traffic generator may include phone and data client emulators which simulate different traffic types that can be independently varied over time during a test.
|TIME TRIGGERED ETHERNET SYSTEM TESTING MEANS AND METHOD - Methods and apparatus are provided for evaluating the performance of a Time Triggered Ethernet (TTE) system employing Time Triggered (TT) communication. A real TTE system under test (SUT) having real input elements communicating using TT messages with output elements via one or more first TTE switches during a first time interval schedule established for the SUT. A simulation system is also provided having input simulators that communicate using TT messages via one or more second TTE switches with the same output elements during a second time interval schedule established for the simulation system. The first and second time interval schedules are off-set slightly so that messages from the input simulators, when present, arrive at the output elements prior to messages from the analogous real inputs, thereby having priority over messages from the real inputs and causing the system to operate based on the simulated inputs when present.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING MULTIPLE DEVICES TO SHARE A DATA TRANSMISSION PERIOD - Various embodiments are directed to changes in protocols, e.g., an enhanced 802.11 based protocol, that enables SIR based yielding and/or improves spatial reuse in networks, e.g., 802.11 based networks. Various methods and apparatus enable multiple devices using an 802.11 based protocol to communicate, e.g., transmit, during the same time interval. In various embodiments, the methods and apparatus use transmission timing constraints and/or Signal Interference Ratio (SIR) based yielding to avoid excessive interference between devices within communication range of each other.
|GENERATING PACKETS TO TEST FRAGMENTATION - Methods, apparatus and machine readable storage media for testing fragmentation of datagrams by a network under test. A traffic generator may generate a datagram including a header and a payload, the payload containing plural instrumentation blocks, each instrumentation block containing information identifying the datagram and information identifying the location of each instrumentation block within the datagram. The traffic generator may transmit the datagram over the network under test.
|DETECTION AND DISPLAY OF PACKET CHANGES IN A NETWORK - The system and method send test packets into a network between a plurality of source and destination nodes. Each source node is also a destination node. The test packet contains an additional field (e.g., a field of particular interest to an application or user) that is subject to being modified as the test packet traverses the network (e.g., a DSCP marking). A determination is made if the additional field has changed; if so, the network node that changed the additional field is identified and displayed to a user in a matrix display of the source nodes and destination nodes. This allows a user to identify situations where changes in the additional field may indicate that the test packet is being routed in the network at a priority that is outside of a Service Level Agreement.
|Method for Performing Lifebeat Monitoring - A method of lifeboat monitoring between a first and a second communication device, wherein a first monitoring request is received by the second communication device from the first communication device, where the first monitoring request to has a first monitoring time. In addition, a first reception time is determined by the second communication device based on the first monitoring time, lifeboat signals are received by the second communication device from the first communication device, and an interruption in the communication connection to the first communication device is triggered by the second communication device if, during the first reception time following receipt by the second communication device of the last lifeboat signal, a new lifeboat signal from the first communication device is unreceived by the second communication device.
|METHOD AND WIRELESS DEVICE FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL - Provided are a method and a wireless device for monitoring a control channel in a wireless communication system. The wireless device monitors a first downlink control channel in a common search space of a subframe, and monitors a second downlink control channel in a user equipment-specific search space of the subframe. The first downlink control channel is modulated by a cell-specific reference signal, and the second downlink control channel is modulated by a reference signal that is specific to the wireless device.
|Received Signal Quality Measurement Triggering and Reporting - An apparatus and method provide received signal quality measurement management triggering and reporting. Specifically, a received signal quality range is defined including a best received signal quality as upper border, which is the best received signal quality in a radio resource management measurement among all received signal qualities measured in a received signal quality measurement procedure. The, a report is processed which includes a predetermined number of signal originating points providing a received signal quality at a reference location within the defined received signal quality range.
|Method, Computer Program Product, and Apparatus for Comparing Traffic Pattern Models of a Complex Communication System - Traffic pattern models of a complex communication system are compared. A normalized transmission parameter is computed for each traffic pattern model. Model parameters are also computed for each traffic pattern model. The model parameters for each traffic pattern model represent anticipated traffic flow through the complex communication system over a predetermined time period. Data representing an actual traffic flow pattern through the complex communication system over the predetermined time period is compared to the model parameters representing anticipated traffic patterns for each model. The normalized transmission parameters for each of the traffic pattern models are also compared.
|METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A DEVICE FOR THE SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and preferably to a wireless communication system comprising a relay. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method for allocating backhaul resources and to a device for the same. Also, the present invention relates to a method for allocating resources for a physical control channel and to a device for the same. Also, the present invention relates to a method for processing downlink signals and to a device for the same.
|ADAPTIVE CALL ADMISSION CONTROL FOR USE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to communication systems and to systems and methods for implementing adaptive call admission control (CAC) in such systems. Adaptive call admission control can determine what CPE to base station calls (connections) are allowed at any given time. CAC, coupled with precedence, can further determine what connections are suspended if less bandwidth is available than is currently committed. Multiple techniques are disclosed to select connections for suspension. These techniques include suspending enough connections through the affected CPE until there is enough bandwidth to meet the remaining commitment, randomly (or in a round robin fashion) choosing connection to suspend from the entire set of connection, and using precedence priority levels.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESUMPTION OF TIMESLOT MONITORING - A method for a mobile station to communicate with a wireless communications network includes monitoring a first subset of timeslots of a set of timeslots designated for communication and determining, from at least data associated with the first subset of timeslots, that timeslots not within the first subset of timeslots had communications directed to the mobile station associated therewith and were not monitored by the mobile station. The method also includes monitoring a second subset of timeslots of the set of timeslots after said determining.
|PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A packet processing apparatus for receiving incoming packets transmitted from any of the other apparatuses, processing the incoming packets and transmitting the processed packets to any of the other apparatuses, includes a buffer for temporarily storing the incoming packets; a processing unit for processing the incoming packets stored in the buffer and transmitting the processed packets to any of the other apparatuses; and a mode controller for controlling an operation mode of the processing unit, wherein when the mode controller is to change the operation mode of the processing unit, the mode controller generates a request for suspension of transmitting incoming packets to the any of the other apparatuses, confirms that the processing unit has completed processing of all the incoming packets stored in the buffer, changes the operation mode of the processing unit, and generates a request for resume of transmitting incoming packets to the any other apparatuses.
|SNOOPING IN SAS EXPANDER NETWORKS - Snooping in SAS expander networks is disclosed. Ports in a SAS expander may include snoop circuitry and a snoop tap which allows snoop data to be diverted for snooping prior to any significant transformation of the traffic by the regular port logic. Furthermore, the snoop circuitry can receive OOB signaling and convert it to K characters for transmission through the SAS network and subsequent analysis by a protocol analyzer. The ports and cascades in the expander network can be configured to create snoop paths to enable snoop data to be passed through the network to locations where a protocol analyzer can be easily attached. With SAS snoop ports, there is no disruption to the system. Because only a copy of the data is routed to the analyzer, there is no change to the original signal path and latency is identical with or without the analyzer.
|METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PERFORMING IP LINK PROVING USING HEARTBEAT MESSAGES - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein comprises methods, systems, and computer program products for performing IP link proving using heartbeat messages. The method includes transmitting a plurality of heartbeat messages over an IP communications link. A transmission parameter of the plurality of heartbeat messages is varied and a plurality of heartbeat acknowledgement messages corresponding to at least a subset of the plurality of heartbeat messages is received. A measure of processing capabilities of the IP communications link is determined based on the transmission parameters and the heartbeat acknowledgement messages.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOGGING AND REPORTING MBMS-RELATED MEASUREMENT INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for logging and reporting MBMS-related measurement information by a terminal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving, from a base station, configuration information for configuring the terminal to receive an MBMS; and logging, if the terminal receives the MBMS, information of the MBMS based on the received configuration information.
|MONITORING WIRELESS NODES USING PORTABLE DEVICE - Technologies are generally described for a portable device capable of monitoring wireless nodes and reporting to a wireless node management system is described. The portable device may be used to receive a transmission from the wireless node, which may send the transmission periodically or upon receiving a beacon signal from the portable device. If the wireless node is unable to communicate with its access point, the portable device may interrogate the wireless node to determine its status or retrieve status information from the received transmission. The portable device may record the wireless node information contained in the transmission and provide to a wireless node controller such as an access point along with location information. The portable device may also provide direct information associated with the wireless node's status through a display or similar output device to a user.
|HOME NETWORK TEST CIRCUIT - A home network bandwidth diagnostic device includes a housing and a coaxial connector portion secured to the housing. The connector is adapted to electronically couple the diagnostic device to an active distribution port within a subscriber drop system. The diagnostic device further includes a radio frequency injection circuit coupled to the coaxial connector. The radio frequency injection circuit includes a signal injector configured to inject a radio frequency test signal at a first power level substantially to the subscriber drop system. The test signal is defined by a lower home network frequency and an upper home network frequency. The diagnostic device further includes a receiver test circuit having a diplexer circuit coupled to the coaxial connector. An input of the diplexer circuit is configured to accept the radio frequency test signal at a second, lower power level, and an output of the diplexer circuit includes a first test path to pass substantially only the lower home network frequency. The output of the diplexer circuit further includes a second test path to pass substantially only the upper home network frequency. The diagnostic device further includes a first indicator disposed on the first test path and a second indicator disposed on the second test path. The indicators are configured to change state when the second power level is greater than a threshold value. The diagnostic device may be used to determine if sufficient power exists in a subscriber drop system to operate home network-enabled devices, such as MoCA-enabled devices.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS TO TRIGGER MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADES OF ACCESS NETWORKS - Example methods and apparatus to trigger maintenance and upgrades of access networks are disclosed. An example method comprises obtaining a first value representing a number of unassigned ports associated with a first digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM), obtaining a second value representing a projected number of ports associated with the first DSLAM needed to satisfy at least one of anticipated, projected or pending service requests, and determining whether to automatically submit a preventative maintenance trouble ticket for the first DSLAM based on the first and second values.
|Circuit Allocation within a Communication Core Network - A method of seizing Time Division Multiplex terminations at a media gateway controlled by a plurality of media gateway controllers. The method comprises receiving at the media gateway from one of said media gateway controllers, a gateway control protocol request to seize a TDM termination, the request specifying a route but not a specific Time Division Multiplex termination (
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING MULTI-LAYER PACKET - Provided is an apparatus and method for inspecting a multi-layer packet. The apparatus may include a lower layer processing unit to generate lower layer hash information based on a lower layer packet of the multi-layer packet, and to perform a first processing with respect to a flow of the multi-layer packet, in association with the generated lower layer hash information, and a higher layer preprocessing unit to perform a second processing with respect to a flow of the multi-layer packet where the first processing is performed, in association with the lower layer hash information.
|RECEIVER SIGNAL PROBING USING A SHARED PROBE POINT - A device and method are disclosed wherein a receiver signal line within an integrated circuit may be selected for probing. In one embodiment, a plurality of signal pads and a test pad are provided on an external surface of an integrated circuit chip. A plurality of signal lines extends through the integrated circuit chip to the signal pads. A multiplexer on the integrated circuit chip is configured for individually selecting any of the signal lines. An amplifier on the integrated circuit chip amplifies a selected signal and communicates the amplified signal to an externally-accessible test pad to be probed.
|NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, DATA ACQUISITION APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR CHECKING OPERATING CONDITIONS OF NODES - Disclosed is a network management system, including: a data acquisition apparatus to receive data sent from each of a plurality of nodes to store at least latest receipt time of the data; and a management apparatus to check an operating condition of each of the nodes based on the latest receipt time stored in the data acquisition apparatus.
|LINK LAYER ASSISTED ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION CONTEXT UPDATE MANAGEMENT - A method and system for communicating header compression layer control messages. Header compression control messages are generated by a header compression layer (
|Inferred Discovery of a Data Communications Device - Methods, apparatus, and products for inferred discovery of a data communications device connected to a router, unreachable by a management module, and characterized by a device address are disclosed that include querying, by the management module, the router for connection data and identifying, by the management module in dependence upon the connection data, the device address.
|CONTROLLING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN FORWARD ACCESS CHANNEL (CELL_FACH) STATE - Since common E-DCH resources may be assigned from a single Node B, uplink macro-diversity may not be possible between neighboring Node B's. In addition, a user equipment (UE) assigned a common E-DCH resource may not be allowed to perform cell reselection. Thus, maintaining the assignment of a common E-DCH resource to a given UE for more than a few hundred milliseconds may result in unacceptable inter-cell interference, for example, when the UE moves closer to a neighboring cell controlled by a non-serving Node B. To overcome inter-cell interference and allow a more extensive utilization of the Cell_FACH state, a method may be used to detect and/or control inter-cell interference.
|UNADDRESSED DEVICE COMMUNICATION FROM WITHIN AN MPLS NETWORK - An unaddressed device installed inline in a path of an MPLS network can communicate a packet from within the MPLS network to an upstream device without knowledge of the necessary MPLS labeling by sending the packet intentionally in the wrong direction: downstream. To communicate to an upstream device, the unaddressed device sends a packet downstream into the MPLS network on the opposite side and through the opposite outgoing port from that which would be used for a packet sent to the same device in a non-MPLS network. This behavior forces the MPLS network, when it next inspects the packet, to re-label it with the correct labeling to route the packet on a path back upstream to the recipient device. In this manner, the MPLS architecture is used to redirect or loop back packets from an unaddressed inline device to the upstream device.
|Non-Intrusive and Operational Communication System Monitoring and Diagnostics - A non-intrusive and operational communication system monitoring and diagnostics. Loopback-type testing is facilitated through testing that is split between transmit and receive sections. Transmit testing on a port can be based on test packets that are removed from the transmission path by a PHY upon detection. Receive testing on a port can be based on live traffic packets.
|PROBLEM WITH GCSNA ARQ - An apparatus for notifying of a circuit switched event over a packetized data network. The apparatus includes a packetized data modem and an interworkng interface. The packetized data modem is configured to transmit and receive packetized data over a packetized data radio link. The packetized data modem has a tunneling link access control processor that is configured to encapsulate/decapsulate data for a subset of sub-layers corresponding to a link access control layer of a circuit switched network model. The interworking interface is operatively coupled to the packetized data modem via the packetized data network, and is configured to notify the packetized data modem of the circuit switched event. The interworkng interface has a link access control/tunneling link access control processor that is configured to encapsulate/decapsulate the data when performing notification of the circuit switched event.
|Method for Triggering Status Reports and Apparatus Thereof - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for triggering a status report in a RLC acknowledged mode protocol. The technical scheme includes: A, constructing and transmitting a status report at a data receiving end of a RLC layer when a reordering timer is timeout or a packet for setting a polling bit is received from a transmitting end; B, determining whether the data receiving window is in smoothly moving status, and if in the smoothly moving status, enabling a status prohibit timer immediately after the status report has been transmitted, and considering the retransmission triggered by the status report at this time to be successful; and if the data receiving window is not in the smoothly moving status, performing step C; C, detecting whether the retransmission triggered by the status report at this time is successful, and if successful, enabling the status prohibit timer.
|MANAGEMENT OF CLASSIFICATION FRAMEWORKS TO IDENTIFY APPLICATIONS - According to an example, a classification framework to identify an application name may be managed by accessing network flow information collected at a client device by an agent installed on the client device, in which the network flow information is information corresponding to network traffic that is at least one of communicated and received by an application running on the client device, accessing flow features of a plurality of packets that are at least one of communicated and received by the application, and creating training data for a classifier based upon a correlation of the network flow information and the flow features of the plurality of packets.
|METHOD OF MEASUREMENT REPORTING AND CELLULAR RADIO TERMINAL - A method of measurement reporting and a cellular radio terminal are provided. A method of measurement reporting comprises receiving, while a measurement reporting scheme is active, a request for a radio connection reconfiguration, suspending the measurement reporting scheme upon the receiving a request and resuming the suspended measurement reporting scheme upon a completion of the radio connection reconfiguration. A cellular radio terminal is configured to carry out the method of measurement reporting.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING VIDEO, AUDIO, AND DATA CONTENT USING A FIBER OPTIC NETWORK - The present invention is directed to a system and method for controlling a data transmission network, and in particular, to a fiber optic broadcast quality video and audio transmission network, that can also provide customers, or users, the feature of accessing and controlling network parameters to set up and customize their own network connection and services, and where the fiber optic network may also be integrated with satellite transmission.
|Detecting and Avoiding Routing Loops with BGP Route Server Extensions - In an embodiment, a method comprises: receiving, at a data packet router, a path advertisement comprising information about an available path; determining whether the path advertisement comprises an originator identifier of an originator of the available path; in response to determining that the path advertisement comprises the originator identifier of the originator of the available path, determining whether the originator identifier of the available path is a router identifier of the data packet router, and in response to determining that the originator identifier of the available path is the router identifier of the data packet router, not accepting the path advertisement; wherein the method is performed by one or more processors of the data packet router.
|COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system with improved fairness of band allotment among the users accommodated by different node. Traffic received by UNI interface and traffic received by NNI interface are stored in separate queues and the respective numbers of paths received by the UNI interface and the NNI interface are measured based on route information. The traffic received by the UNI interface and the traffic received by the NNI interface are distributed based on the measured result.
|Router Packet Filtering And Mapping - A method includes determining in a router whether a test portion of a received packet matches test data specified in a filter. The test portion is specified in the filter by a first offset parameter and a first length parameter. The received packet is modified by the router replacing data in a map portion of the packet with map data specified in the filter if the test portion matches the test data. The map portion is also specified in the filter by a second offset parameter and a second length parameter.
|Methods and Apparatus to Perform Reference Signal Measurements in a TDD-LTE System From a TD-SCDMA System - Methods and apparatus are provided for performing measurement of reference signals in the proper subframes of a first radio access technology (RAT) while operating in a second RAT. For certain aspects, the first and second RATs may be Time Division Duplex Long Term Evolution (TDD-LTE) and Time Division—Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA), respectively. By knowing the correct TDD-LTE downlink and uplink subframe configurations, a user equipment device (UE) may temporarily leave the TD-SCDMA network during an idle interval and perform expedited and accurate measurement of TDD-LTE reference signals without errors from trying to measure reference signals during uplink subframes.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DELIVER OF DATA PACKETS TO A USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a communication system (
|WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - A method of allocating resources in a wireless sensor network, the network having functions including medical monitoring of a patient using multiple network devices having sensors, the method including steps of: sensing, by a network device in the network, a life parameter of the patient; recognising the existence of an emergency condition with respect to the parameter; the network device sending a request for streaming towards a coordinator of the network; the coordinator receiving (S
|LOAD-BALANCING GATEWAYS - A gateway system determines whether load conditions are heavy or light according to a predetermined criterion. If load conditions are light, the gateway operates in reactive mode. If load conditions are heavy, the gateway operates in proactive mode.
|Network User Usage Profiling - Methods, systems, devices, and software are disclosed for generating a network usage profile. Certain embodiments of the network usage profile include a devices-by-node profile, indicating the set of customer devices available for use in communicating with a customer-side network node located at a customer side of an access network over a period of time, where some of the customer devices are not in operative communication with the customer-side network node during a portion of that time. Other embodiments associate the network usage profile with customer information to generate device-by-customer profiles. Still other embodiments associate the network usage profile with network traffic information to generate traffic-by-device profiles. Even other embodiments associate the multiple sources and types of information to generate traffic-by-customer profiles and/or traffic-by-device-by-customer profiles. Any of the profiles may then be accessed by one or more parties for use in affecting various network services, including targeting content delivery.
|METHOD OF HANDLING AN ERROR ON CS VOICE OVER HSPA - A method of processing data at a specific protocol layer in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The present invention includes the steps of receiving a first data block including sequence information from a lower layer, checking a status of a second data block contained in the first data block, the second data block being an upper layer data block having time information, and if the status of the second data block fails to correspond to a prescribed condition, discarding the first data block.
|Transmitting apparatus, receiving apparatus, error correcting system, transmitting method, and error correcting method - A transmitting apparatus includes a generating unit and a transmitting unit. The generating unit generates first error correction packets by performing predetermined operation processing on a plurality of data packets arranged in a plurality of rows and columns respectively in each of the rows and columns and generating at least one second error correction packet by performing the predetermined operation processing on the data packets existing in a diagonal direction crossing the plurality of rows and columns. The transmitting unit transmits the plurality of data packets and the generated first and second error correction packets.
|Testing method for network device - A testing method for a network device includes the steps of communicating with the network device through a network protocol by a testing host; and transmitting at least one first network protocol packet to the network device so as to enable a command line interface (CLI) of the network device through a first testing command by the testing host.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING FOR SIGNALS AND SELECTING AND/OR USING A COMMUNICATIONS BAND BASED ON THE MONITORING RESULTS - Methods and apparatus for supporting peer to peer communications are described. A plurality of wide area network communications bands in a wireless communications system are also available for use to communicate peer to peer signals. Some WAN bands may be, and sometimes are unused by a base station for WAN communications at a particular location. A peer to peer communications device monitors one or more WAN communications bands. Received signals in the monitored band or bands are compared to threshold criteria. In one embodiment, if the peer to peer communications device finds that no signal is detected in the monitored band or that the received evaluated signal from the monitored band is below a specified threshold level, then the peer to peer wireless terminal is allowed to use a band which is either the monitored band or a band corresponding to the monitored band for peer to peer signaling.
|METHOD, SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, FOR CORRELATING SPECIAL SERVICE IMPACTING EVENTS - Special service impacting events in an IP network are collected and correlated. Real-time data representing occurrence of trunk group events impacting special services in trunk groups that are in service is collected, along with call detail records recorded by network elements representing occurrence of call events impacting special services and performance measurements of network elements representing occurrence of events affecting performance of the network elements impacting the special services. The collected real-time data representing occurrence of trunk group events, collected call detail record and collected performance measurements are correlated, and alarms are generated based on the correlated data.
|PERFORMANCE INDICATOR FOR A HIGH-SPEED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for generating a performance indicator in a high-speed communication system. A plurality of disparate communication status signals with differing formats from a transceiver are combined in a logic module to create a single link quality indicator signal. The link quality indicator signal is used to encode different operational states of the transceiver from fully operational, to marginally operational, to failed. The link quality indicator signal is advantageously employed to drive a LED creating a visual performance indicator.
|Time-Slotted Protocol With Arming - The method augments the time-slotted protocols with additional features that allow arming functions to be implemented as an inherent part of the protocol.
|System and Method for Mobile Terminal Initiated Satellite Communications - A system and method for improving efficiency of satellite communications is described. In one embodiment, efficient satellite communications is enabled through event-driven reporting by a mobile terminal.
|SYSTEMS AND/OR METHODS FOR PROVIDING EPDCCH IN A MULTIPLE CARRIER BASED AND/OR QUASI-COLLATED NETWORK - ePDCCH may be provided. For example, a WTRU may receive a configuration for monitoring an ePDCCH resource. Based on the configuration, the WTRU may be configured to monitor and may monitor the ePDCCH resource on a particular subframe. Additionally, a WTRU may derive an aggregation level for a subframe associated with an aggregation level number N
|Distributed RAN Information Collection, Consolidation And RAN-Analytics - Control Plane and User plane packet data are collected within the Radio Access Network using a plurality of network devices. Consolidation and summarization of this information is then performed to present a unified picture of RAN through abstract APIs to management and analytics applications. The invention identifies methods of retaining the collected network data, such as control and application protocol headers at the collection points, and consolidation and exporting this network data to management/reporting/analytics application using application driven rules for consolidation and summarization. Real-time statistical analysis tools, which may be used to predict failure and degradation trends and proactively control the underlying causes, are also disclosed.
|TEST SYSTEM WITH RETURN SWEEP LEVEL SETTING - A test system comprising: providing a conditioning circuit; cabling a cable modem termination system to the conditioning circuit; signaling an initial ranging request to the cable modem termination system; and determining a transmission power limiter by the conditioning circuit monitoring a network for detecting a cable modem termination system response to the initial ranging request.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING A SET UP SIGNAL USED FOR DATA COMMUNICATION OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of detecting a set up signal having a predetermined frequency and used for data transmissions over a communication network comprises filtering the received signal by a Butterworth filter having a passband including the predetermined frequency, determining an energy level of the filtered received signal and comparing the determined energy level of the filtered received signal with a first predetermined value and providing a first detect signal when the determined energy level is greater than the first predetermined value. The method further comprises identifying a component of the received signal at the predetermined frequency and determining an energy level of the identified component, comparing (
|Traffic Control Method, Device and Terminal - A traffic control method, a traffic controlling device, and a terminal are provided, which relate to the field of communications technology. The traffic control method includes the following. A working temperature of equipment is monitored. It is determined whether the working temperature reaches a control temperature. If the working temperature reaches the control temperature, a rate of data interaction between the adjacent function layers is controlled. The adjacent function layers are two random adjacent function layers in a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) 7-layer model. Therefore, a user can use equipment normally when power consumption of wireless terminal equipment is reduced.
|TESTING SYSTEM - A testing system for testing a network apparatus has a plurality of network ports. The system includes a signal generating device for providing a test packet to the network apparatus; a network apparatus connecting device for connecting to the network apparatus; a switching device for switching between a plurality of router lines; and a controlling device for controlling a test procedure, by controlling selection and cycling of the router lines to perform a test on the network ports one by one and allowing the network ports to return the test packet by the test packet return instruction. Accordingly, the network connection status of the network ports of the network apparatus is determined according to the test packet. The test system allows a test to be conducted on the network ports of the network apparatus quickly and at low costs.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE OF RESERVED MEDIUM IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system and method for using reserved resources in coexisting wireless networks. In one embodiment, a wireless apparatus includes a receiver, a network activity monitor, and a network access scheduler. The receiver is configured to identify a received network reservation message that inhibits access to a first wireless network for an interval defined in the reservation message. The network activity monitor is configured to monitor wireless activity on the first wireless network during the interval. The network access scheduler is configured to determine whether the reservation message prevents conflict of the first wireless network with a coexisting wireless network during the interval, and to schedule, based on a determination that the reservation message prevents conflict with the coexisting wireless network, the wireless apparatus to transmit on the first wireless network during the interval to a wireless device other than a wireless device identified in the reservation message.
|RELAY NODE - A relay node functions as a master node or a slave node and includes a status monitoring means, an update requesting means, a master transferring means, and a master accepting means. The status monitoring means monitors a status of a connection related to communication data. The update requesting means transmits a first update request to a first node upon the relay node receiving first communication data while the first node functioning as the master node. The master transferring means determines whether to transfer authority of the master node to a second node in accordance with a status of a first connection upon the relay node receiving a second update request from the second node. The master transferring means transmits a first master transfer notification to the second node. The master accepting means prepares to become the master node upon the relay node receiving a second master transfer notification.
|COMMUNICATION PATH ESTIMATION METHOD, NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM, AND MONITORING APPARATUS - A communication path estimation method for estimating a communication path in a network in which communication is performed by forwarding packets from a plurality of transmission source nodes to a plurality of transmission destination nodes through a plurality of nodes, the method has obtaining, by a computer, path information of a plurality of paths, extracting a path in which a number of lost packets out of packets flowing in the extracted path is a predetermined value or more on the basis of the path information, choosing a pair of adjacent nodes included in the extracted path, and outputting a hypothesis that a static path is set from a first downstream node to a second downstream node when the first downstream node being included in a plurality of paths connected to a plurality of destination nodes and a first upstream node is the same with a second upstream node.
|CONTEXT-AWARE MOBILE COMPUTING FOR AUTOMATIC ENVIRONMENT DETECTION AND RE-ESTABLISHMENT - Automatically discovering and re-establishing wireless connections to other devices in a mobile computing environment (MCE) may be achieved by monitoring connections of different devices with the UE, correlating the connections of the different devices, and defining an MCE based on the correlations. A known MCE may accordingly be automatically detected based on an identification of at least one of the different devices, for example, and connection with one or more of the different devices may be automatically re-established to re-establish the MCE.
|Method And Arrangement For Adapting Transmission Of Encoded Media - The present invention is to select an adaptation scheme for the transmission of the encoded media that results in a satisfactory performance of the transmitted encoded media. A difference from the prior art is that each adaptation scheme defines a set of different transmission formats, wherein each transmission formats is a combination of at least two of the parameters the source codec bit rate, the packet rate, the number of frames of each packet (referred to as frame aggregation), and the level of redundancy. By using the different transmission formats, the transmission can be adapted to different operating scenarios and the performance is hence improved.
|Method for Minimizing Undetectable Errors in Data Packets in Communication Systems - Undetectable errors in packets are minimized by verifying the CRC in each packet, setting a CRC flag to 0 to indicate success, and setting the CRC flag to 1 to indicate failure. If at least one packet in the set of packets fails then generate an error pattern E for each packet by comparing the packet that fails with one packet that passed the CRC verification, and comparing the error pattern to a set of known error patterns. Then, setting a CRC flag to 0 to indicate success and passing the payload of each packet and the CRC flag to the application if the difference is less than a predetermined threshold, and otherwise, setting the CRC flag to 1 to indicate failure.
|Span Session Monitoring - A monitoring session associated with a virtual nickname may be established in a TRILL network. A monitoring station may be connected to an edge switch of the TRILL network specifying the virtual nickname for the monitoring session. The monitoring station is set as a destination for the monitoring session and the virtual nickname is flooded throughout the TRILL network. A source may then be configured to the monitoring session by specifying the virtual nickname of the monitoring session without knowing the destination tied to the monitoring session. Network traffic through the source may then be forwarded to the destination tied to the monitoring session.
|TIME DIVISION DUPLEXING (TDD) CONFIGURATION FOR ACCESS POINT BASE STATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate establishing synchronization and/or mitigating interference with a time division duplexing (TDD) access point base station in a wireless communication environment. For example, a TDD configuration can be selected for the access point base station based upon received information to control interference. By way of another example, the access point base station can be synchronized with a disparate base station based upon the received information. Moreover, the received information can relate to the disparate base station, a served user equipment (UE) (e.g., served by the access point base station, . . . ), and/or a non-served UE (e.g., served by a base station other than the access point base station, . . . ). For example, the served UE can transmit a measurement related to the disparate base station to the access point base station.
|Method and System for Testing a Connection - According to embodiments of the present invention an apparatus suitable for testing a connection defined between a customer entity and a network entity, the connection traversing at least a first portion of a packet-enabled network between said apparatus and the network entity is provided. The apparatus comprises a first interface adapted to exchange with the network entity data associated with the connection over a first traffic VLAN and a second interface adapted to exchange with the customer entity data associated with the connection over a second traffic VLAN bridged to the first traffic VLAN by a bridging entity. The apparatus further comprises a third interface adapted to exchange with a management entity data associated with a management connection over a management VLAN. A control module coupled to the first, second and third interfaces, the control module is provided and the control module is operable to respond to an instruction received from the management entity to cause the switching entity to perform selective bridging of the management VLAN to at least one of the first traffic VLAN and the second traffic VLAN.
|Method for Securing Data and Device for Implementing the Same - A method and system to ensure the integrity of data in a data-processing device, a data packet is read from a memory and checked to determine whether the data packet is an existing code word of a predefined first code, and if the data packet is an existing code word, the data packet is accepted as intact, and if the data packet is not an existing code word, at least one data block of an error-correcting second code that overlaps with the read data packet is ascertained, and an error is searched for in the data packet using the second code, and the data packet is corrected on the basis of the result of the search, and the corrected data packet is accepted as intact.
|Network Device and Method for Loop Detection - A network device for loop detection in a network environment, which includes a broadcast frame detection unit for detecting a broadcast storm condition, a loop detection frame generation unit for generating and transmitting a loop detection frame if the broadcast storm condition detected by the broadcast frame detection unit indicates a broadcast storm happens, a frame parser unit for parsing a network frame received by the network device to obtain an information from the network frame, and a loop checking unit for comparing the network frame with the loop detection frame based on the information obtained from the network frame.
|ADAPTIVE CONTROL CHANNEL DESIGN FOR BALANCING DATA PAYLOAD SIZE AND DECODING TIME - A method of wireless communication includes allocating transport blocks to a control channel region as a function of the size of the transport block. The user equipment (UE) monitors at least two different control regions in a subframe for control information. The monitored control regions do not overlap in time. The UE receives a subframe including control information in at least one of the two different control regions.
|UNICAST TYPE NETWORK APPARATUS AND DATA TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD THEREOF - There are provided a unicast type network apparatus having reduced power consumption, and a data transmission and reception method thereof. The unicast type network apparatus includes: a first device allowing link quality information between the first device and a reception side to be included in a data frame and then transmitting the data frame to the reception side, at the time of transmission of data; and a second device receiving the data frame from the first device and allowing link quality information between the second device and the first device to be included in an acknowledge frame in response to the data frame and then transmitting the acknowledge frame to the first device, when the link quality information is included in the data frame.
|REMOTE MANAGEMENT HARDWARE PLATFORM FOR SITE MONITORING WITH SMART BLOCK I/O DEVICE - A system for monitoring a remote site includes a remote management module including a processor and memory configured to receive and store definitions of the measurements and alarms, and a communication system for reporting collected measurements and alarms to upstream systems, and at least one remote measuring block including port connectors for communicating the remote measuring block with downstream collection devices that collect measurements and alarms at the remote site. A networking connection such as an Ethernet connection is provided between the remote management module and the remote measuring block for transferring data therebetween. The blocks can be located near terminations of the collection devices to reduce the amount of required cabling. The remote management module can store configuration and operating software for the blocks so that new blocks can be automatically configured upon replacement of failed blocks.
|MOBILE STATION, DOWNSTREAM TRANSMISSION RATE CONTROL METHOD, AND DOWNSTREAM TRANSMISSION RATE CONTROL PROGRAM - An aspect of the invention provides a mobile station which can restrict an upper limit of a transmission rate according to a processing capacity in processing packet data received from a base station. The mobile station includes packet data retaining means
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data transmission apparatus of a communication system includes a main data generator configured to generate main data corresponding to a main broadcasting service of broadcasting services; a main signal generator configured to generate a main signal of the main data; an additional data generator configured to generate a plurality of additional data corresponding to various additional services of the broadcasting services; an additional signal generator configured to generate a plurality of additional signals of the plurality of additional data; a power controller configured to control average power of the plurality of additional signals; a coupler configured to couple the main signal and the plurality of additional signals controlled in the average power thereof, and generate a broadcasting signal; and a transmitter configured to transmit the broadcasting signal.
|WIRELESS NETWORK MONITORING DEVICE - A wireless network monitoring and reporting unit is described herein. The unit runs tests in a given order to detect whether certain networking low-level requirements are met (e.g., whether a DHCP lease has been obtained and whether DNS is functional). Certain base tests are may be included for different connections, regardless of the connection's configuration. In the event of a base test failure, higher level tests may be skipped. The wireless network monitoring and reporting unit may provide improvements in the ability to accurately detect and report wireless connectivity problems, and to monitor and report wireless network performance at a given location.
|INTEGRATED SWITCH - Switching between communication ports of a notebook is typically accomplished using an off-chip local area network (LAN) switch or an off-chip high speed analog multiplexer. This off-chip component is disadvantageous for several reasons, including: added cost of an additional component; increased overall power consumption because transmit amplitude loss; and reduced cable reach and link performance due to hybrid mismatch and signal distortions. To reduce cost and preserve electrical and networking performance, an integrated switch is provided to multiplex signals of a networking communication chip to multiple network paths.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK MONITORING AND TESTING USING DIMENSION VALUE BASED KPIS - Embodiments are directed to systems and methods for network monitoring and testing using dimension-value based KPIs that are configured and calculated from a stream of homogenous or heterogeneous data events. The embodiments describe flexible and abstract ways of specifying configurations for the calculation of the KPIs from the stream of network events. Embodiments are described in the context of calculating KPIs for call detail records (CDRs) for computer telephony events.
|BIDIRECTIONAL RADIO-FREQUENCY PROBING - Wireless electronic devices may include wireless communications circuitry such as a transceiver, antenna, and other wireless circuitry. The transceiver may be coupled to the antenna through a bidirectional switch connector. The switch connector may mate with a corresponding radio-frequency test probe that is connected to radio-frequency test equipment. When the test probe is mated with the switch connector, the transceiver may be decoupled from the antenna. During transceiver testing, radio-frequency test signals may be conveyed between the test unit and the transceiver using the test probe. During antenna testing, radio-frequency test signals may be conveyed between the test unit and the antenna using the test probe. Transceiver testing and antenna testing may, if desired, be conducted in parallel using the test probe.
|METHODS AND SYSTEM FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN TTI (TRANSMISSION TIME INTERVAL) BUNDLING FOR IMPROVED PHASE CONTINUITY - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose methods for improving phase continuity in an uplink transmit time interval (TTI) bundle. A first method may include identifying a segment of UL subframes in the TTI bundle and maintaining substantially the same transmit power/timing/frequency when transmitting data to a node over the segment of UL subframes in the TTI bundle. Another method may include ignoring reception of downlink subframes for a duration of the TTI bundle.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM HAVING AN APPLICATION FOR A RUN TIME IPV6 ONLY NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium are disclosed that facilitates an IP network environment. The system includes a computer device having a software module running on an operating system of the computer device, the software module (a) establishes an IP network criteria for incoming and outgoing packets for the computer device; (b) retrieves the incoming and outgoing packets to determine if an IP address for the incoming and outgoing packets meet the IP network criteria; (c) if the IP address for the incoming and outgoing packets meets the IP network criteria, forwards the incoming packets having the IP address to a network layer, which is under or part of the operating system of the computer device and forwards outgoing packets to a network connection; and (d) if the IP address for the incoming and outgoing packets does not meet the IP network criteria, drops the incoming and outgoing packets.
|Multiple Protocol Correlation And Topology Detection in eHRPD Networks - Network nodes and interfaces are identified in a combined CDMA/eHRPD and LTE network. Messages captured by a monitoring system on different interfaces are combined in session records. The session records associated with the same network nodes correlated using parameters in the session records. Session records on an A11, A10 and S2a interfaces are correlated using a home network prefix and interface identifier data or home address information.
|System and Method for Discontinuous Reception Control Start Time - Methods of combining semi-persistent resource allocation and dynamic resource allocation are provided. Packets, such as VoIP packets, are transmitted on the uplink and downlink using respective semi-persistent resources. For each mobile device, awake periods and sleep periods are defined. The semi-persistent resources are aligned with the awake periods so that most of the time the mobile device can turn off its wireless access radio during the sleep periods. In addition, signalling to request, and to allocate, resources for additional packets are transmitted during the awake periods, and the resources allocated for the additional packets are within the awake periods. Methods of extending the awake periods in various embodiments are also provided. Methods of determining the first on period are also provided.
|METHOD FOR COORDINATED TRANSMISSION IN A PLURALITY OF CELLS OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for coordinated transmission in a plurality of cells of a wireless communication system, wherein a user equipment triggers coordinate transmission of a plurality of cells if it detects an interference condition between signals received by the plurality of cells, the user equipment detecting the interference condition based on a radio quality metric dynamically set by the network and triggering coordinate transmission by transmitting a trigger signal to at least a cell of the plurality of cells. A radio equipment and a user equipment for use in a wireless communication system can implement coordinated transmission with the method.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STORING PACKET FLOWS - A method for storing a plurality of packets includes receiving a packets from a network, applying a hash function to values of one or more fields in the packet so as define a hash key and to select a storage bucket from a plurality of buckets, and adding the packet to the storage bucket. A bucket record associated with the storage bucket includes a flow index determined based on the values of the one or more fields in the packet.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM OF REPORTING MEASUREMENT RESULTS IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREOFAANM Huang; YadaAACI Guangdong ProvinceAACO CNAAGP Huang; Yada Guangdong Province CNAANM Shi; XiaojuanAACI Guangdong ProvinceAACO CNAAGP Shi; Xiaojuan Guangdong Province CN - The present invention discloses method and system of reporting the measurement results in a multi-carrier system to a network side equipment and the user equipment thereof, wherein the method includes: dividing the measurement tasks into measurement task groups; the UE determining whether the measurement results of the measurement tasks in the measurement task groups meet the report conditions corresponding to the measurement task groups; the UE generating a measurement report according to the measurement results and reporting the measurement report to the network side equipment. The present invention enhances the flexibility of reporting the measurement report by the UE.
|TRUNKING FOR FABRIC PORTS IN FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCHES AND ATTACHED DEVICES - N_Ports and F_Ports are provided with logic allowing designation of multiple virtual interfaces on a single host bus adaptor or other Fibre Channel interface, one virtual interface for each VSAN operating on the node interface. Node ports with this additional functionality are referred to as trunking N_Ports or TN_Ports. These ports have a functional design allowing creation of the multiple virtual interfaces as appropriate for the application at hand. This port design also includes logic for communicating with a peer fabric port to initialize and modify the configuration of the virtual interfaces on the TN_Port. A corresponding functional design and communication logic is provided for fabric ports, referred to herein as trunking F_Ports or TF_Ports.
|OPTICAL COMMUNICATION LINK EMPLOYING COHERENT DETECTION AND OUT OF BAND CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION - An optical system may include: a demultiplexer to receive an optical signal and to demultiplex the optical signal into a plurality of optical channels; a detector circuit to: receive the plurality of optical channels, and identify a predetermined channel identification trace tone frequency for an optical channel of the plurality of optical channels; and a receiver to: receive the optical channel with the identified predetermined channel identification trace tone frequency from the detector circuit, and process the optical channel.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELF-LEARNING OF VPNS FROM COMBINATIONS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL TUNNELS IN MPLS/VPN NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a data packet is received at a network device. A layer-2 identification (L2ID) value is identified for the received data packet based on a destination address and a label stack of the received data packet. The L2ID value is specific to an application associated with the data packet. A 6-tuple is created that includes the L2ID value. The received data packet is classified using the 6-tuple. Deep packet inspection (DPI) services are performed based on the classification of the received data packet. The DPI services apply a set of one or more application-level policies to the received data packet. The received data packet is forwarded from the network device toward a destination.
|Method and Device For Controlling Network Elements in a Decentralized Network - In decentralized networks such as, for example, peer-to-peer networks, services are not furnished by centralized units, but between the network elements. These also carry out access controls and notify the centralized servers of charge registrations of the services utilized. By suitable valid or invalid inquiry messages, it is monitored by using random sampling, whether the peers fulfill their tasks with regard to charge registration and access controls.
|COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION, COMMUNICATION ROUTE SETTING APPARATUS AND METHOD - Measurement apparatuses have the function of communicating with other measurement apparatuses within a predetermined range by radio. A simulated communication management part of a relay apparatus manages simulated communication of the measurement apparatuses and collects communication results to be managed. A statistical processing part of a communication route setting apparatus statistically processes the results of the simulated communication. An estimation part sets communication routes among the measurement apparatuses on the basis of results of the statistical processing and information from a route information database. The communication routes prepared by a communication route preparation part are notified from a communication route notification part through the relay apparatus to the measurement apparatuses.
|VOICE OVER IP CALL SETUP PROGRESS INDICATOR - A method and apparatus for providing voice over internet protocol (VoIP) call setup progress status comprising creating an indication associated with a call placed from a client VoIP device in a providing network, modifying the indication periodically based on call setup progress and presenting the modified indication.
|METHOD FOR REPORTING AND OBTAINING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION, ENODEB, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method for reporting and obtaining channel state information, an eNodeB, and a user equipment are disclosed. The method for reporting channel state information includes: determining a reported content in channel state information (CSI) of downlink component carriers according to priorities of contents-in-CSI, where the CSI of the downlink component carriers includes the reported content and a content that is not to be reported; and reporting the reported content to an eNodeB on a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH). By determining a reported content in CSI according to a priority, the shortage of a CSI reporting resource may be relieved.
|TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - The present invention relates to a telecommunications apparatus and a method, a storage medium, and a program for determining whether or not an other side communicating apparatus is near in a network. In a transmitting apparatus, a transmitting unit transmits a sending-message, and a control unit receives a response message to the sending-message, which includes acknowledgement information based on shared data and transmission information in the sending-message. The transmitting apparatus also includes a first judging unit that judges whether a response time of the acknowledgement message is less than a predetermined time. A receiving apparatus includes a generating unit that generates the acknowledgment information and transmits the response message to the transmitting apparatus.
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR A HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of performing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a carrier aggregation system is provided. The method includes: monitoring a downlink (DL) grant for initial DL data transmission in a first DL component carrier (CC); receiving initial DL data through a second DL CC indicated by the DL grant; decoding the initial DL data; transmitting a not-acknowledgment (NACK) signal when decoding of the initial DL data fails; monitoring a DL grant for retransmission of the DL data in the first DL CC; and receiving DL data retransmitted through the second DL CC, wherein the second DL CC is any one of a plurality of DL CCs having a predetermined link relation with the first DL CC, and the DL grant for the initial transmission includes a carrier indication field indicating the second DL CC and resource allocation information for the initially transmitted DL data.
|TEST DEVICE AND TEST METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - It is possible to check the settings of multiplex communication for test or the state of multiplex communication during the test. A test device tests whether a mobile communication terminal, which is a test target, performs a communication operation normally and displays a list of at least the address of the mobile communication terminal and information for identifying a communication partner of the mobile communication terminal as multiplex communication related information when the mobile communication terminal performs multiplex communication on a multiplex communication related display unit
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT AND DETERMINISTIC GROUP ALERTING - Systems and methods are provided for reliable, wireless group alerting in a system having a database, switch, wireless network, and a plurality of intelligent mobile receivers, and preferably employing a modified two-way paging based on ReFLEX™ protocol information service (IS) messages and a novel ALOHA command for multicast acknowledgement from mobile receivers. An encrypted message is broadcast to and received by a selected number of the mobile receivers. The network replies to the sender with detailed information about the individual members in the alert group. Each of the mobile receivers in the group then acknowledges the common message back to the system, decrypts the message, displays it to the user, and allows the user to respond. The system employs centralized management to simplify the roles of the mobile users and administrators, minimizing configuration and operational human errors that would otherwise result in confusion or lost messages.
|Timer Optimization Techniques for Multicast to Unicast Conversion of Internet Protocol Video - Multicast to unicast conversion may be provided. First, a request for a data packet may be received at a conversion device. The conversion device may determine that that the requested data packet has not yet been received using a multicast transmission protocol. Next, the conversion device may wait a time period to receive the data packet using the multicast transmission protocol. When the data packet has not been received within the time period, conversion device may then request the data packet using a unicast transmission protocol.
|METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR TESTING LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) AIR INTERFACE DEVICE USING PER-USER EQUIPMENT (PER-UE) CHANNEL NOISE - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for testing an air interface device using per user equipment (UE) channel noise are disclosed. One method includes, generating uplink signals at a network equipment test device to be transmitted from plural simulated UEs to an air interface device under test. The method further includes generating and applying per-UE channel noise to the signals, where applying per-UE channel noise includes applying different channel noise to at least some of the uplink signals. The method further includes transmitting the uplink signals with the per-UE channel noise to the air interface device under test.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SESSION BASED DATA MONITORING FOR WIRELESS EDGE CONTENT CACHING NETWORKS - Aspects of the disclosure pertain to methods and systems that are configured to monitor data usage at a network edge. In an implementation, a method includes monitoring data usage information associated with a mobile user session between a mobile device and a plurality of edges nodes of a communication network, where the plurality of edge nodes includes at least a beginning edge node and a final edge node. The method also includes storing data usage information from the monitored data usage information, the stored data usage information including data associated with the transfer of cached data stored at the plurality of edge nodes. The method further includes forwarding the stored data access information to a central database of the communication network.
|SERVER APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING USED IN SERVER APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a server apparatus includes a license memory, a license setting module, an information memory, an acquiring module, a determining module and a controller. The license memory selectively stores a license code provided by a license issuing module. The license setting module sets the corresponding function or the corresponding hardware circuit to be usable/unusable based on the license code stored in the license memory. The information memory stores information of at least a part of the license code. The acquiring module acquires the license code corresponding to the function or the hardware circuit to be changed by communication with the license issuing module. The determining module determines whether or not the license code acquired by the acquiring module is valid by comparing the license code with the information stored in the information memory. The controller stores the valid license code in the license memory.
|UNSUPERVISED TRAFFIC ESTIMATION FOR LOW-POWER MEDIA STREAMING - A method and system for processing data streams is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes establishing a plurality of initial sample zones; establishing a plurality of wakeup zones; sampling a plurality of data packets based on the plurality of initial sample zones; estimating the traffic based on the sampling of the plurality of data packets; and modifying the wakeup zones based on the estimated traffic. According to the method and system disclosed herein, the traffic estimation enables a mobile station to optimize wakeup periods.
|Method and System for Remotely Automating Cross-Connnects in Telecom Networks - A method and system for automating cross-connects for a telecommunication system comprising a network of communication lines for connecting subscriber locations to a central office exchange
|METHODS, TRAFFIC SIMULATORS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR VALIDATING LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) CODE BLOCKS AND TRANSPORT BLOCKS - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for validating a long term evolution (LTE) transport data block and code blocks within the data block. The method includes steps occurring at an LTE traffic simulator configured to simulate plural user equipment (UE) devices. The steps include receiving, from an evolved nodeB under test, an LTE transport block including a plurality of code blocks. The steps also include decoding the code blocks and verifying a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code for each of the code blocks. The steps further include while decoding the code blocks and verifying the CRC codes for the code blocks, verifying a CRC code for the transport block.
|EXTENDING EMBMS SESSION IN LTE EMBMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus receives an MBMS service from a first cell in a first MBSFN area while in an RRC idle mode. The apparatus reselects to a second cell through an intra-frequency cell reselection upon moving into coverage of the second cell. The second cell is a non-MBSFN cell or an MBSFN cell in a second MBSFN area different than the first MBSFN area. The apparatus continues to receive the MBMS service directly from the first cell while receiving paging signals from the second cell.
|INDICATING WHETHER DATA WAS SUBJECTED TO INTERFERENCE - An explicit indication is provided regarding whether information was subjected to interference during transmission. For example, a receiver can monitor received packets and determine whether any of data units in a given received packet were subjected to interference during transmission. If so, the receiver can send an indication to the transmitter to inform the transmitter of the interference. This indication enables the transmitter to distinguish between packet loss that occurred as a result of channel fade and packet loss that occurred as a result of interference. Consequently, the transmitter is able to invoke different actions depending on whether the packet loss is due to channel fade or interference.
|MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS, AND CONNECTION METHOD IN THE SYSTEM - A microwave communication system which performs information communication between an indoor unit and outdoor units. A plurality of transmission units in the indoor unit are switchably connected to the outdoor units by means of a cross connect function, where each transmission unit has a two-way branch function. Typically, each of the transmission units manages an IP address of another transmission unit, and detects an adjacent transmission unit based on the IP address.
|PERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION SIGNALING WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer readable medium can be provided for periodic channel state information signaling that employs carrier aggregation. The method can include determining, in an apparatus, channel state information. The channel state information includes channel state information of a plurality of component carriers. The method can also include reporting, by the apparatus, the channel state information including a plurality of reports in an aggregated form.
|System and Method for Reporting Quantized Feedback Information for Adaptive Codebooks - A system and method for reporting quantized feedback information for adaptive codebooks include generating channel state information, encoding all or part of the channel state information to produce a feedback payload and transmitting the feedback payload to a base station from a mobile station. The channel state information comprises a rank indicator, a first matrix indicator, a wideband channel quality indicator, a second matrix indicator and at least one narrowband channel quality indicator. When the rank indicator is greater than 1, the first matrix indicator is reported in a second report. On the other hand, when the rank indicator is equal to 1, the content of the first matrix indicator is split between a second report and a third report.
|NETWORK DEVICE VERIFYING APPARATUS - In a reception verifying mode, a data transmitting section (
|Apparatus and Method for Communication - Apparatus and method for communication are provided. The solution includes executing one or more applications, which generate data traffic with the system; obtaining traffic profiles of the one or more applications and controlling the transmission of information related to the traffic profiles to the communication system.
|REDIRECTOR, RELAY, SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING ROUTE INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR UPDATING ROUTE INFORMATION - A redirector, a relay, a system for configuring route information, and a method for updating route information are disclosed herein. The redirector includes: a route storing module and a route indicating module. The redirector further includes: a monitoring module which is coupled to communicate with the route storing module and configured to monitor change of the route configuration information; and a notifying module which is coupled to communicate with the monitoring module and configured to send a notification to the intermediate node managed by the redirector, where the notification indicates that the route information corresponding to the changed route configuration information is invalid. Through the foregoing solution, after the route configuration information changes, a notification may be sent in time to indicate that the previously subscribed route indication information is invalid, thus better ensuring correct forwarding of the service request message and improving the QoS.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING MULTIPLE VIDEO CONFERENCES - A system and method for monitoring a plurality of video conferences are provided. The method employs at least first and second monitors, a speaker, a microphone, and a plurality of computers. The method includes: (a) joining each of the plurality of video conferences on a different one of the plurality of computers; (b) providing a monitoring environment of all of the plurality of video conferences, including (1) first displaying, simultaneously in a mosaic using at least the first monitor, video feed from the plurality of computers and (2) outputting a combined audio feed of the plurality of computers; (c) interacting with one of the plurality of video conferences, including (1) selecting one of the plurality of computers for connection to at least the microphone and the second monitor, (2) sending an audio feed from the microphone to the selected one of the plurality of computers; and (3) second displaying, on the second monitor, a video feed of the video conference as provided by the selected one of the plurality computers; wherein the method is configured to perform the monitoring and the interacting at the same time, such that all video conferences can be monitored while one of the video conferences is interacted with.
|PROXY MOBILE IP ROUTING - A method and apparatus for routing communications traffic in a Proxy Mobile IP communications network. A Mobile Node is attached to a first Proxy Mobile Agent, and an optimized route is established between the Mobile Node and a Corresponding Node via the first Proxy Mobile Agent. When the Mobile Node subsequently attaches to a second Proxy Mobile Agent, a determination is made that the Mobile Node is no longer attached to the first Proxy Mobile Agent. As a result of the determination a request is sent from the first Proxy Mobile Agent to the Corresponding Node to cancel the route optimization. In one embodiment, packets from the Corresponding Node are bi-cast from the Proxy Mobile Agent to the Home Agent and the Mobile Node. The Proxy Mobile Agent determines that the Mobile Node is no longer attached to if packets are not returned from the Home Agent.
|ENTROPIC BASED ACTIVITY PASSIVE DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM - The present invention relates generally to computer systems in the field of signals intelligence, and more particularly, to entropic activity detection and monitoring computer systems for collecting and analyzing data packets wirelessly transmitted from a wireless transmitter by applying information theoretic metrics (Tsallis entropy).
|Method and Apparatus for Estimating Collision Probability in a Wireless Network - A method for estimating packet collisions within a wireless network, comprising: for each transmit packet an Access Point (AP) of the network records statistics transmission information; based on this statistical information the AP computes: Total number of slot times generated during this transmission, n; Total number of deferrals, m; and Total number of unsuccessful transmissions, Q s; and using a sequence (m,n,Q) of statistics for each access category (AC), the AP computes the probability of collision for unsuccessful packets, p.
|System and Method of Device Based Cached Rules - A method is provided for self-care based customer care for users of devices. A device agent is provided for the device. The device agent is executable on the device and is programmed for gathering information from the device in the form of a device profile and running a diagnosis of the device. The diagnosis process refers to a set of rules stored locally on the device, and aspects of the device profile are reviewed against conditions in these rules. The profile gathering and diagnosis steps are programmed to be triggered and occur on the device.
|Method for Determining a Severity of a Network Incident - The invention relates to a method for determining a severity of a network incident causing a network alarm in a communication network. The method comprises obtaining (
|TESTING OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT - A computer (
|DYNAMIC MAPPING IN A MULTICASTING ENVIRONMENT - Enhancing performance in a multicasting system comprising monitoring filtering costs in a multicasting system as system characteristics change over time, wherein the multicasting system is operating based on a first mapping, between a plurality of data flows and multicasting groups, to disseminate data to users that subscribe to one or more of the data flows; computing a second mapping in response to determining that overhead associated with filtering of unwanted flows at the user level has exceeded a threshold; and transitioning the multicasting system from using the first mapping to using the second mapping, in response to determining that the second mapping is feasible as applicable to one or more constraints associated with the multicasting system.
|DYNAMIC TCP LAYER OPTIMIZATION FOR REAL-TIME FIELD PERFORMANCE - A method and system that mitigates data session degradation over a radio link connection with an end server by allocating resources at a wireless communication device based on real-time radio frequency (RF) channel conditions. A performance tracking and resource allocation (PTRA) logic monitors radio access bearer (RAB) configuration and radio link quality for communication links between the WCD and the end server. The PTRA logic sets a maximum transmission unit (MTU) size parameter to a pre-established size associated with the measured radio link quality. In response to detecting a change in the RAB configuration, the PTRA logic performs a real-time round trip time (RTT) measurement utilizing individual RTTs associated with packet segments transmitted at a lower protocol layer. In addition, the PTRA logic modifies at least one of a transmission control protocol (TCP) receive window (RWIN) and a TCP transmit window (TWIN) using the real-time RTT measurements and RAB configuration.
|SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING OPT IN/OPT OUT STATUS OF MIDDLEWARE RECEPTION REPORTING FOR eMBMS SERVICES - A system and methods for determining whether to participate in reception reporting procedures for an eMBMS service. Multiple applications on a receiver device can consume the same file download or streaming eMBMS service, and can have conflicting opt in/opt out settings for reporting in middleware. Algorithms are provided that take into account the different opt statuses of applications, and allow middleware components to determine whether to log reception metrics for a service and/or whether a reception report should be uploaded after a service session of the service.
|Method and Apparatus for Optimizing Home Network Interface Selection In Home Networking Applications - Embodiments of the invention generally provide a method and apparatus for optimizing home networking interface selection in home networking applications. One embodiment of a method for selecting, at a set top box in a network, an active home networking interface from among a plurality of home networking interfaces includes activating the best performing home networking interface and deactivating the remainder of the home networking interfaces.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK MONITORING AND TESTING USING INTELLIGENT SEQUENCING - Embodiments are directed to systems and methods for network monitoring and testing using intelligent sequencing of data events so as to generalize the sequencing of events from multiple disparate sources of network events with multiple disparate types of events.
|APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR UPLINK POWER CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Aspects of the disclosure provide techniques for improving uplink transmit power control at a user equipment (UE). When the UE is communicating with multiple cells using Multi-flow High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (MF-HSDPA), the UE may control its uplink power based on an improved MF-HSDPA uplink power control algorithm, which is different from an or-of-downs (OOD) transmit power control. In handover, a UE may determine its transmit power to be less than a transmit power requested by a high-speed cell and more than an OOD transmit power.
|System and Method for Parameter Estimation with Interference Suppression in a Telecommunications Network - A system, method and node of implementing interference suppression for estimation of a signal parameter of a base station transmission at a User Equipment (UE) in a telecommunications network with irregular reference signal patterns assigned to base stations. A list of base stations for which a parameter of the transmitted signal is to be estimated and a list of OFDM symbols and subcarriers to avoid for each base station are compiled. The compiled list is sent to the UE, which performs measurements for each base station using the received measurement information and simple interference avoidance is performed utilizing OFDM symbols and subcarriers not on the list of OFDM symbols and subcarriers to avoid. The measurements are then sent to the network.
|System and Method for Evaluating Performance of Concurrent Mobile Services of Mobile Devices - A system method and device for evaluating the Quality of Service (QoS) performance of mobile telephone devices in the concurrent performance of different services through a mobile telephone network is provided. In one embodiment, the method comprises establishing a first logical communication channel via the mobile telephone network, communicating first information over the first logical communication channel, establishing a second logical communication channel over a communication network, concurrently with said communicating first information, communicating second information over the second logical communication channel, and determining a plurality of service quality metrics for the first and second information communicated over the first and second logical communication channel.
|Method of Handling Measurement Pattern for TDD System and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a measurement pattern for a communication device comprises receiving a subframe pattern from a network; receiving an uplink/downlink (UL/DL) configuration from the network; and performing a communication operation in a subframe according to the subframe pattern and the UL/DL configuration; wherein the subframe pattern is applied to a plurality of UL/DL configurations, and the UL/DL configuration is one of the plurality of UL/DL configurations.
|APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CAPTURING DATA PACKETS FROM A NETWORK - In one embodiment, data packets are captured from a network using a physical, network-connectable data capture probe. As the data packets are captured, the data packets are time-stamped with time-of-capture time-stamps. The time-stamped data packets are then stored; and in parallel, the time-stamped data packets are forwarded to at least one consumer in real-time.
|CONFIGURING NETWORK DEVICES - Improved systems and methods for configuring network devices are provided. Aspects of the disclosure relate to novel QoS configuration parameters and methods for using QoS configuration parameters to reduce impacts caused by security breach within a network. In one embodiment, a QoS configuration parameter is selected from a plurality of configuration parameters on a central database based upon unique identifying information of a network device and a status signal. In one embodiment, each configuration parameter comprises at least a first parameter for configuring a communication speed of the network device and a second parameter configurable to alter the ability of the network device to communicate with another device in the network. Further aspects of the disclosure relate to providing improved services to an end user. In one embodiment, services may be customized to an end user and allow increased flexibility for both the service provider and the end user.
|CHANNEL GREY LISTING - A wireless communication system grey-lists those channels that interfere with channels used by a second wireless communication system. The wireless communication system reduces the rate at which the grey-listed channels are utilized in the channel-hopping pattern, but does not completely eliminate use of the grey-listed channels.
|Method and apparatus for network based content enhancement - A system and method of enhancing content of at least one message sent by a source device to at least one destination device over at least one network. The system is operative to receive a message over a network, in which the message has content associated therewith. The system analyzes the content of the received message, and selects additional information based upon the content of the received message. The system inserts the selected information into the message, and then transmits, over the network, the message and the selected information to a destination device. The selected information can include at least one advertisement.
|LIVE MONITORING OF CALL SESSIONS OVER AN IP TELEPHONY NETWORK - Systems and methods for monitoring call sessions over an IP telephony network are disclosed. An illustrative system for monitoring call sessions over an IP telephony network includes a number of user telephone stations, a communications manager configured to direct call session data streams to the user telephone stations, and an application configured to receive the call session data streams and direct those streams to one or more monitoring stations for monitoring. The call session data streams can be sent directly to the monitoring stations or can be sent to the monitoring stations via a monitoring server that forwards the call session data streams to a record service or record server.
|HSUPA CARRIER ACTIVATION NOTIFICATION - A radio access network (
|Converter/Multiplexer for Serial Bus - This disclosure relates to a converter/multiplexer and associated method of use therefor or converting and multiplexing parallel inputs, a modem, a GPS, or even modem information into a single multimaster broadcast serial bus standard for connecting electronic control units, and more specifically, to a multiplexer for transforming analog, digital, frequency, GPS, or modem inputs into a CAN bus data transmittal over LAN and/or PAN and interrelation with a similarly equipped receiving module. Further, the converter/multiplexer is used alone or in a group as part of a larger system for multiplexing and demultiplexing signals for serial bus processing and also for guidance when the converters are cabled by operators using stored configurations.
|DATA FLOW PATH DETERMINATION - A method of determining a data flow path within a computing network includes, with the processor executing a data flow path determination module, determining a number of data flow paths between a first node and a second node within the computing network, and with a with the processor executing a graphical user interface (GUI) module, displaying the data flow paths to a user.
|METHOD FOR ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL (E-DCH) TRANSMISSION OVERLAP DETECTION FOR COMPRESSED MODE GAP SLOTS - A method and apparatus for detecting an overlap of an E-DCH transmission or retransmission in TTIs that overlap with an assigned uplink compressed mode gap is disclosed. More specifically, detecting an overlap of an E-DCH transmission or retransmission in TTIs that overlap with an uplink compressed mode gap assigned by a Node B when a WTRU is configured with a 2 ms TTI is disclosed. After detecting the overlap of the E-DCH transmission or retransmission and the uplink compressed mode gap, the E-DCH transmission or retransmission is paused.
|Voice Call Handover - Transitioning voice clients among network resources. A network monitor using IEEE 802.11e QBSS Load IE elements monitors the load on one or more wireless access points. When the load on an access point, as reported in the QBSS Load Element IE exceeds a predetermined threshold, the network monitor sends a message to that AP which causes the AP to send BSS Transition Management Request frames to all connected voice clients which are currently idle. The information passed to the AP and then to the client may include one or more neighboring APs with capacity.
|METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DIRECTION DETERMINATION FOR BLUETOOTH.TM. INQUIRY PROCESS - Method, apparatus, and computer program product example embodiments provide Bluetooth™ direction finding information exchange without establishment of a formal communication connection. According to an example embodiment of the invention, a method comprises scanning, by an apparatus, for wireless signals, the wireless signals comprising one or more inquiry packets; providing information usable for estimating at least a relative direction of the apparatus in response to receiving one or more inquiry packets from a remote device; and transmitting one or more response packets including an information packet containing the information usable for estimating the at least relative direction of the apparatus. The one or more response packets may include a Bluetooth™ extended inquiry response packet.
|Method of collection of quality statistics and corresponding method of management of collection of quality statistics - The invention relates to the field of telecommunication and more particularly, to the acquisition of a statistics related to quality related to data reception, for instance quality of service and/or quality of user experience of digital audio and/or video services. In particular, the objective of the present invention is to improve the collection of quality statistics.
|Transmission of the PDP Context Activation Rejection Cause Codes to the UICC - A method and system for introducing support for SM rejections in a USAT network rejection event including an APN. The method and system provide the UICC with all PDP Context activation rejection cause codes received by the ME and their respective APNs. Such a method and system allows the UICC to monitor all the rejections to intelligently select an appropriate APN to activate using its Open channel command.
|Automatic Network Topology Detection and Modeling - A method and system for identifying the topology of a network is disclosed. One or more monitoring probes capture data packets from network interfaces. Network elements, such as physical ports, physical links, network nodes, logical links, and SCTP associations, are identified from the captured data packets. A data model is created for storing the network elements, including the physical ports, physical links, network nodes, logical links, and SCTP associations. The data model also stores associations between the network elements. The monitoring probes pass network element data to a monitoring server. A topology agent in each monitoring probe identifies duplicates of previously detected network elements within the probe. A topology agent in the monitoring system server identifies duplicates of previously detected network elements within the monitoring system server.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING CHANNEL CONFIGURATIONS IN A COMMUNICATIONS ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes monitoring a plurality of channels provisioned for an endpoint. The method also includes reacting to an alert message by adjusting one of the channels for the endpoint. The adjustment is a selected one of increasing a volume associated with the channel receiving the alert message, or changing a spatial direction from which the alert message and an associated media stream are conveyed to the endpoint. In other embodiments, the adjustment provisions the alert message from a left ear to a right ear of an end user of the endpoint. In still other embodiments, the adjustment includes determining which is a primary channel of the channels and provisioning the alert message to the primary channel of the endpoint. The media stream associated with the alert message is also moved to a same spatial direction along with the alert message.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS MULTI-BAND NETWORKS ASSOCIATION AND MAINTENANCE - A system and method for wireless communication over multi-rate channels are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes a first multi-band wireless station that is capable of using a first frequency band and a second frequency band for wireless communication; and a second multi-band wireless station that is capable of using the first frequency band and the second frequency band for wireless communication. One or more of the first and second stations is configured to monitor a status of the second frequency band. The status includes the availability of the second frequency band for communication between the first and second stations. The first and second stations can share the monitored status with each other via the first frequency band.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM TO DETECT PACKETS OF DIFFERENT FORMATS IN A RECEIVER - A method and system of communicating packets and detecting packets are disclosed. In a first aspect, the method and system comprise enabling the detection of a very high throughput (VHT) signal field. The VHT signal field is distinguishable from other signal fields, wherein the VHT signal field allows for a backward compatibility with other devices. In a second aspect, the method and system comprise initializing the device to be in receive mode and receiving at least one signal field symbol and detecting the presence of additional signal field symbols. The method and system further include distinguishing a very high throughput (VHT) signal field from other signal field symbols and decoding the VHT signal field parameters uniquely describing the VHT packet format.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM TO DETECT PACKETS OF DIFFERENT FORMATS IN A RECEIVER - A method and system of communicating packets and detecting packets are disclosed. In a first aspect, the method and system comprise enabling the detection of a very high throughput (VHT) signal field. The VHT signal field is distinguishable from other signal fields, wherein the VHT signal field allows for a backward compatibility with other devices. In a second aspect, the method and system comprise initializing the device to be in receive mode and receiving at least one signal field symbol and detecting the presence of additional signal field symbols. The method and system further include distinguishing a very high throughput (VHT) signal field from other signal field symbols and decoding the VHT signal field parameters uniquely describing the VHT packet format.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDICATING PERFORMANCE INFORMATION TO A USER TO ENHANCE COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method for indicating performance information. Performance information is measured for a connection to a communications device. One or more trends and one or more averages associated with the performance information is determined. The one or more trends and the one or more averages is displayed to a user in response to the determination. Suggestions for the user are generated to enhance the connection to the communications device.
|List-Based Alerting in Traffic Monitoring - A technique for identifying deviations in patterns of data traffic between host devices communicating over a network involves establishing a baseline traffic distribution by categorizing data traffic during a learning period. The baseline traffic distribution includes a list of categories and a metric value and a measure of variability of the metric value for each category in the list. An observed traffic distribution is generated by categorizing data traffic during an observation period. The observed traffic distribution includes a list of categories and a metric value associated with each category in the list. An alarm is generated in response to at least one of the metric values of the categories of the observed traffic distribution deviating significantly from the corresponding metric value in the baseline traffic distribution based on a pair-wise comparison of the observed metric values with respective thresholds established for corresponding categories of the baseline traffic distribution.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for transmitting channel state information in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The UE apparatus for transmitting channel state information includes a channel state measurement module for measuring a channel state based on a level of interference received from a neighbor cell, a channel state information generation module for generating channel state information for a plurality of resource regions or for periodic and aperiodic channel state information reporting modes using the measured channel state and offsets received from a serving BS, the offsets being set for the plurality of resource regions or the periodic and aperiodic channel state information reporting modes, and a transmission module for transmitting the generated channel state information to the serving BS.
|DETECTION OF AN UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and controller for detecting an unauthorized access point in a wireless communication network includes a first step of generating (
|System and Method for Managing State Transitions in a Wireless Communications Network - A system and method is disclosed for individually controlling User Equipment (UE) connections, dynamically and automatically, based on the applications and/or services that the connections carry. An eNodeB or other radio base station (RBS) monitors established connections between the UE and the RBS to detect applications running within those connections. Based on the stateful information of applications, the present invention proactively controls the state transitions of individual UEs between the CONNECTED and IDLE states thereby increasing radio link capacity and reducing control plane loading.
|Information detection method and apparatus for high speed downlink shared control channel - An information detection method and apparatus for a High Speed Downlink Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) are provided by the present disclosure, implementing the detection of HS-SCCH part1 with low false alarm probability and low false dismissal probability under the arbitrary combination of User Identifiers (UEID). The method is that: rate de-matching the front detection signal of each HS-SCCH part1 in the terminal HS-SCCH monitor set, obtaining the corresponding rate de-matched information; removing the user mask for the rate de-matched information of each HS-SCCH monitor channel; Viterbi decoding each rate de-matched information of which the user mask is removed, obtaining Viterbi-decoding 0 state accumulated metric of each HS-SCCH in HS-SCCH monitor set, and summing the absolute value of the soft information of each HS-SCCH monitor channel respectively, with the soft information being obtained by removing the user mask; according to the Viterbi 0 state accumulated metric of each HS-SCCH and the sum of absolute values of the corresponding soft information, is obtaining determination variables of each HS-SCCH; selecting the maximum from the determination variables of HS-SCCH, comparing the maximum with the preset threshold, and determining whether the HS-SCCH of this user is detected.
|Signaling Describing the Operation of a Link Bundle - In one embodiment, a first device communicates with a second device, including sending and receiving one or more link bundle control packets and/or link control packets over a link bundle. The link bundle includes a plurality of links with each link being coupled between the first device and the second device for communicating information. These link bundle control packets are directed at the operation of the link bundle in its entirety; while the link control packets which are directed to the operation of a corresponding single particular link. The first device communicates with the second device, including operating the link bundle according to these one or more link bundle control packets and/or link control packets.
|Method and apparatus of RTP control protocol (RTCP) processing in real-time transport protocol (RTP) intermediate systems - Media processing of real-time protocol (RTP) packets used in Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and other time sensitive applications makes efficient use of network resources, e.g., by dropping or changing the size of certain packets, but hinders measuring and reporting end-to-end reception quality. Because media processing changes RTP packets between a sender and receiver, causing a difference between what is sent and received, end-to-end reception quality cannot be measured validly without accounting for these changes. Accordingly, a method and corresponding apparatus are provided to track changes to RTP packets of an RTP session caused by media processing of the RTP packets, modify RTP packet information of the RTP packets based on the tracked changes, correct RTP control protocol (RTCP) packets corresponding to the RTP session based on the tracked changes, the corrected RTCP packets being a measure of the end-to-end reception quality of the RTP session, and report the end-to-end reception quality of the RTP session by forwarding the corrected RTCP packets.
|COGNITIVE MULTI-USER OFDMA - A computing device operating according to a frequency division multiplexed protocol in which communication occurs over a signal formed from a plurality of sub-channels selected from anywhere in a frequency spectrum. A computing device may select sub-channels cognitively by using information about sub-channels previously deemed suitable or unsuitable by that computing device or other computing devices. A described technique for determining sub-channel suitability includes analyzing radio frequency energy in the sub-channel to detect signals generated by another computing device or high noise levels. Information may also be used to cognitively select sub-channels to be analyzed, such as by first selecting for analysis previously-used sub-channels.
|Method and Apparatus for Compensating Signal Timing Measurements for Differences in Signal Frequencies
|System and method for tree assessment - Tree assessment systems and methods are disclosed. An example of a method includes building a system tree in computer-readable medium, the system tree having a plurality of nodes, each node in the system tree representing a characteristic of a component of a system under consideration. The method also includes comparing nodes of the system tree stored in computer-readable medium, with nodes in other trees to identify at least one similar node for identifying similar trees. The method also includes extracting extracting a most similar tree from the similar trees based on the at least one similar node. The method also includes assigning characteristics from the most similar tree to the system tree.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIMULATING THE PHYSICAL LEVEL OF A RADIO NETWORK - A method of simulating transmission of data from a transmitter to a receiver in a radio communications network, the method including calculating an average amount of data to be transmitted to the receiver in a considered transmission time interval based on a relationship between an interferential condition assumed to be experienced at the receiver and a data transmission throughput, the relationship being determined by a link-level simulation of the link between the transmitter and the receiver.
|METHODS, SYSTEMS AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR MOBILE-COMMUNICATION-DEVICE-INITIATED NETWORK MONITORING SERVICES - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for mobile communication device-initiated network monitoring services are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method for monitoring communications in a mobile networking environment by a core network probe-based monitoring system includes detecting, by an agent residing on a mobile communication device, a quality of service or customer experience triggering event; responding to the event by generating a message which includes information about that particular subscriber or device; and, transmitting that message to the network monitoring system to automatically trigger the monitoring system to monitor communications involving that mobile communication device.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM USING WIRELESS PACKET DATA NETWORKS ARCHITECTURE FOR REMOTE PROCESS CONTROL AND PROCESS MONITORING APPLICATIONS - A system for error avoidance and automatic recovery is combined with the accurate and reliable transmission system. The present invention provides a multi-variable control system using remote control with a wireless communication system. A plurality of closed loop control systems are connected through the wireless communication system. A master controller monitors the closing of each of the loops in the system and stores information for the status of the control loops in a control table at a control center. When a state variable is transmitted to the control center, a master controller notes that the initial value of the closed loop control system has been set. When the control center sends a control action to equipment or a process this closes the loop, the master controller notes that the closed loop control system has been closed for a particular time. If the closed loop control system does not get a loop closed, the control center immediately detects it. Thereafter, an alternative control action can be performed by the system.
|WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION TESTING - A testing sequence is disclosed for testing a wireless media synchronization connection between a computing device and a mobile device. A first test message comprising a first test. ID may be sent from a computing device to a mobile device over a test communication channel. The computing device may then receive from the mobile device one or more packets containing a second test ID and an indication of a wireless synchronization protocol over a wireless synchronization channel. If a connection is established with the mobile device using the wireless synchronization protocol, a second test message may be sent to the mobile device using the wireless synchronization protocol, and the mobile device may be monitored by the computing device over the test communication channel for reception of the second test message.
|ADAPTIVE ALLOCATION FOR VARIABLE BANDWIDTH MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION - Data is distributed among the channels of an asynchronous data subscriber loop (ADSL) communications system in accordance with an adaptive algorithm which from time to time measures the signal to noise ratio of the various channels and finds a margin for each channel dependent on achievement (where possible) of a given bit error rate and a desired data transmission rate. The margin distribution is achieved by augmenting the constellation signal to noise ratio to enhance computational efficiency and allow redetermination of bit allocation tables during transmission as necessary. Pairs of bit allocation tables are maintained at the transmitter and receiver and one table of each pair at the transmitter and receiver is updated while the other pair is in use for controlling communication.
|Method of Blind Decoding of Control Channel for a wireless communication system - A method of blind decoding of a control channel for a wireless communication system comprising a network and a mobile device is disclosed. The network selects at least one of a plurality of control channels of at least one logical domain of control channel element, for transmitting control information to the mobile device, wherein the plurality of control channels of each logical domain are uniformly distributed over the logical domain. On the other side, the mobile device monitors all of the control channel candidates of each of the at least one logical domain of control channel element, for obtaining the control information which is transmitted from the network and configured to the mobile device, wherein all of the control channel candidates of each logical domain are uniformly distributed over the logical domain.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING CONTROL CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure provides a method for monitoring a control channel in a wireless access system, including setting the number of maximum blind decoding times for each user equipment (UE)-specific search space and a common search space to which the control channel is transmitted; monitoring a plurality of candidate control channels in each of the search spaces, based on the number of maximum blind decoding times, set in the respective search spaces; and receiving downlink control information through a control channel which has succeeded in the blinding decoding among the plurality of candidate control channels, wherein the common search space is allocated to at least one carrier group that includes at least one component carrier.
|DIRECTOR DEVICE ARRANGEMENT WITH VISUAL DISPLAY ARRANGEMENT AND METHODS THEREOF - An apparatus for enabling a plurality of monitoring functions to be performed on network data is provided. The apparatus includes a power module and a processor module. The apparatus also includes a set of network ports that includes a set of input network ports for receiving the data traffic and a set of output network ports for outputting the data traffic from the apparatus. The apparatus further includes a switchboard arrangement that includes at least two chips that are configured to interact with one another to perform the plurality of monitoring functions on the data traffic received by the switchboard arrangement. The apparatus yet also includes logic module for analyzing the data traffic and for displaying the statistical data pertaining to the data traffic. The apparatus yet further includes a visual display arrangement that is configured for displaying the statistical data.
|Communication Method, System and Network Nodes in a Low Power Communication Network - A method for communicating in a low power communication network, a corresponding low power communication network system and a network node, where the method enables low power consumption by the data transmission node in the low power communication network while ensuring the low power communication network communicates efficiently. The network comprises a first network node and a second network node, where the first network node transmits a beacon frame that is used to indicate the time for data transmission by the first network node, and the second network node detects the beacon frame to synchronize its data transmission with the first network node.
|REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES FOR CWMP AND METHODS FOR IMPROVING PERFORMANCE OF REMOTE MANAGEMENT THEREOF - A remote management system for Customer premises equipment WAN Management Protocol (CWMP) is provided. The remote management system includes at least one CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) and one server coupled to the CPE via a network. The CPE transmits a request to the server via the network. The server processes the request from the CPE according to a processing order, wherein the server provides a table which contains forecasted processing times for commands of a plurality of data models compatible with the CWMP. Upon receiving the request, the server generates a command configuration document according to the request, forecasts and obtains a first processing time corresponding to the command configuration document, and then dynamically adjusts and arranges the processing order for processing the request in the server according to the first processing time and a maximum waiting time corresponding to the request.
|Locating Signatures in Packets - A system and method for locating signatures in packets is disclosed. The method may include receiving a packet over the network and searching the packet for a signature at locations specified in a location cache. When the signature is found at a stored location specified in the location cache, pertinent data located after the signature is obtained and network testing processing is performed. When the signature is not found at any stored location specified in the location cache, the packet is searched for the signature. When the signature is found, the location at which the signature is found is added to the location cache. Pertinent data located after the signature is obtained and network testing processing is performed. The method may be performed by a network testing system and by a computing device having a virtual machine.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONSERVING POWER IN LINK AGGREGATION GROUPS - A system and method of reducing power consumption in a network switching unit includes detecting whether conditions are suitable for reducing power consumption in a first network switching unit. The first network switching unit includes a link aggregation group (LAG) and a plurality of communication ports, each communication port configured to couple the first network switching unit to a second network switching unit using a corresponding network link selected from a plurality of network links, and wherein the plurality of network links are assigned to the LAG. The system and method further includes requesting network link deactivation by sending a link deactivation request to the second network switching unit, determining whether the link deactivation request is approved, determining a first network link selected from the plurality of network links to deactivate, deactivating the first network link from use by the LAG, and reducing power supplied to the first network link.
|LIMITED FEEDBACK METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TWO-WAY WIRELESS RELAYING CHANNELS WITH PHYSICAL NETWORK CODING - A limited feedback method and apparatus for two-way relay channels with physical network coding are disclosed. An embodiment of the invention provides a method of providing parameters as feedback to two terminals according to channel conditions by a relay for two-way communication in a two-way relaying system using PNC (physical network coding). This method includes: (a) quantizing phase difference information of two-way channels of the two terminals in consideration of whether or not a ratio of a minimum distance between constellation points is periodic according to modulation level; and (b) transmitting feedback information, which contains at least one of the phase difference information and the power control information of the two terminals, as a limited number of bits to the two terminals. Here, the number of bits for the phase difference information or the number of bits for the power control information is determined according to the modulation level.
|DEVICE AND METHOD FOR GENERATING STATISTICAL INFORMATION FOR VOIP TRAFFIC ANALYSIS AND ABNORMAL VOIP DETECTION - A statistical information generator for VoIP traffic analysis is provided, which comprises a packet collection module collecting packets from a network; and a statistical information generation module analyzing information of a call setup packet or a media packet among the packets collected by the packet collection module, and generating statistical information of the network; wherein if the packet collected by the packet collection module is the call setup packet, the statistical information generation module generates the statistical information of the network using at least one of transmitter identification information, receiver identification information, and call identification information among information of the call setup packet as a key value, while if the packet collected by the packet collection module is the media packet, the statistical information generation module generates the statistical information of the network using media session identification information among information of the media packet as a key value.
|Communication Terminal Apparatus, Communication Control Apparatus, Communication System, and Communication Method - To perform scheduling for improving throughput, while suppressing control information amounts notified from communication terminal apparatuses. A communication terminal apparatus (
|System and Method for Automatic Discovery of Topology in an LTE/SAE Network - A system, method and computer program product are disclosed for monitoring a telecommunications network that comprises a plurality of Mobility Management Entity (MME) nodes and a plurality of evolved UTRAN NodeB (eNodeB) nodes coupled by S1-MME interfaces. A Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) association identifier is assigned to an SCTP association between interconnected MME and eNodeB nodes. Specific S1-MME messages allow discovering the MME nodes and the eNodeB nodes with their network identifiers, identifying the connections between them and populating proper tables for this topology information.
|METHOD OF DETERMINING CONFIGURATION ERRORS IN NETWORKS - Configuration errors on interconnected network infrastructure devices are detected in a network where each network infrastructure device supplies information about its own configuration at its own network interface and sends this information to a neighboring network infrastructure device via a discovery protocol. Furthermore each network infrastructure device removes from the network the configuration data received at its interfaces in order to prevent this data from being passed on to other network infrastructure devices, and the received configuration data of the neighboring network infrastructure devices is stored as a data structure on one of the network infrastructure devices in a storage unit. The information about the neighboring network infrastructure devices is made available by the storage device of the first network infrastructure device and used to detect error configurations between the respective devices by comparison with the data deposited in the storage unit.
|MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, SUCH AS A DEPLOYABLE SELF-CONTAINED PORTABLE SYSTEM - Systems and methods for establishing IT services in edge environments are described. In some examples, the system comprises a transportable housing capable of being carried by personnel, a plurality of commercial off-the-shelf components contained in the housing and coupled together and configured to provide the broadband communications network, a software management system operatively coupled to the plurality of components, a network connection subsystem defined by at least a first portion of the plurality of components and configured to establish access to the broadband communications network, and a connection subsystem defined by at least a second portion of the plurality of components and that provides a user with a connection to the broadband communications network via the network connection subsystem
|WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PERFORMANCE UPDATES USING AUTOMATED DATABASE MANAGEMENT - A disclosed method of managing a wireless communication database that is used to control at least a selected portion of a wireless communication system includes determining when a service measurement indicates a desired change in the wireless communication system performance. Any new parameters for implementing the desired change are automatically determined. Any corresponding changes to the database are then automatically made.
|Apparatus and Method in a Telecommunications Network - An entity in a telecommunications network, for example a user equipment, determines a threshold value relating to a channel switching parameter that is being used by the telecommunications network to trigger a channel switching operation, and uses this threshold value and monitored traffic information to prevent a channel change from occurring, i.e. to maintain channel occupancy. A network node is adapted to remove additional traffic that has been generated by an entity in the telecommunications network to maintain channel occupancy.
|ACCESS TERMINAL CAPABILITY UPDATE - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate updating an access terminal's capability information in a wireless access node. Upon detecting a change in its capabilities, the access terminal transmits a message to the access node indicating the change. The message triggers the access node to determine the capability change associated with the access terminal, and to update its records to indicate the new capability information.
|METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR CARRYING OUT MULTIMEDIA SERVICE IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, an apparatus, and a system for carrying out a multimedia service in a WLAN. The method includes: receiving a multicast data stream sent by a data server; and monitoring in real time a receiving rate of a terminal connected to an access point, if the receiving rate is higher than or equal to a multicast sending rate at which the access point sends multicast data, sending, in a multicast mode, the multicast data stream sent by the data server to the terminal, and if the receiving rate is lower than the multicast sending rate, converting the multicast data stream sent by the data server into a unicast data stream and sending the unicast data stream to the terminal. In the solution, the mode of sending multimedia data stream by the access point is determined according to the receiving rate of the terminal, which improves the transmission quality of the multimedia data stream and enhances the user experience.
|METHOD FOR ALLOCATING CONTROL CHANNEL AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method for allowing a terminal to receive a PDCCH in a wireless communication system using multiple carriers and a device therefore, and the method comprises the steps of: receiving a plurality of search spaces through a control region on a subframe, wherein each search space includes a plurality of PDCCH candidate sets, and each search space corresponds to each carrier; and monitoring PDCCH candidates for the PDCCH, wherein the intervals between the respective search spaces within said control region are determined by considering the ratios between the number of scheduled carriers and the number of CCEs within the control region.
|WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA AND METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication terminal transmitting/receiving data with a folder closed and a method thereof are disclosed. The wireless communication terminal includes: a wireless transceiver for transmitting and receiving data through a wireless communication network; a storage for storing the transmitted data and the received data; a detector for detecting a state of the folder of the wireless communication terminal in order to determine whether the folder is opened or closed; an outputting unit for indicating a result of the data transmission/reception; and a controller for analyzing the transmitted/received data to detect the last packet of the data, and continuing to perform the data transmission/reception without regard to the detected state of the folder until the last packet of the data has been detected.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SPATIALLY CONSISTENT SAMPLING OF FLOW RECORDS AT CONSTRAINED, CONTENT-DEPENDENT RATES - Disclosed herein are systems, computer-implemented methods, and computer-readable media for sampling network traffic. The method includes receiving a desired quantity of flow record to sample, receiving a plurality of network flow record each summarizing a network flow of packets, calculating a hash for each flow record of based on one or more invariant part of a respective flow, generating a quasi-random number from the calculated hash for each respective flow record, generating a priority from the calculated hash for each respective flow record, and sampling exactly the desired quantity of flow records, selecting flow records having a highest priority first. In one aspect, the method further partitions the plurality of flow records into groups based on flow origin and destination, generates an individual priority for each partitioned group, and separately samples exactly the desired quantity of flow records from each partitioned group, selecting flows having a highest individual priority first.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING NETWORK MONITORING AND/OR AUTOMATING DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS BASED ON MONITORING RESULTS - Methods and apparatus are described that enable a deployment of a system of wireless nodes, e.g., femtocells, which can self-configure themselves into a balanced and optimized wireless network. In various embodiments, access points switch between a network monitoring mode in which network monitoring is performed and a communications mode in which the access point serves one or more wireless terminals and communicates traffic data to/from the wireless terminals. Traffic data transmission to wireless terminals are not supported in network monitoring mode. Based on information gathered from one or more access nodes while they operating in network monitoring mode of operation, access point configuration information is generated and one or more access points are automatically configured.
|METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION THROUGH PDCCH - A method for efficiently transmitting and receiving control information through a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) is provided. When a User Equipment (UE) receives control information through a PDCCH, the received control information is set to be decoded in units of search spaces. Here, the UE monitors a UE-specific search space, among the search spaces. The UE-specific search space is given based on a modulus operation using the variable of Yk for the subframe k and a variable C for the subframe k, wherein Yk is defined by: Yk=(A*Yk−1+B) mod D, the variable C is determined based on the number of CCEs (NCCE) divided by the aggregation level (L), and A, B and D are predetermined constant values predetermined regardless of the aggregation levels (L).
|RADIO ACCESS NETWORK TECHNOLOGY OPTIMIZATION BASED ON APPLICATION TYPE - A mobile device may monitor availability of access networks that provide connectivity for the mobile device. The mobile device may also store preference information, on a per-application basis, relating to preferences for using the access networks by applications executed by the mobile device. The mobile device may additionally select, in response to a request from an application to connect to the network, one of the access networks, based on the preference information for the application; and provide a communication channel for the application using the selected access network.
|System, Method and Computer Program for In-Place, Lightweight Ack Promotion in Network Environment - A method for in-place, lightweight Ack packet promotion is provided. The method includes receiving a new Ack packet via a network; searching through a transmit queue for an old Ack packet that corresponds to the new Ack packet; and replacing the data in a number field, a checksum field, a window size field, and a timestamp options field of the old Ack packet with data in a number field, a checksum field, a window size field, and a timestamp options field of the new Ack packet.
|Location Functionality in an Interworking WLAN System - The present invention relates to system nodes/entities and methods for enabling determination of the location of an attached User Equipment in a tunneled IP network. The User Equipment location can be determined by means of procedures maintained in a Location Function (LF). An application function can retrieve the User Equipment location by querying the Location Function by using the second source address as a key.
|Method and System for Realizing Buffer Status Reporting
|METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REPORT LINK QUALITY MEASUREMENTS FOR DOWNLINK DUAL CARRIER OPERATION - Methods and apparatus to report link quality measurements for downlink dual carrier operation are disclosed. Example methods and apparatus disclosed herein implement one or more example techniques for reporting link quality measurements involving, for example, modifying measurement reporting messages to increase the number and/or types of link quality measurements that can be reported, permitting mobile stations, when appropriate, to use different reporting messages capable of supporting more link quality measurements, and/or prioritizing certain link quality measurements to be reported when the reporting messages do not contain sufficient space to report all requested and/or specified link quality measurements.
|WIRELESS LAN DEVICE AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless LAN device for wirelessly communicating using a specific frequency channel shared by a radar and a wireless LAN system. The wireless LAN device includes a plurality of antennas; a wireless communication unit including a plurality of transceiver circuits respectively provided for each of the plurality of antennas; and a controller that controls the wireless communication unit. The wireless communication unit wirelessly communicates in accordance with a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) scheme by the plurality of transceiver circuits, and the controller controls the wireless communication unit to execute radar wave monitoring on a frequency channel different from a frequency channel in use for wireless communication using one of the plurality of transceiver circuits when the frequency channel in use for the wireless communication is the specific frequency channel.
|STAND ALONE WIMAX SYSTEM AND METHOD - A WiMAX based system having a base station which communicates to a plurality of consumer premises equipment (CPE) is disclosed. The base station obtains and stores information corresponding to the MAC addresses of each CPE. Messages from one CPE can be sent to the base station and then sent to another CPE using the MAC address stored in the base station. Each CPE may originate an uplink multicast message for transmission to more than one CPE. When the base station receives the uplink multicast message, it broadcasts the multicast message to all of the CPEs identified in the multicast message including the originating CPE. When the originating CPE recognizes the multicast message as a message it originated, the originating CPE drops the multicast message. The CPEs may be grouped into virtual local area networks (VLANs) using group identifiers which permit multicast messages to be transmitted to specific groups of CPEs.
|PREVENTION OF CALL SPOOFING IN A VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) NETWORK - Call spoofing in a Voice over Internet Protocol (IP) system may be detected and/or prevented. A device may receive a call request to initiate a VoIP call. The device may analyze marker information in the call request to determine whether the call request is valid. The device may also analyze the call request, based on call pattern information of a quantity of other calls, to determine whether the call request is suspicious; and complete the call based on the determination of whether the call request is valid and the determination of whether the call request is suspicious.
|COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR DETECTING COLLISION IN OPERATING FREQUENCY BAND AND ANOTHER FREQUENCY BAND, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A communication device for detecting a collision in an operating frequency band and another frequency band, and a communication method thereof. The communication method includes transmitting or receiving a packet using an operating frequency band. The communication method further includes detecting whether another communication device transmits another packet using another frequency band different from the operating frequency band while the transmitting or the receiving of the packet using the operating frequency band. The communication method further includes ceasing the transmitting or the receiving of the packet using the operating frequency band based on a result of the detection.
|DATA MANAGER FOR MANAGING STATION DATA OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES ON A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The data manager manages in a station data memory information on connecting communication devices including various numbers and signal processing conditions in correspondence with state information on the state of the connecting communication devices with the information on the communication devices classified into managing groups to update the state information associated with the information on the communication devices on a managing group-by-group basis.
|Method And Apparatus For Dynamic Spectrum Access - Methods and apparatus are provided for the efficient use of cognitive radios in the performance of dynamic spectrum access. This includes spectrum sensing algorithms, adaptive optimized sensing of parameters based on changing radio environments, and identifying vacant channels. Protocols for switching communication links to different channels, and synchronizing communicating nodes in order to maintain reliable connectively while maximizing spectrum usage are also provided.
|AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF A REMOTE TEST HEAD OF A COMBINED IP/TELEPHONY/CABLE NETWORK - In a telecommunications network that includes: a Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer (DSLAM) (
|SYSTEM FOR ECO-FRIENDLY MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTED DEVICES - A system and method for a connected wireless device to hand off from one network to another based on empirical data gathered from real live networks regarding the grade of service available on the network. The invention uses this information in combination with the user's choice of a preferred type of network connection to intelligently manage and conserve device battery life.
|COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes: a transmitter having a plurality of transmitting units configured to perform data transmission, each transmitting unit including a synchronization unit configured to synchronize the transmitting units, an STBC test unit configured to divide an input signal to produce a plurality of STBC signals in order to perform an STBC test, and a controlling unit configured to perform a setting to test mode, wherein in the test mode, the transmitting units are combined to allow transmission of an STBC signal; and a receiver capable of receiving the STBC signal.
|Frequency Domain Channel Estimation in a Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Acess System - A channel estimator for use in a receiver node receiving signals from a plurality of user terminals wherein each user terminal is allotted a respective set of transmission subcarriers and respective test signal sequences for transmission over the channel to be estimated. The channel estimator has stored therein information as to the respective sets of transmission subcarriers allotted to the user terminals for transmission as well as the discrete spectra of the respective test signal sequences allotted to the user terminals. Upon receiving from a plurality of user terminals signals including the respective test signal sequences transmitted over the channel by using the respective sets of transmission subcarriers allotted thereto, the estimator generates the discrete spectrum of the combined test signal received and performs channel estimation as a function of the discrete spectrum of the combined test signal and the discrete spectra of the test signal sequences allotted to the user terminals. A frequency domain channel estimation is performed for a single carrier frequency division multiple access system.
|METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING BUFFER STATUS REPORT FROM TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Disclosed is a method for transmitting a buffer status report from a terminal in a wireless communication system. In particular, the method comprises the steps of: generating buffer status report information; and transmitting the buffer status report information to a base station, wherein the buffer status report information includes a first field containing a plurality of indicators and at least one second field indicating a buffer size index, wherein each of the plurality of indicators indicates the presence or absence of the second field corresponding to each of at least one logical channel group (LCG). Preferably, the buffer status report information may contain a third field corresponding to each of the at least one second field, and each of the third fields may contain an identifier of a buffer size table reference by the buffer size index contained in the second field.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PACKETS OF A TWO-WAY PASSENGER DATA STREAM - A method is proposed for transmitting packets of a two-way passenger data stream set up between first and second terminal devices. The passenger stream is compliant with a passenger transport protocol with acknowledgement defining a plurality of packet categories, and is intended to be encapsulated by a manager device according to an encapsulating transport protocol with acknowledgement. The manager device obtains a packet of the passenger stream transmitted from the first terminal device to the second terminal device, makes a first check to see if the packet obtained belongs to at least one predetermined category among the plurality of packet categories and, in the event that the first check is positive, encapsulates at least one part of the data of the obtained packet according to an encapsulating transport protocol without acknowledgement.
|SETTING UP A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An access network (AN) periodically broadcasts, to at least one user equipment (UE) served by the AN, a message requesting the at least one UE, whenever the at least one UE determines to perform a given type of transmission, (i) to measure a reverse-link channel upon which the transmission is to be performed, and (ii) to include results of the measurement within the transmission. A given UE receives the periodically broadcasted message from the AN and determines to perform the given type of transmission. The given UE refrains from measuring the reverse-link channel, as instructed by the AN, based on the data being associated with a communication session of a given type. The given UE transmits the data to the AN. If the data transmission omits the requested measurement results, the AN selects a transmission format for subsequent transmissions of the given UE based on the omission.
|METHOD FOR LOADING UPLINK SIMULATION DATA OF TERMINAL AND TERMINAL - The disclosure provides a method for loading uplink simulation data of a terminal, and a terminal, which belong to the field of wireless communication. The method comprises: after being powered on, the terminal imports simulation data to a memory of an uplink master-control Digital Signal Processor (DSP) of the terminal; the terminal performs uplink access, and transmits the simulation data to a channelized memory after the uplink access succeeds; then the terminal performs Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on the simulation data in each uplink sub-frame, and transmits the transformed simulation data to a base station via a radio frequency unit. According to the disclosure, the problem that a single terminal can not load data services of multiple terminals at the same time is solved; therefore, the effect of simulating to load noise transmission, load multi-terminal transmission, and load noise and terminal service transmission is achieved.
|NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION APPARATUS AND METHOD WITH A TABLE MAPPING ENGINE - Some embodiments provide a virtualizer for managing a plurality of managed switching elements that forward data through a network. The virtualizer comprises a first set of tables for storing input logical forwarding plane data and a second set of tables for storing output physical control plane data. It also includes a table mapping engine for mapping the input logical forwarding plane data in the first set of tables to output physical control plane data in the second set of tables by performing a set of database join operations on the input logical forwarding plane data in the first set of tables. In some embodiments, the physical control plane data is subsequently translated into physical forwarding behaviors that direct the forwarding of data by the managed switching elements.
|SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS CONDITION BASED MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARER COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, devices, and methods for wireless condition based multi radio access based wireless communication are provided. In one aspect, a device configured to communicate via a wireless communication link is provided. The device includes a controller configured to provide an acknowledgement indicator, when the channel is configured for such operation. The controller may be configured to adjust or alter the mechanism of the acknowledgement indicator in the packets transmitted based in part on a condition of the wireless communication link and a type of wireless communication that is being transmitted by the device.
|Traffic Item Impairment Emulation - An impairment unit, method, and machine readable storage media for emulating network impairments. A first network interface may receive network traffic including a plurality of received packets. A classifier may determine an impairment class of each received packet based on test information contained within a payload portion of each received packet, the impairment class of each received packet being one of a plurality of impairment classes, each impairment class uniquely associated with a corresponding one of a plurality of impairment profiles. An impairment engine may impair each of the plurality of impairment classes in accordance with the corresponding impairment profile to provide impaired network traffic. A second network interface may transmit the impaired network traffic to the network.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANCHOR CELL DESIGNATION IN NETWORK MIMO - Systems and methods that designate a control attachment point(s) during transmission of data in a Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) system. The control attachment point is represented by an anchor cell to address control signaling and represent a User Equipment's (UE) interaction with the wireless communication system from a perspective of control (e.g., supplying/sending grants to the UE, transmitting/receiving ACKS on the downlink/uplink to the UE, control information (CQI), and the like.) The cells can further engage in backhaul transfer of information therebetween, and dynamic switching/change of anchor point based on criteria such as control loading, channel quality, and the like can further be implemented.
|System and Method for Using Multiple Network Addresses To Establish Synchronization of a Device Under Test and Test Equipment Controlling the Test - A system and method for testing a data packet signal transceiver in which multiple network addresses (e.g., media access control, or MAC, addresses) are used to establish synchronization of the device under test and the test equipment controlling the test. In accordance with an exemplary embodiment, synchronization is established using a first MAC address, following which testing is conducted using a second MAC address.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTENT TYPE CLASSIFICATION - Various embodiments illustrated and described herein include systems, methods and software for content type classification. Some such embodiments include determining a potential state of classification for packets associated with a session based at least in part on a packet associated with the session that is a packet other than the first packet of the session.
|WIRELESS TERMINAL POSITIONING SYSTEM, METHOD OF POSITIONING WIRELESS TERMINAL, ENVIRONMENT MEASURMENT SYSTEM, FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, METHOD OF MEASURING ENVIRONMENT, AND METHOD OF DECIDING DESTINATION OF WIRELESS MOBILE TERMINAL - To obtain a method of positioning a wireless terminal capable of obtaining the position of each communication terminal by measuring distances with installed communication terminals each other without fixedly installing a base station.
|NETWORKED COMPUTER TELEPHONY SYSTEM DRIVEN BY WEB-BASED APPLICATIONS - A networked telephony system and method allow users to deploy on the Internet computer telephony applications associated with designated telephone numbers. The telephony application is easily created by a user in XML (Extended Markup Language) with predefined telephony XML tags and easily deployed on a website. The telephony XML tags include those for call control and media manipulation. A call to anyone of these designated telephone numbers may originate from anyone of the networked telephone system such as the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone System), a wireless network, or the Internet. The call is received by an application gateway center (AGC) installed on the Internet. Analogous to a web browser, the AGC provides facility for retrieving the associated XML application from its website and processing the call accordingly. The architecture and design of the system allow for reliability, high quality-of-service, easy scalability and the ability to incorporate additional telephony hardware and software and protocols.
|System and Method for Remote Asset Management - A remote asset management system comprising a network of programmable wireless modules, each having an antenna and an identification module and configured to communicate via a radio communication protocol. The system further includes a plurality of assets each linked to one of the wireless modules and configured to be managed by the linked wireless module. A remote system server service platform is configured to receive remote asset data from the wireless modules, pass the remote asset data to and from the wireless modules, send messages to at least one of the wireless modules, monitor the wireless modules by requesting and receiving current mode information, and remotely program the wireless modules. A data processing module located within the wireless module(s) and configured to process messages received by the wireless module, authenticate said message, analyze authenticated messages, and carry out asset management instructions included in the message.
|Fast Channel Probing - A method and arrangement for estimating the current channel quality for a data transfer in a mobile network. In a sending system entity, a channel quality estimate (CQE) associated with a data transfer to a receiving system entity in a mobile communication network is adjusted. One or more probing packets are communicated
|Synchronized Commands for Network Testing - Methods and test systems for testing a network. A test system may emulate a plurality of users, each emulated user executing a user activity. Each emulated user activity may include one or more commands. At least some emulated user activities may include a first command associated with a first protocol synchronized with a second command associated with a second protocol different from the first protocol. The test system may report a result of emulating the plurality of users.
|CONNECTION ADAPTER FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A connection adapter is disposed intervening between a communication module for connection to a radio packet communication network and high-level equipment. The connection adapter comprises a connection controller for controlling connection between the high-level equipment and the radio packet communication network, and a communication controller for relaying the communication by the high-level equipment using the communication module. When the communication controller of the connection adapter detects duplication of a TCP packet received from the high-level equipment, the communication controller discards the duplicated packet.
|QUALIFICATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Systems, methods, and devices for qualifying quality of service in data services delivered through wireless networks established by wireless access points (WAPs) are disclosed. A portable computing device can be used to execute a wireless network connectivity qualification application that can include functionality for testing and evaluating wireless network connectivity signals between various devices, including the WAP, in a particular local wireless network. Based on the test results, the application can generate recommendations for remedying any detected network issues. The recommendations can be determined from information stored locally on the portable computing device or in remote backend servers.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MONITORING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method for multi-user multiple-input and multiple-output (MU-MIMO) sniffing by an electronic device is described. The method includes detecting multiple client second control fields concurrently. The method also includes detecting multiple client data fields concurrently. The method additionally includes obtaining data based on the multiple client data fields.
|DATA COMMUNICATION - A method of operating an access network including a plurality of data connections (
|MULTI-CHANNEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and techniques relating to wireless communications are described. A described technique includes monitoring wireless communication channels, including a first channel and a second channel, to produce a monitoring output, determining a first transmission period for the first channel by applying a first waiting period duration and a second waiting period duration to the monitoring output, determining a second transmission period for the second channel by applying the first waiting period duration and the second waiting period duration to the monitoring output, causing, based on the first transmission period, a first transmission on the first channel to reserve the group of wireless communication channels; causing, based on the second transmission period, a second transmission on the second channel; and monitoring, after the end of the first transmission period, for an acknowledgement(s), An end of the second transmission period can be aligned with an end of the first transmission period.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC TIMESLOT REDUCTION - A method for communicating with a mobile station is presented. The method includes transmitting a first radio block to the mobile station. The first radio block including an indication instructing the mobile station to enter a DTR mode. Before receiving an indication of whether the mobile station is in DTR mode, the method includes retransmitting to the mobile station at least one of the first radio block and a radio block previously transmitted to the mobile station using a timeslot that is not monitored by the mobile station when the mobile station is in the DTR mode.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING LAN SIGNALS OVER A TRANSPORT SYSTEM - A computer system and method for transmitting LAN signals over transport systems. LAN signals are generated in any client LAN compliant interface. A transceiver receives the client LAN signal in the LAN format. The client LAN signals are not converted to a SONET transmission format at any time before reaching the transceiver. The transceiver then converts the client LAN signal to an internal electrical LAN signal before re-clocking the internal electrical LAN signal. The re-clocked internal electrical LAN signal is then re-modulated into a second LAN signal. The second LAN signal is then transmitted to a transport system.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTENT TYPE CLASSIFICATION - Various embodiments illustrated and described herein include systems, methods and software for content type classification. Some such embodiments include determining a potential state of classification for packets associated with a session based at least in part on a packet associated with the session that is a packet other than the first packet of the session.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING VoIP SERVICE - In a system to control a VoIP service, a user terminal performs a first registration procedure of a CSCF through a first P-CSCF using a first mobile IP allocated from a wireless LAN, monitors a signal intensity of the wireless LAN while receiving the VoIP service over the wireless LAN, and performs a second registration procedure through a second P-CSCF using a second mobile IP allocated from a wireless packet network upon booting if the signal intensity of the wireless LAN becomes weaker than a reference value. The CSCF sends a VoIP call to the second P-CSCF if the user terminal performs the second registration procedure and the user terminal then receives an incoming VoIP call.
|Enabling Coexistence of High-Density and Low-Density Transmissions - Embodiments may comprise logic such as hardware and/or code to enable coexistence of high-density and low-density transmissions with a modified CSMA protocol. Embodiments include a self-CTS (self clear to send) packet transmission prior to transmission of a ready to send (RTS) signal when initiating a high density transmission amidst legacy devices. In many embodiments, the self-CTS or the RTS includes a network allocation vector (NAV) having a value for the duration of the transmission. In some embodiments, the self-CTS may include a flag or bit to indicate the Shading Transmission Starts (STS).
|Method and System for Reporting Buffer Size IndexAANM Shi; XiaojuanAACI ShenzhenAACO CNAAGP Shi; Xiaojuan Shenzhen CNAANM Huang; YadaAACI ShenzhenAACO CNAAGP Huang; Yada Shenzhen CNAANM Zhang; JianAACI ShenzhenAACO CNAAGP Zhang; Jian Shenzhen CN - The disclosure claims a method and system for reporting a buffer size index; the method includes: presetting a first table which is a buffer size index table used by a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and presetting a second table which is a buffer size index table by increasing a maximum buffer size value to B
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ANALYZING A PACKET - An apparatus captures packets transmitted between first and second devices in accordance with first and second communication protocols, where the first and second protocols each assign a value for identifying a packet transmitted between first and second devices. In a state in which a first packet transmitted from the first device to the second device has not been captured yet at a time point of capturing an acknowledgment packet, responsive to the first packet, including a first value, upon capturing a second packet assigned a second value indicating order earlier than the first value, the apparatus determines whether the second packet is the first packet that is captured later than the acknowledgment packet, based on a difference between third and fourth values respectively assigned to the second packet and a previous packet that is captured latest among packets transmitted from the first device and captured earlier than the acknowledgment packet.
|Resource connection monitor utility - A connection monitor utility may monitor the availability of various resources, display a status, and provide various optimization functions for each resource. Performance data may be collected and displayed, and the performance data may be used to optimize, troubleshoot, and notify administrators or users for each connection. Some embodiments may store optimized parameters for connections from different locations. In one use model, the monitor utility may be used with a secure connection to a private network to provide visual feedback of connectivity to various resources and simple optimization of the connections.
|TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - In a transmission apparatus of a Gigabit Ethernet signal, in order to improve line efficiency, time division multiplexing is used. Further, if it is possible to branch/insert plural multiplexed Gigabit Ethernet signals at arbitrary nodes, it is possible to construct a more flexible network. For this reason, importance of a time division multiplexing apparatus having a function of branching/inserting Gigabit Ethernet signals is growing. A Gigabit Ethernet signal is monitored at the previous and subsequent stages of a cross connect unit, IFGs are inserted to the signal and switching is waited. If a signal state at the cross connection unit is an IFG, transmission path switching is performed, thereby performing transmission path switching without instantaneous interruption.
|WIFI Distance Measurement Using Location Packets - A method of determining a distance between a first wireless device and a second wireless device is provided. In this method, a location symbol can be generated by filtering and modulating a pseudorandom (PRN) code. The location symbol can be provided in a data field of a legacy wireless packet to form a first location packet. The first location packet can be transmitted from the first wireless device to the second wireless device. A second location packet can be transmitted from the second wireless device to the first wireless device, wherein the second location packet is substantially identical to the first location packet. An effective roundtrip time between the first and second wireless devices can be determined based on the first and second location packets. The distance between the first and second wireless devices can be computed using this roundtrip time.
|NETWORK TESTING PROVIDING FOR CONCURRENT REAL-TIME INGRESS AND EGRESS VIEWING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC DATA - There is disclosed a system and method for implementing concurrent ingress and egress viewing of network traffic data to evaluate the performance of a device under test. The method may be performed by a network testing system. The method may be performed in real-time.
|SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO UPLINK POWER CONTROL - In some implementations of the present invention, improvement of connection quality and reduction of dropped connection rate are achieved by suspending the transmission of High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH) data when a wireless terminal detects a power limiting mode during multi-radio access bearer (MRAB) connections and voice RAB is present, and correspondingly increasing uplink transmission power to voice and signaling data channels. In some implementations, the suspension of HS-DPCCH data can be complete or partial. When fully suspended, no data is sent on the HS-DPCCH. When partially suspended, no channel quality indicator (CQI) is transmitted. In both partial and full suspension schemes, the CQI transmission is suspended until the terminal detects that entry conditions to this state has been terminated.
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING TIMER ON BUFFER STATUS REPORT - A method for controlling a timer on buffer status report (BSR) is provided in the present invention, and the method is applied to implement the control of the timer on BSR the system to which Carrier Aggregation technology is applied. Said method includes: starting a retransmission BSR timer (retxBSR-Timer) and a BSR periodic reporting timer (periodicBSR-Timer) when a sub frame has a component carrier which has a BSR to be transmitted; restarting the retxBSR-Timer when a sub frame has a component carrier which has new data transmission resources; and restarting the periodicBSR-Timer when a sub frame has a component carrier which has a long BSR or a short BSR to be transmitted. A device for implementing said method is also provided in the present invention.
|Method and System for Obtaining Network Loads - The disclosure provides a method and system for obtaining network loads, comprising: a Load Detection Function (LDF) detects the user plane data of User Equipment (UE) and reports the load condition of a network which the UE currently accesses to a policy server according to the detected congestion indication. With the method in the disclosure, the policy server obtains the network loads condition, so that the quality of service is guaranteed.
|FEEDBACK INFORMATION IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Apparatus and method for encoding and transmitting feedback information from a first network node to a second network node in a multi-carrier wireless telecommunications network. The first network node is operable to receive signals from the second network node on two or more reception carriers and transmit data to the second network node on one or more transmission carriers. Each reception carrier being transmitted within an associated a radio band. The method comprises the steps of: (i) monitoring for a signal on at least two of the reception carriers; (ii) generating feedback information for at least two of the reception carriers based upon received signals; (iii) grouping the feedback information for reception carriers being transmitted within the same radio band; and encoding said grouped feedback information for two or more reception carriers being transmitted within the same radio band; and iv) transmitting the encoded feedback information to the second network node on one or more transmission carriers.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TESTING WIRELESS POSITION LOCATING - The present application describes a system and method for testing the position locating and navigation technology of a wireless client. To simulate the locations of the wireless access points in the array that are visible to the wireless client from the simulated location, the round-trip time between the wireless client and a wireless access point can be modified by delaying a response signal from the wireless access point in response to a signal received from the wireless client. The wireless client, knowing the location of the wireless access point and the expected response time of the wireless access point, interprets the delay in the response of the wireless access point as proportional to the distance of the wireless access point from the simulated location of the wireless client.
|OPERATION WITH VARIOUS TIMERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Operation of a user equipment (UE) with various timers is disclosed. According to this scheme, when the UE receives values for each of timers related with a discontinuous reception (DRX) operation from a network, the UE monitors a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) from subframe n+1 to subframe n+X based on a first timer among the above mentioned timers, when a first event for starting the first timer occurs at the subframe n, and monitors the PDCCH from subframe n to subframe n+X−1 based on a second timer among said timers, when a second event for starting the second timer occurs at the subframe n.
|NETWORK PERFORMANCE ESTIMATING APPARATUS AND NETWORK PERFORMANCE ESTIMATING METHOD, NETWORK CONFIGURATION CHECKING METHOD, COMMUNICATION MANAGING APPARATUS, AND DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD - A network performance estimating apparatus includes a network-configuration depicting unit configured to generate, from a designed network, network configuration information indicating a connection relation of ports among communication apparatuses and store, as attribute information, apparatus identification information including input peculiar information for each communication apparatus name and apparatus type of the communication apparatuses, a communication-apparatus-attribute-information acquiring unit configured to acquire, communication performance of the communication apparatuses specified by the apparatus identification information from peculiar information in which apparatus model names and communication performance are stored in association with each other, a token-circulation-order determining unit configured to determine, from the network configuration information, token circulation order indicating order in a designed network, and a performance estimating unit configured to calculate communication performance of the designed network using the token circulation order and the communication performance of the communication apparatuses.
|Dynamic management of wireless network topology with diverse traffic flows - System and method for topology management of dynamic ad hoc wireless communication networks. The network nodes are organized in a multi-level hierarchical architecture whereby the nodes at each level are managed by nodes at the next higher level. In a three-layer network, leaf nodes populate the lowest level, cluster head nodes the intermediate level, and regional head nodes the highest level. Priority-based backbone tree paths are constructed by selecting and connecting high capability nodes, such that the unselected nodes are one-hop away from a connected node. In a two backbone tree path construction, a primary backbone tree path carries the high priority traffic and a secondary backbone tree path carries the lower priority traffic. The connectivities of the backbone tree paths are maintained dynamically. So also are high priority traffic flows using the Dynamic Priority Threshold mechanism with High Fidelity Monitoring and traffic siphoning via unutilized network resources.
|PROVIDING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS USING VIRTUALIZATION BASED ON PROTOCOL INFORMATION IN PACKET - A method of providing network communications includes receiving, at a second device via a virtual network connection that virtualizes network capabilities of the second device, a packet transmitted by a first device, the packet including protocol information; determining a third device to which to transmit the packet, said determination being informed by the protocol information; and transmitting the packet to the third device using a virtual network connection, which virtualizes network capabilities of the second device, in accordance with the protocol information.
|Radiative focal area antenna transmission coupling arrangement - The present invention comprises a docking system for connecting a portable communication device to a further signal transmission line. The docking system may be arranged within a workstation such as a desk or a tray. The system may also envelope a room in a building or be located in a vehicle, to control and restrict the radiative emission from the communication device and to direct such radiation to a further remote antenna and or signal distribution system connected to the transmission line.
|Detecting Rogue Access Points - Detecting rogues in a controller-based wireless network impersonating the BSSIDs of known valid access points (APs). Access points (APs) and Air Monitors (AMs, receive-only devices) periodically build RF-neighbor lists by collecting the BSSIDS of all the access points they can receive. These lists are then sent to the host controller. The host controller compares the new RF-neighbor list against the old RF-neighbor list. An otherwise valid BSSID appearing on a RF-neighbor list where it has not appeared before is flagged as a potential rogue.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method are provided for allocating resources, in which a base station allocates a time slot to a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting a time division multiple access scheme. The method includes a monitoring block of monitoring a channel state of the terminal after allocating a time slot for the terminal. The method also includes adjusting, by increasing or reducing, the number of the existing allocated time slots when the channel state of the terminal satisfies a preset time slot adjustment requirement.
|Determining Preamble Sequences For Random Access - The present invention relates to a method and a communication network node for enabling auto-tuning of preamble sequences used during random access procedures when user equipments (
|TEST APPARATUS AND TEST METHOD - Provided is a test apparatus that tests a device under test, comprising a test module section that tests the device under test; a test control section that generates control packets for controlling the test module section; and a connecting section that receives the control packets from the test control section and transmits the control packets to the test module section. The test module section includes a first test module that operates according to control packets having a first packet structure and a second test module that operates according to control packets having a second packet structure, which is obtained by adding an expansion region to a control packet having the first packet structure, the test control section transmits control packets having the second packet structure to the connecting section, and the connecting section (i) removes the expansion region from control packets having the second packet structure received from the test control section and transmits the resulting control packets to the first test module, and (ii) transmits control packets having the second packet structure received from the test control section to the second test module.
|COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes a transmission device configured to transmit a packet and a reception device configured to receive the packet. The reception device is equipped with a behavior information acquisition unit, a model specification information acquisition unit, and a model specification information transmission unit. The behavior information acquisition unit acquires behavior information representing the behavior of a packet before the packet reaches the reception device from the transmission device. The model specification information acquisition unit acquires model specification information for specifying a mathematical model representing the behaviors of a plurality of packets based on the acquired behavior information. The model specification information transmission unit transmits the acquired model specification information to the transmission device. The transmission device is equipped with a model specification information reception unit. The model specification information reception unit receives model specification information.
|COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A mobile communications system is proposed in which mobile communications devices are arranged to transmit signals to and to receive signals from a base station using one or a subset of available sub-bands, with the base station being configured to move the mobile communications devices between the sub-bands. An anchor sub-band is also provided on which idle mobile communications devices camp until they are moved to one or more other sub-bands in addition to or instead of the anchor sub-band.
|Method for Monitoring Network Nodes - A method for mutual monitoring of mobile network nodes of a network, wherein each network node continuously monitors the presence of neighboring network nodes of a certain group of network nodes, the particular network node checks whether it receives beacon data packets, which are sent from the neighboring network nodes at regular time intervals, from the neighboring network nodes over an interface. The relative proximity of the network nodes to each other is monitored without requiring a network infrastructure. The network comprising mobile network nodes is suitable for all applications in which spatial proximity between related members of a group is to be monitored, wherein the group members may be persons, animals or objects.
|DATA BUFFER STATUS INFLUENCED CONTROL CHANNEL MONITORING - The monitoring of control channels, such as the physical downlink control channel, may benefit from the influence of data buffer status information. In certain embodiments, a method includes monitoring a downlink channel (for example, a PDCCH) in active time. The method also includes monitoring an instantaneous status of a data buffer related to a user equipment and/or a base station. The monitoring of the downlink channel is guided by the instantaneous status as presently known.
|PACKET STORAGE METHOD AND PACKET STORAGE APPARATUS - There is provided a packet storage method including: processing in which a sequence identifier is successively assigned to a packet captured from a network and the packet is stored in a buffer; creation processing in which the packet is read out from the buffer, a first identifier involved in a first property of the packet is identified, and an index data that mutually correlates the sequence identifier and the first identifier is created; and storage processing in which the packet corresponding to the sequence identifier included in the index data is read out from the buffer, the packet is sorted according to the first identifier included in the index data, and the sorted packet is stored in a storage unit on a per-first-identifier basis, executed by a processor.
|System and Method for Testing Automated Provisioning and Maintenance of Operations Support Systems - The present invention provides a complete virtual multi-vendor EMS based network that behaves identical to the network elements of the EMS clients. A virtual network simulator is built that has the ability to faithfully simulate the behavior of any vendor's EMS to represent the data objects required by the TMF 814 specification. This allows automatic provisioning and maintenance of the Operation Support Systems to fully test new functionality against complete EMS based network without depending upon the availability of any physical equipment, thereby providing much quicker, low cost, extremely life-like testing environment.
|Method and Apparatus for Efficient and Deterministic Group Alerting - A system and method are provided for reliable, wireless group alerting in a system having a database, switch, wireless network, and a plurality of intelligent mobile receivers, and preferably employing a modified two-way paging based on ReFLEX™ protocol information service (IS) messages and a novel ALOHA command for multicast acknowledgement from mobile receivers. An encrypted message is broadcast to a group address and received by a selected number of the mobile receivers. The network replies to the sender with detailed information about the individual members in the alert group. Each of the mobile receivers in the group then acknowledges the common message back to the system, decrypts the message, displays it to the user, and allows the user to respond. The system employs centralized management to simplify the roles of the mobile users and administrators, minimizing configuration and operational human errors that would otherwise result in confusion or lost messages.
|ADVANCED LINK TRACKING FOR VIRTUAL CLUSTER SWITCHING - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch system. The switch includes a port that couples to a server hosting a number of virtual machines. The switch also includes a link tracking module. During operation, the link tracking module determines that reachability to at least one end host coupled to a virtual cluster switch of which the switch is a member is disrupted. The link tracking module then determines that at least one virtual machine coupled to the port is affected by the disrupted reachability, and communicates to the server hosting the affected virtual machine about the disrupted reachability.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF ROUTING IP TELEPHONY DATA PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods of establishing a communications channel between a first telephony device and a second telephony device obtain information about the capabilities of various data network elements that can be used to establish the communications channel. The information about the elements is used to select a combination of elements that are used to establish the communications channel. A communications channel may also be monitored while it is in use. If the requirements for the channel change, the communications channel may also be changed accordingly. If any of the elements become incapable of providing the required level of service or functionality for a communications channel, the element may be removed from the communications channel.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ELECTRONIC MONITORING - A system for electronic monitoring includes a control server and a plurality of monitoring servers. The control server transmits electronic monitoring instructions including identification information on terminals to a plurality of monitoring servers, respectively, based on information of objects to be monitored stored in a database, receives an object confirmation request message including information on suspect object packets from a first monitoring server among the plurality of monitoring servers, and determines whether the monitoring object terminals correspond to suspect object terminals that transmit or receive the suspect object packets according to the object confirmation request message based on the information on the monitoring objects. When the suspect object terminals are the monitoring object terminals, the control server updates the database based on the information on the suspect object packets.
|Dynamically enabling a channel for message reception in a mesh network - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for operating a node in a wireless mesh network to scan each one of a plurality of channels received at a processing node in a wireless mesh network in a predetermined order for a predetermined duration to detect a preamble; detect the preamble on one of the plurality of channels; remain on a current one of the plurality of channels to receive a message after the predetermined duration when the preamble includes a predetermined series of symbols; and resume scanning each one of the plurality of channels after the message is received.
|CELLULAR OR WIFI MOBILE TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION BASED ON PUBLIC OR PRIVATE NETWORK DESTINATION - Systems and methods for cellular or WIFI mobile traffic optimization based on public or private network destination are disclosed. One embodiment includes a mobile device whose traffic is optimized based on destination IP network type where the mobile device includes a local proxy which detects outgoing traffic and determines whether the outgoing traffic is directed towards a public IP network or private IP network. In general, the outgoing traffic is categorized as optimizable for mobile device battery conservation and/or network resource conservation if the outgoing traffic is directed towards the public IP network. Optimization of the outgoing traffic can be performed by a native operating system of the mobile device or an application that is non-native to the native operating system of the mobile device. The optimization can also be in part or in whole performed by a remote proxy in communication with the local proxy on the mobile device.
|USING WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK PROTOCOL INFORMATION FOR MANAGING A PERFORMANCE LEVEL OF A PROCESSOR - Methods and apparatuses are provided for managing a performance level of a processing circuit, such as a modem, by making adjustments to one or more operating parameters provided to the processing circuit, such as a voltage supplied to the processing circuit and/or a clock frequency of the processing circuit. The processing circuit is adapted to monitor wireless wide area network (WWAN) protocol information. The processing circuit may adjust at least one operating parameter provided to the processing circuit in response to the monitored wireless wide area network (WWAN) protocol information.
|METHOD OF DETERMINING IMMEDIATE TOPOLOGY OF A NETWORK CONNECTION - A network test tool can determine if it is linked to directly to an indicated managed device or an intermediate unmanaged device. Discovery protocols and spanning tree are designed to map network topology and eliminate closed loops in networks. As such these management packets are among the first emerging from managed switches immediately upon acquiring a new link. By analyzing the first few packets, with timeouts, the tool can determine with a high degree of accuracy if it is really connected to the advertised nearest switch. If an unmanaged switch exists between the managed switch and tool, the managed switch will not detect the link event therefore not immediately send discovery packets. Once the tool determines it is not linked to the managed switch, further packet analysis can indicated if the intermediate device is a Layer 2 switch or Hub.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PROCESS DATA IN AN AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED INSTALLATION - A process data transmitter transmits process data at defined recurring time intervals as a serial transmit data stream including data symbols at a defined symbol rate. A process data receiver samples the serial transmit data stream at a sampling rate which is higher than the symbol rate by a defined factor to thereby generate a serial receiver data stream having a plurality of sampling values per data symbol. The process data receiver subdivides the serial receiver data stream into data packets, each of which has a defined first number of sampling values. The process data receiver selects a defined second number of sampling values from the respective data packets. The second number is smaller than the first number by the defined factor and the sampling values selected from each data packet are equidistant from one another. The process data receiver processes the selected sampling values as received process data.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND/OR DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION FOR A MULTI-CARRIER/MULTI-CELL OPERATION - Method and apparatus for multi-carrier/multi-cell discontinuous reception (DRX)/discontinuous transmission (DTX) operations and activation/deactivation of DRX/DTX are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may configure at least one state variable for controlling DRX, DTX or both on a group of cells. The WTRU may receive an order for DRX or DTX activation or deactivation. The WTRU may determine a setting for the state variable based on the order. The WTRU may activate or deactivate DRX or DTX based on the setting for the state variable. The group of cells may include all cells within the same frequency band, all cells in a particular frequency or group of frequencies, and all secondary cells associated with a primary cell. The primary cell may be an uplink (UL) or downlink (DL) primary cell. The secondary cells may be UL or DL secondary cells. The WTRU may apply common, group-specific or cell-specific DRX monitoring.
|COEXISTENCE MECHANISM FOR MULTIPLE CHANNELS - In accordance with an example embodiment, there is disclosed herein a coexistence mechanism for multiple channels. A plurality of channels are monitored to determine which channels are available for communications. Upon receiving a request to establish communications on a channel set within the plurality of channels, a response is sent to the request on at least one in the channel set. The response comprises data representative of which channels from the channel set are available for communications. Optionally, the response may include data indicating how long the unavailable channels will be occupied.
|COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - There is provided a communication device including: a data acquisition unit that acquires sensed data related to a signal receiving condition in a spectrum assigned to a first communication service; a determination unit that determines which of a first area inside a service area of the first communication service where a signal receiving condition is suitable, a second area inside or in a peripheral part of the service area where a signal receiving condition is not suitable and a third area outside the peripheral part of the service area the communication device is located based on the sensed data acquired by the data acquisition unit; and a secondary usage starting unit that starts usage of a second communication service using a part or whole of the spectrum assigned to the first communication service by a procedure different depending on a kind of the area where the communication device is located determined by the determination unit.
|RADIO NETWORK NODE, USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS THEREIN - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a user equipment for handling control information in a radio communications network. The user equipment is served in a cell controlled by a radio network node and is of a second type of user equipments. The user equipment monitors a search space for control information of a physical data control channel, PDCCH, which search space is associated with the second type of user equipments. The PDCCH comprises at least one control channel element that comprises resource elements at least partly comprised in a second region of resource elements. The resource elements of the second region are only allowed to be scheduled for control information to user equipments of the second type. The at least one CCE is defined in relation to a CCE of a first region of resource elements, which resource elements of the first region are allowed to be scheduled for control information to user equipments of a first type. The user equipment detects control information within the monitored search space, and uses the detected control information for communicating with the radio network node.
|NETWORKED COMPUTER TELEPHONY SYSTEM DRIVEN BY WEB-BASED APPLICATIONS - A networked telephony system and method allow users to deploy on the Internet computer telephony applications associated with designated telephone numbers. The telephony application is easily created by a user in XML (Extended Markup Language) with predefined telephony XML tags and easily deployed on a website. The telephony XML tags include those for call control and media manipulation. A call to anyone of these designated telephone numbers may originate from anyone of the networked telephone system such as the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone System), a wireless network, or the Internet. The call is received by an application gateway center (AGC) installed on the Internet. Analogous to a web browser, the AGC provides facility for retrieving the associated XML application from its website and processing the call accordingly. The architecture and design of the system allow for reliability, high quality-of-service, easy scalability and the ability to incorporate additional telephony hardware and software and protocols.
|CPU CONNECTION CIRCUIT, DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS, ARITHMETIC PROCESSING DEVICE, PORTABLE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL USING THESE MODULES AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - There are provided a CPU connection circuit and a method wherein the CPU connection circuit is a circuit to be employed by two CPUs by alternately conducting a changeover between two buffers disposed therebetween to prevent an event that data processing cannot be fully executed by the CPU on the receiving side. There is included a memory controller
|OAM in OTN Networks: GMPLS signaling for TCM - Methods and nodes are disclosed for OAM configuring one or more tandem connection monitoring layers through GMPLS signaling during GMPLS sub-network connection (SNC) establishment. Additionally, methods and nodes are disclosed for OAM configuring one or more tandem connection monitoring layers through GMPLS signaling after GMPLS sub-network connection establishment, that is, for existing connections.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DISCARDING LOGGED MEASUREMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of discarding logged measurements in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connected mode receives a Minimization of Drive Tests (MDT) configuration from a base station and starts a validity timer upon receiving the MDT configuration. The user equipment in an RRC idle mode logs measurements based on the MDT configuration to collect logged measurements while the validity timer is running. When the validity timer is expired, the user equipment discards the MDT configuration and starts a conservation timer. When the conservation timer is expired, the logged measurements are discarded.
|METHOD OF RELAY DISCOVERY AND COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of relay discovery and communication for a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communications system, including: receiving a first relay discovery request, from a remote UE which announces relay discovery requests; transmitting a relay discovery response including an identification of the UE, to the remote UE; receiving a second relay discovery request including the identification of the UE, from the remote UE; and activating a relay function to start relaying traffic of Proximity-based Service (Prose) communication for the remote UE.
|Discontinuous Reception Start Offset Coordinated with Semi-Persistent Scheduling System and Method - An apparatus and method are provided for configuring a user agent to receive semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) transmissions independent of the user agent monitoring a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). Also provided are an apparatus and method for configuring a user agent to monitor a PDCCH in a subframe to which one of a downlink assignment or an uplink grant is configured.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING IMPROVED DETECTION OF OVERLAPPING NETWORKS - A method, apparatus and computer program product provide improved detection of overlapping wireless networks. In this regard, the method, apparatus and computer program product may utilize a processor, such as a processor on a wireless access point, to determine one or more parameters for a scan of a wireless network to identify overlapping networks. Wireless stations may utilize the parameters to determine the content of a scan report generated from a scan of the wireless network. The wireless stations may further utilize the parameters to determine which values should be monitored and/or recorded during the scan of the network. The wireless stations may respond to the access point with results corresponding to the parameters requested by the access point, and the access point may use the results to determine channel access parameters for other devices on the network, such as the wireless stations.
|TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal device includes communication means for carrying out communication with a base station device, and generation means for generating a rank indicator specifying a preferred rank, first partial precoder information and second partial precoder information specifying a preferred precoder, and a reception quality indicator specifying a preferred transmission rate. In a first feedback mode in which reception quality information is reported periodically to the base station device, the communication means reports the second partial precoder information and the reception quality indicator at first timing, and reports the rank indicator and the first partial precoder information at second timing different from the first timing. In a second feedback mode in which the reception quality information is reported aperiodically to the base station device, the communication means reports the rank indicator, the first partial precoder information, the second partial precoder information, and the reception quality indicator at the same timing.
|COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Methods and apparatus for communicating between a first node and a plurality of second nodes in a network, including a first uplink mode in which a first message is transmitted from multiple second nodes in sequence, and a second uplink mode in which a second message is sent from only a subset of nodes. A first receiving node evaluates communication path information based on messages received in the first uplink mode and returns this information via an acknowledgement to allow the subset to be selected. The first message from multiple nodes includes sequence information to allow the first node to acknowledge at an appropriate point in time. This is particularly applicable where multiple spatially separated antennas offer a receiver several observations of the same signal in an antenna diversity scheme.
|JESD TEST SEQUENCER GENERATOR - A framer interfacing between one or more data converters and a logic device is disclosed. The framer comprises a transport layer and a data link layer, and the framer is configured to frame one or more samples from the data converters to frames according to a serialized interface. In particular, the synthesis of the hardware for the framer is parameterizable, and within the synthesized hardware, one or more software configurations are possible. Instance parameters used in synthesizing the framer may include at least one of: the size of the input bus for providing one or more samples to the transport layer, the total number of bits per converter, and the number of lanes for the link. Furthermore, a transport layer test sequence generator for inserting a test sequence in the transport layer is disclosed.
|MAINTAINING A USER EQUIPMENT IN A SHARED CHANNEL STATE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a user equipment (UE) is maintained in a shared channel state (e.g., CELL_FACH, etc.) during a period of UE-traffic inactivity that exceeds a threshold inactivity period associated with transitions of the UE from the shared channel state to a dormant state (e.g., CELL_PCH or URA_PCH, etc.). While the UE is being maintained in the shared channel state, the UE receives a request to set-up a communication session. The UE transmits, in response to the received request, a message on a reverse-link shared channel to an access network to facilitate set-up of the requested communication session.
|SELECTIVELY ACQUIRING AND ADVERTISING A CONNECTION BETWEEN A USER EQUIPMENT AND A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - In an embodiment, a UE transmits information regarding its local environment to a WWAN-based application server. The application server generates a list of WLAN APs that are in a vicinity of the UE based on the local environment information. The application server sends, to the UE, WLAN AP selection assistance information (SAI) that includes at least the list of WLAN APs and (ii) navigation information by which the UE can navigate to the listed WLAN APs. The UE receives the SAI and provides a user of the UE with directions to a selected WLAN AP based on the SAI. In another embodiment, a communication entity advertises a UE's connection to a WLAN AP along with information related to an estimated duration of the UE's connection. Another communication entity receives the connection advertisement and determines whether to transmit data to the UE based on the advertisement.
|MULTI-DEVICE MONITORING AND CONTROL USING INTELLIGENT DEVICE CHANNEL SHARING - A physical network address of one of a set of wireless customer-premise monitoring devices is translated to a shared logical device physical network address in response to receipt from an application server of a first data packet addressed to the physical network address. The shared logical device physical network address forms a logical device group and physically addresses each of the set of wireless customer-premise monitoring devices over a single wireless communication channel. The physical network address of the one of the set of wireless customer-premise monitoring devices is embedded within the first data packet addressed to the shared logical device physical network address. The first data packet is sent to the shared logical device physical network address.
|LTE PROBE - A probe is disclosed that is capable of providing the lawful interception of communications over a network, such as an LTE network. In embodiments, the probe is a passive probe operable to tap into various different interfaces on the network and intercept communications for law enforcement or intelligence agencies without modification of any hardware or software that is part of the network.
|METHOD FOR EVALUATING THE USABILITY OF A SUB-CARRIER OF A POWER-LINE SIGNAL - The invention relates to a method for evaluating the usability of a sub-carrier of a BPL (broadband power-line) signal, in particular in order to avoid mutual influencing of the BPL signal and a further signal, wherein the BPL signal has a plurality of sub-carriers and one symbol can be transmitted in each of the sub-carriers. Said method comprises the following steps: extracting a received value y[k] from a sub-carrier of a received BPL signal, rectifying the received value y[k] using an estimated transfer function Ĥ of the transmission channel, deciding on a symbol d[k] that is coded in the received value y[k], distorting the symbol d[k] using the estimated transfer function Ĥ of the transmission channel, calculating a difference between the received value y[k] and the processed signal d[k]·Ĥ, and deciding on the usability of the sub-carrier on the basis of the difference y[k]−d[k]·Ĥ.
|CONTROLLING WIRELESS TRANSITION TIMERS BASED ON APPLICATION AND CONTENT - Wireless transition timers associated with wireless transition states are adaptively controlled in relation to use of applications by user equipment (UE). A UE can include a transition management component (TMC) that can adaptively control wireless transition timers associated with wireless states based on application type, session content, or other factors. The TMC monitors data flow associated with an application and, for a current or subsequent communication session, controls the length of wireless transition timers and switching between wireless states to improve UE, application, and/or network performance while maintaining QOE for the user. The TMC can access a timer look-up table that maps wireless transition timers to application type, content type, user behavior, or other factors. The TMC also can desirably control maintaining persistence or always-on connections by controlling switching between wireless states using the adapted wireless transition timers.
|DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MONITORING THE CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and device for monitoring the control channel in a multicarrier system. Each of a plurality of sub-search spaces corresponds to each of a plurality of scheduled component carriers. The terminal monitors a downlink control channel for a scheduled component carrier corresponding to each of the plurality of sub-search spaces. Each of the plurality of sub-search spaces is defined displaced to the extent that they are offset from each other.
|DISTRIBUTED NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Hosts or end-systems residing at the edges of a network gather data about the traffic they transmit into and receive from the network. The network's routing protocol (typically a link-state protocol such as OSPF) is monitored and routing data or packets are used to recover the network's current status and topology. This data can be collected, fused, and maintained and a platform, preferably distributed, can be provided to query the data, thus enabling a variety of network management applications.
|CFI Signaling for Heterogeneous Networks with Multiple Component Carriers in LTE-Advanced - This invention mitigates interference in wireless telephony in heterogeneous networks having a macro base station and a low power base station. This invention attempts to avoid cross carrier scheduling on an anchor carrier and a non-anchor carrier. If cross carrier scheduling is unavoidable, then this invention attempts: (1) semi-statically signalling a CFI value on a cross-scheduled component carrier; (2) semi-statically signalling a channel quality information (CSI) value on a cross-scheduled component carrier setting a Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator CHannel (PHICH) value to be maximum; or (3) semi-statically signalling a channel quality information (CSI) value on a cross-scheduled component carrier using Physical Control Format Indicator CHannel (PCFICH) power boosting on cross-scheduled component carriers (CC).
|CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION WITH FLEXIBLE CARRIER CONFIGURATIONS - Techniques for reporting channel state information (CSI) are disclosed. A user equipment (UE) may be configured for operation on multiple carriers with different configurations, e.g., FDD and TDD carriers and/or carriers with different uplink-downlink configurations. The multiple carriers may have different subframes for making measurements for CSI and/or different subframes for sending CSI. In response to a CSI request, the UE may determine at least one reference subframe to use for determining CSI for the multiple carriers. The reference subframe may be common to the plurality of carriers and may, for example, be based the subframe in which the CSI request in sent. Alternatively, the reference subframe may be different for different carriers such as when it is based on different HARQ timelines applicable for the different carriers. The UE may determine the CSI for the multiple carriers based on the reference subframe(s) and may report the CSI.
|Communication Gateway for Facilitating Communications With a Supervisory Control and Data Aquisition System - Transfer of data between at least one supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) device and an advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) device via a wireless communication network is facilitated. The data is used for monitoring and/or controlling the AMI device. A protocol conversion of the data is performed to facilitate transfer of the data between the SCADA device and the AMI device as data packets via a packet data network gateway and a wireless communications network.
|Method and Base Station for Detecting Interfering Base Station - A method and a base station can be used for detecting an interfering base station. A second base station sends no second downlink synchronization code in a downlink pilot time slot DwPTS of a specified frame, so that the second base station receives a first downlink synchronization code in a downlink pilot time slot DwPTS of a first base station, and performs correlation calculation on a detecting code segment of uplink data of the second base station by using the first downlink synchronization code, and by judging whether a correlation value of one of detecting code segments in the uplink data is greater than a correlation value threshold, determines whether the second base station is an interfering base station of the first base station.
|DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING HIGH SPEED SHARED CONTROL CHANNEL IN A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for detecting high speed shared control channel of a communication terminal is provided, which recognizes decoding reliability for each of high-speed shared control channel by decoding each of a plurality of high-speed shared control channels; decides a maximum and a minimum in the decoding reliability, calculates a difference between the maximum and the minimum to compare the calculated difference with a preset critical value; and detects and processes a high-speed shared control channel corresponding to the maximum, when the difference exceeds the critical value. Accordingly, even though the wireless environment is inferior, the decoding reliability of an HS-SCCH can be more accurately decided in an HS-SCCH detection apparatus of the communications terminal and the detection performance of the HS-SCCH can be improved in a communication terminal.
|METHOD OF COMMUNICATION FOR STATION OPERATING BASED ON BATTERY IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of communication based on battery in a wireless LAN system is provided. The method includes receiving, by a station (STA), a battery lifetime request message from an access point (AP), wherein the battery lifetime request message includes a battery lifetime report interval field and battery lifetime report threshold field, the battery lifetime report interval field indicating an interval at which the STA report a battery lifetime, the battery lifetime report threshold field indicating a threshold of the battery lifetime and transmitting, by the STA, a first battery lifetime report message including information indicating a first battery lifetime.
|Multilevel Monitoring System Architecture - Network traffic information from multiple sources, at multiple time scales, and at multiple levels of detail are integrated so that users may more easily identify relevant network information. The network monitoring system stores and manipulates low-level and higher-level network traffic data separately to enable efficient data collection and storage. Packet traffic data is collected, stored, and analyzed at multiple locations. The network monitoring locations communicate summary and aggregate data to central modules, which combine this data to provide an end-to-end description of network traffic at coarser time scales. The network monitoring system enables users to zoom in on high-level, coarse time scale network performance data to one or more lower levels of network performance data at finer time scales. When high-level network performance data of interest is selected, corresponding low-level network performance data is retrieved from the appropriate distributed network monitoring locations to provide additional detailed information.
|METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR TRACKING USER BEHAVIOR IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method, system, and apparatus for tracking user behavior in a wireless communication network are provided. The method includes monitoring one or more data packets communicated between one or more devices and one or more data servers at an anchor datapath gateway in the wireless communication network. The method further includes creating one or more profiles for one or more users in response to monitoring the one or more data packets. The one or more devices are used by the one or more users.
|COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A terminal (
|PACKET DETECTION IN THE PRESENCE OF INTERFERERS - Methods and apparatus for signal processing is disclosed. The methods and apparatus include a first autocorrelator configured to autocorrelate a received signal using a first time delay to produce a first correlation magnitude, a second autocorrelator configured to autocorrelate the received signal using a second time delay different from the first time delay to produce a second correlation magnitude, and a detector configured to determine whether the received signal comprises a packet preamble based on the first and second correlation magnitudes.
|COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL AND METHOD - A communications terminal is provided for communicating data packets with a mobile communications network. The mobile communications network includes base stations for communicating data packets with the communications terminals via a radio access interface, and a core network part which communicates the data packets with the base stations of the radio network part. The core network part includes a mobility manager for monitoring a location of the communications terminal. The communications terminal is configured to attach to a first base station of the mobile communications network, to transmit a short message data packet providing context information for communicating the short message data packet to the mobility manager via the first base station, to determine that communication of data packets is better via a second base station, to attach to the second base station, and to receive a down link data packet from the mobility manager via the second base station.
|RADIO COEXISTENCE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Technology for reducing coexistence interference in a multi-radio device is disclosed. One method comprises applying discontinuous reception (DRX) to a user equipment (UE) having a plurality of radio transceivers. The DRX can include a long DRX cycle for the UE. One of a 2 milliseconds (ms), 5 ms, and 8 ms cycle start offset period may be provided for the long DRX cycle to reduce coexistence interference between the plurality of radio transceivers in the UE. The cycle start offset period is selected to provide at least one Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process reservation pattern to reduce the coexistence interference between the plurality of radio transceivers in the UE.
|Identifying Related Network Traffic Data for Monitoring and Analysis - Network traffic information from multiple sources, at multiple time scales, and at multiple levels of detail are integrated so that users may more easily identify relevant network information. The network monitoring system stores and manipulates low-level and higher-level network traffic data separately to enable efficient data collection and storage. Packet traffic data is collected, stored, and analyzed at multiple locations. The network monitoring locations communicate summary and aggregate data to central modules, which combine this data to provide an end-to-end description of network traffic at coarser time scales. The network monitoring system enables users to zoom in on high-level, coarse time scale network performance data to one or more lower levels of network performance data at finer time scales. When high-level network performance data of interest is selected, corresponding low-level network performance data is retrieved from the appropriate distributed network monitoring locations to provide additional detailed information.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPORTING POWER HEADROOM IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for reporting power headroom by a mobile station in a multiple component carrier system is disclosed. The method includes calculating power headroom values for at least one component carrier configured in the mobile station, receiving information regarding a recommended component carrier selected by a base station among the at least one component carrier configured in the mobile station, selecting at least one report component carrier used to report the calculated power headroom values based on the information regarding the recommended component carrier, and transmitting the calculated power headroom values to the base station through the at least one report component carrier.
|INCREASING THROUGHPUT OF MULTIPLEXED ELECTRICAL BUS IN PIPE-LINED ARCHITECTURE - Techniques are disclosed for increasing the throughput of a multiplexed electrical bus by exploiting available pipeline stages of a computer or other system. For example, a method for increasing a throughput of an electrical bus that connects at least two devices in a system comprises introducing at least one signal hold stage in a signal-receiving one of the two devices, such that a maximum frequency at which the two devices are operated is not limited by a number of cycles of an operating frequency of the electrical bus needed for a signal to propagate from a signal-transmitting one of the two devices to the signal-receiving one of the two devices. Preferably, the signal hold stage introduced in the signal-receiving one of the two devices is a pipeline stage re-allocated from the signal-transmitting one of the two devices.
|METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR QUIET PERIOD MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS FOR COEXISTENCE - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed for quiet period management in wireless networks to enhance coexistence of wireless networks with other wireless networks. An example embodiment comprises: receiving control information in a wireless message in a communications channel from another device in a wireless network; receiving a packet having a duration in the communications channel in the wireless network; delaying transmission of a packet in the communications channel for an interval determined by the received control information; monitoring an ambient electromagnetic spectrum during the interval; and competing for transmission resources in the communications channel, using a carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance access method, after the interval.
|Redundant Gateway System for Device Level Ring Networks - Multiple gateway devices communicating between a device level ring (DLR) network and a spanning tree (ST) network may be provided a gateway protocol that cooperatively ensures that only a single gateway is active at a given time. This cooperation may be effected by the transmission of advertise messages by gateways, the advertise messages holding precedence values so that only a single gateway having a highest precedence value is active at a given time. Loss of the advertise messages may trigger a gateway held in a backup state to assume an active gateway role.
|METHOD TO REPORT CQI IN CONNECTED-MODE DRX AND REDUCE UE WAKE UP TIME FOR 3GPP LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus determines whether a channel quality indicator (CQI) is to be reported during any one of x subframes immediately after a start of a next on-duration, an on-duration being a duration over which a downlink control channel is monitored every discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle, and x being a number of subframes used to generate a CQI report, schedules a wake-up time for reporting the CQI when the CQI is to be reported during any one of the x subframes immediately after the start of the next on-duration, and reports the CQI based on a reference subframe. The CQI may be based on a last subframe of a previous DRX cycle active time, and reported at a first subframe of the next on-duration.
|IDENTIFYING MODULAR CHASSIS COMPOSITION BY USING NETWORK PHYSICAL TOPOLOGY INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for identifying internal occupants of a communications system apparatus with an Ethernet backplane and at least one internal occupant. The method comprising: verifying that a system switch processor ("SSP") has been assigned an IP address; requesting a discovery protocol data package from the SSP; determining whether the discovery protocol data package corresponds to at least one internal occupant; and if the discovery protocol data package corresponds to the at least one internal occupant, then discovering occupant information corresponding to the at least one internal occupant. The apparatus comprising the means for verifying that a system switch processor ("SSP") has been assigned an IP address; the means for requesting a discovery protocol data package from the SSP; the means for determining whether the discovery protocol data package corresponds to at least one internal occupant; and if the discovery protocol data package corresponds to the at least one internal occupant, then the means for discovering occupant information corresponding to the at least one internal occupant.
|METHOD FOR PERFORMING RADIO LINK CONTROL WITH ROUND TRIP TIME AWARENESS, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS - A method for performing radio link control (RLC) with round trip time (RTT) awareness is provided, where the method is applied to an electronic device. The method includes: dynamically estimating an index according to one or more factors; and based upon the index, dynamically adjusting a status prohibit timer value of a status prohibit timer for performing RLC. For example, the index can be an RTT of transmission/retransmission, and the step of dynamically estimating the index may further include: dynamically estimating the RTT of transmission/retransmission by detecting a time period between a first time point and a second time point, wherein the first time point represents time of sending a negative acknowledgement (NACK) status report. In another example, the index can be an RTT awareness index, where the method may include estimating the RTT awareness index according to at least one predetermined estimation function. An associated apparatus is also provided.
|DYNAMIC ALLOCATION OF CONTEXT IDENTIFIERS FOR HEADER COMPRESSION - In one embodiment, routable traffic through one or more border routers between a local computer network and a global computer network is monitored in order to characterize use of one or more global prefixes of the traffic. A particular set of the global prefixes, up to a maximum number, that are most frequently used may be mapped into a set of context identifiers (IDs) having a shorter bit-length than the global prefixes. The context IDs may then be distributed into the local computer network, and the one or more border routers convert between the context IDs and the global prefixes, accordingly.
|METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A MULTI-CARRIER SIGNAL, AND A TRANSMITTER, A RECEIVER, A SIGNAL, AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM CORRESPONDING THERETO - A method of transmitting a multi-carrier signal by a transmitter using at least two transmit antennas to at least one receiver using at least one receive antenna, the method comprising an obtaining step of obtaining at least one estimate of at least one transmission downlink channel. According to the invention, such a method comprises a transmission stage performing at least one iteration of the following steps, for at least one downlink channel: transmitting payload data over said downlink channel, while taking account of said downlink channel estimate; and updating said downlink channel estimate, while taking account of acknowledgment information acknowledging reception of said payload data and transmitted by the receiver associated with said downlink channel.
|MONITORING APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a monitoring apparatus includes a communication unit and a determination unit. The communication unit is configured to calculate a first indicator value and a second indicator value, the first indicator value relating to a received signal strength at a time when a packet transmitted from a first wireless device is received, the second indicator value relating to a received signal strength at a time when carrier sense is executed. The determination unit is configured to determine a state of the first wireless device to be one of three or more states, by performing a state determination using the first indicator value and the second indicator value, with a current state of the first wireless device being set as a basic point.
|SYSTEM MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT - Systems for monitoring and managing devices within a monitored system are described. The system can include a gateway device that is connected to the monitored system and configured to determine whether or not it remains connected to the monitored system. The gateway device is coupled to a network and can function to collect data about the monitored and manage devices within the monitored system and send the collected data over the network. The gateway device can also function to manage a managed device within the monitored system by controlling the functioning of the managed device. The gateway device can generate instructions for managing the managed device or receive instructions for managing the managed device over the network.
|DETERMINING HEARABILITY IN A HETEROGENOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for determining whether a radio unit in a shared cell configuration is hearable by a user equipment is provided. Transmission of a probe message to the user equipment by the radio unit is caused. The probe message invokes a probe response from the user equipment if the radio unit is hearable by the user equipment on a downlink channel. The radio unit is hearable by the user equipment if the downlink channel performance between the radio unit and the user equipment meets a predetermined signal criteria. An uplink channel associated with the user equipment is monitored for the probe response from the user equipment after transmission of the probe message. Hearability data associated with the user equipment is determined based on the monitored uplink channel. The hearability data indicates whether the radio unit is hearable by the user equipment the downlink channel.
|SYSTEM, METHOD AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR NETWORK DATA FLOW MEASUREMENT - Implementations of a method, program product and system are disclosed for network data flow measurement. In implementations, the method comprises steps of receiving, by one or more computers and a network link, network traffic sampling data through the network link, and obtaining, using the one or more computers, bandwidth data carried on the network link. A further step is provided of determining a scaling factor, using the one or more computers, based at least in part on a comparison of the bandwidth data through the network link and the network traffic sampling data through the network link. The network traffic sampling data is scaled, using the one or more computers, based at least in part on the scaling factor to obtain scaled network traffic sampling data. This scaled network traffic sampling data may be communicated electronically.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for controlling Discontinuous Reception (DRX) by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The UE receives a DRX configuration parameter from an evolved Node B (eNB), and determines whether to start an on-duration timer based on the DRX configuration parameter, after a change in DRX cycle is completed in a subframe, thereby preventing system performance degradation caused by transmission mismatch between the eNB and the UE.
|Systems and Methods for Reducing Audio Latency - Provided are systems and methods for providing reduced audio latency in wireless communications. One electronic system providing reduced audio latency includes a host unit for converting audio data, a digital interface coupling the host unit and a wireless transceiver, where the wireless transceiver has a controller including a rate adapter, and where the controller is configured to monitor a rate mismatch between the host unit and the wireless transceiver and to compensate for the rate mismatch using the rate adapter, thereby reducing the audio latency. One controller includes an audio codec for encoding and decoding the audio data, where the controller is further configured to align a frame of encoded audio data and a transmission packet of the wireless transceiver, thereby further reducing the audio latency.
|Methods and Apparatuses for Measurement Gap Pattern for Carrier Aggregation - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises retuning a receiver of a user equipment (UE) to a first bandwidth at a first mini gap of a gap pattern wherein the first bandwidth covers at least one active component carrier and at least one inactive component carrier; taking measurements of the at least one inactive component carrier; and retuning the receiver to a second bandwidth at a second mini gap of the gap pattern wherein the second bandwidth covers at least the one active component carrier, and wherein a length of the first mini gap and a second length of the second mini gap are short and independent of a duration for taking the measurements.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BROADBAND OVER POWER LINE MULTIPLE INTERFACE DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - An aircraft systems interface unit includes a multiplexer and a broadband over power line (BPL) modem. The multiplexer includes a plurality of inputs and an output for outputting data received through the plurality of inputs. Each input is configured for connection to at least one aircraft data bus. The BPL modem is coupled to the output of the multiplexer and configured to transmit data received from the multiplexer over a power line.
|FRAME ANALYSIS - A NEW WAY TO ANALYZE SERIAL AND OTHER PACKETIZED DATA - An aspect of the invention includes a machine. The machine can receive data and determine a logical subdivision of the data. The machine can then identify frames within the data, based on the logical subdivision of the data. The machine can then display the frames to the user for visual comparison.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING SESSION BASED ON GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE TUNNELING PROTOCOL NETWORK - The present invention includes creating a session in response to a session setup request for a general packet radio service (GPRS) application service, receiving GTP packet data using GPRS tunneling protocol (GTP) tunnel, performing decoding on the GTP packet data, determining whether there is an attack attributable to malicious behavior based on a predetermined management DB, identifying the type of the GTP packet data as the type of GTP packet for attacked GTP packet data and the type of GTP packet for non-attacked packet data based on a result of the determination, carrying out a predetermined policy for the identified type of GTP packet, performing the standardization of the packet data of each GTP version, determining whether the standardized packet data has been registered with a hash buffer in accordance with the type of pairing message for each command, and processing a session based on a result of the determination.
|WIDE AREA TRANSPORT NETWORKS FOR MOBILE RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS AND METHODS OF USE - Wide area transport networks for mobile Radio Access Networks, and methods of use are provided herein. An exemplary wide area transport network may include a plurality of network segments that include at least one wireline network and at least one wireless network communicatively coupled with one another. Each of the plurality of network segments may be configured to transmit at least one of a plurality of signals communicated between a baseband module and a wireless transceiver.
|Event Management in Telecommunications Networks - In a telecommunications network, information about events that occur at nodes (
|Method For Transmitting Status Report Of PDCP Layer In Mobile Telecommunications System And Receiver Of Mobile Telecommunications - Disclosed is a status report transmission of the PDCP layer for a PDCP status report which can reduce radio resources, by transmitting the reception success or failure of a series of PDCP SDUs in the form of a bitmap when configuring the PDCP status report for reporting a reception status of the PDCP SDU to another party in the PDCP layer in the LTE system.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ASYMMETRIC CARRIER AGGREGATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for transmitting feedback information of an asymmetric frequency band in a wireless communication system supporting multiple bands are provided. The feedback information transmission method includes, when at least two frequency bands used by a mobile station includes at least one asymmetric frequency band, confirming feedback channel information for the asymmetric frequency band based on system channel information of the asymmetric frequency band, and transmitting feedback information for the asymmetric frequency band over the confirmed feedback channel. The feedback channel information includes feedback channel information for the asymmetric frequency band allocated to a symmetric frequency band.
|RELAY APPARATUS, VIRTUAL MACHINE SYSTEM, AND RELAY METHOD - According to an embodiment of the application, a relay apparatus includes a destination storage unit configured to store the information about a destination of a multicast packet in association with a multicast address; a determination unit configured to determine whether the destination of the multicast packet is a first physical machine on the basis of the destination information stored in the destination storage unit in a migration process in which a virtual machine operating on the first physical machine is migrated to a second physical machine; and an addition unit configured to add information about the second physical machine to the destination information in the destination storage unit, the destination information corresponding to the multicast address that indicates the destination of the first physical machine, if the determination unit determines that the destination of the multicast packet is the first physical machine.
|MONITORING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores therein a monitoring program that causes a computer monitoring data transmission from a transmission source device to a transmission destination device to execute a process that includes detecting data transmitted in a sequence that differs from a specified sequence; determining whether the sequence that differs is permissible by a specified constraint, if data transmitted at the sequence that differs is detected at the detecting; and outputting a determination result obtained at the determining.
|BRIDGE ROUTING MODULE - A bridge routing module can be incorporated into a closed network fabric, such as a vehicular network. The bridge routing module includes an interface circuit to be coupled to other elements of the closed network fabric, for example other bridge routing modules or switch modules. The bridge routing module includes memory to store information associating packet content types with packet routing parameters, among other things. A processing module included in the bridge routing module analyzes packets to identify the type of content carried by the packets, and determines packet routing parameters based on the packet's content type. Ingress and egress of the packet are controlled in accordance with the packet routing parameters determined by the processing module.
|Method and Arrangement for Network-Coded Bidirectional Relaying - The present invention relates to coded multidirectional relaying in a network communication system. By sending information about the processing (
|METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING A CARRIER INDICATION FIELD FOR A MULTI-CARRIER - Provided are a method and device for configuring a carrier indication field (CIF) for a multi-carrier. A method for allocating a CIF in a carrier aggregation system includes: transmitting carrier aggregation configuration information having at least one secondary component carrier to a terminal through a primary component carrier; allocating a CIF value to the primary component carrier and to the at least one secondary component carrier; and maintaining or removing a CIF value allocated to a deactivated secondary component carrier when the secondary component carrier having the allocated CIF value is deactivated.
|METHOD FOR INDICATING PORT STATES AND SWITCH - The present disclosure discloses a method for indicating port states and a switch. A main panel of the switch is provided with port indicators one-to-one corresponding to physical ports and N channel indicators. The switch further includes a main chip and a control component. The control component is configured to: receive a port state indication signal from the main chip, and parse the port state indication signal to obtain usage state information of each logical port; generate N enable signals, and control at most one enable signal to be valid at any time point; and control the states of the N channel indicators by using the N enable signals sent from the enable signal controlling module, and control the state of each port indicator according to the N enable signals and the usage state information of each logical port.
|INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An information processing apparatus readily captures packet data effective in analyzing failures that occur in a network. To accomplish this, the information processing apparatus evaluates the necessity for changing a storage condition defined in filter setting data created by a developer or the like, displays a plurality of appropriate candidates if there is an inappropriate rule, and causes a service person to select from the appropriate candidates. Further, the information processing apparatus generates a filter based on an input from the service person and appropriate filter setting data, and captures packet data using the generated filter.
|ESTIMATING MULTIMEDIA DATA PACKET BUFFERING TIME STREAMED OVER A SELECTED WIRELESS NETWORK - A computer-implemented method for estimating buffering time of multimedia data packets for efficient playout of multimedia applications by a mobile device is provided. A wireless network with highest quality of service is selected from a plurality of wireless networks based on recorded information related to multimedia calls placed by the mobile device over the plurality of wireless networks. A multimedia call is placed over the selected wireless network for the mobile device and one or more conditions related to the selected wireless network and the mobile device is monitored. Information related to the one or more conditions of the selected wireless network and the mobile device are gathered. Based on the gathered information, buffering time of multimedia data packets is estimated. Before playout, multimedia data packets that are received by the mobile device are buffered for a predetermined time period corresponding to the estimated buffering time.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIRMING DELIVERY IN A MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVING APPARATUS - An apparatus for simultaneously receiving incoming messages on at least two channels in a multi-channel device, wherein a first incoming message is received on a first channel of the at least two channels according to a first protocol. Responsive to receiving the first incoming message, outgoing messages are transmitted on the first channel while the incoming messages are simultaneously received on a second channel. The outgoing messages to be sent according to the first protocol are queued in a transmitter. The transmitter also monitors at least one data stack that is used for transmitting messages according to a second protocol for transmit opportunities. Responsive to detecting a transmit opportunity, the transmitter transmits an optimal number of the outgoing messages within the duration of the transmit opportunity. The outgoing messages are transmitted on the first channel without affecting incoming messages received on the second channel.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATION FEEDBACK IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus for feeding back channel quality indication in a communication system. First, a first channel quality indication index is determined in dependence upon a channel quality estimation of a first transmission channel, and a second channel quality indication index is determined in dependence upon a channel quality estimation of a second transmission channel. A differential channel quality indication index of the second channel quality indication index is determined with reference to the first channel quality indication index in dependence upon a differential compression scheme. Then, the first channel quality indication index and the differential channel quality indication index are reported.
|TESTING TOLL-FREE DATA SERVICE CAMPAIGNS - A device may receive information that identifies a toll-free data service campaign to be tested. The device may receive information that identifies a network to be used to test the toll-free data service campaign. The device may deploy the toll-free data service campaign on the network by deploying a campaign rule, associated with the toll-free data service campaign, that identifies a condition for charging a content provider, associated with the toll-free data service campaign, for data used by a mobile device in association with the toll-free data service campaign. The device may determine a testing criteria for testing the toll-free data service campaign on the network. The device may test the toll-free data service campaign on the network using the testing criteria. The device may determine a test result based on testing the toll-free data service campaign, and may provide information that identifies the test result.
|AP LOCATION QUERY - Embodiments for providing a query for location information for access points (APs) proximate to a reporting AP are generally described herein. A station may include a processor arranged to generate a Location Configuration Information (LCI) request having subelements arranged to query a reporting AP for a LCI report that includes location information regarding APs proximate to the reporting AP and a transceiver, coupled to the processor, the transceiver being arranged to send to the reporting AP the generated LCI request for the LCI report that includes location information regarding APs proximate to the reporting AP.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RELAYING DATA USING A PLURALITY OF RELAY NODES - Provided is a method and system for relaying data using a plurality of relay nodes. The method may include obtaining a first channel matrix related to a first-hop channel and a second channel matrix related to a second-hop channel, generating an effective interference channel matrix based on the first channel matrix and the second channel matrix, and calculating a null space vector of the effective interference channel matrix.
|AUTOMATIC UPDATES TO FABRIC ALERT DEFINITIONS - For automatic updates to fabric alert definitions, a method monitors fabric alert definitions defined for a storage area network having a plurality of switches and a plurality of fabrics. The fabric alert definitions define alert conditions within the storage area network relevant to events occurring within one or more of the plurality of fabrics. The method further detects one or more changes to the plurality of fabrics by discovering relationships between each fabric and each switch within the storage area network and comparing current relationships against previous relationships. In addition, the method automatically modifies fabric alert definitions having a reference to changed fabrics responsive to detection of the one or more changes to the plurality of fabrics.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK MONITORING AND TESTING USING SELF-ADAPTIVE TRIGGERS BASED ON KPI VALUES - Embodiments are directed to systems and methods for network monitoring and testing using self-adaptive Key Performance Indicator to establish thresholds to trigger alarms in network monitoring. The present embodiments will be described in the context of calculating KPIs for call detail records (CDRs) and using the KPIs for network monitoring.
|ROOT-CAUSE APPROACH TO PROBLEM DIAGNOSIS IN DATA NETWORKS - An improved root-cause approach to problem diagnosis in data networks in the form of a method comprising the steps of: associating each metric in a at least one set of metrics with at least one component and/or network device; obtaining values for each such metric from a monitoring system; determining whether each such metric is indicative of a problem within the data network; and ranking and correlating indicative problems to determine whether a problem may be symptomatic of another problem based on an interconnection and/or interdependency between a physical machine and a virtual machine, between components or between components and network devices.
|MANAGING AN ASSIGNMENT OF UNICAST TRAFFIC CHANNELS TO ACCESS TERMINALS PARTICIPATING IN A MULTICAST SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In an embodiment, an access terminal sends a multicast session registration request to an access network. The access network determines whether to assign a unicast traffic channel (e.g., media access control (MAC) identifier (ID)) to the access terminal, for the access terminal to provide feedback (e.g., channel quality indicators (CQIs) associated with the multicast session, based on a number of access terminals that have been assigned unicast traffic channels for the multicast session and/or for applications other than the multicast session. The access network configures a traffic channel assignment message to include an identifier for the multicast session, and to further include an assignment of the unicast traffic channel if the determining step determines to assign the unicast traffic channel to the access terminal. The access network sends the traffic channel assignment message to the access terminal including at least the multicast session identifier.
|METHOD FOR MONITORING A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method for monitoring a communication system, comprising: acquiring and storing data about timeout events or faulty transfers in connection with at least one signaling process in at least one first communication terminal (
|COMMUNICATION DURATION CONFIGURING METHOD, RELAY STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication duration configuring method is used in a mobile communication system including a mobile relay station for relaying a wireless communication between a base station and a mobile station. The method includes: configuring at least any of a downlink communication duration where the relay station receives a transmission signal from the base station by restricting a transmission of a signal from the relay station to the mobile station and an uplink communication duration where the relay station transmits a transmission signal to the base station by restricting a transmission of a signal from the mobile station to the relay station; and restricting a transmission of a signal with the mobile station in a first period from detection of a handover until when the communication duration is configured between the relay station and a target base station, and using a desired duration within the first period.
|DEVICES FOR ENABLING HALF-DUPLEX COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication device for enabling half-duplex communication is described. The wireless communication device includes a processor and instructions stored in memory that is in electronic communication with the processor. The wireless communication device receives an indicator. The wireless communication device also determines a half-duplex frame structure with a regular uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) switching pattern based on the indicator. The half-duplex frame structure includes at least one UL subframe group including one or multiple consecutive UL subframes and at least one DL subframe group including one or multiple consecutive DL subframes. The wireless communication device further receives DL information in at least one of the DL subframes. The wireless communication device additionally sends UL information in at least one of the UL subframes.
|TRAFFIC MATRIX COMPUTATION FOR PACKET NETWORKS - Systems in the current art provide capacity planning for packet networks. These systems require input data that characterizes traffic demands. The demands may be expressed as matrixes that record the number of bytes and packets exchanged between access routers or service nodes for each type-of-service. This invention defines a system and method to calculate these traffic matrixes. Access routers in a service node export flow records to a Record Collector. The flow records are processed to create ingress and egress records that are stored on the Record Collector. This data is uploaded to a Capacity Planning Server at which the traffic matrixes are generated. The egress access router(s) for a flow are determined by searching for matching ingress and egress records. Matching records have identical source and destination addresses. This algorithm requires no knowledge of the complex topology and routing protocols that are used within packet networks. Sampled or non-sampled flow records may be used. The concepts in this invention may also be used to calculate traffic matrixes for virtual private networks (VPNs).
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT SPECIFIC PILOT SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT SPECIFIC PILOT SIGNAL POWER BOOSTING - A method and apparatus are described for providing improved channel estimation for wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) that require improved channel estimation (e.g., cell edge WTRUs) by allocating additional resource elements (REs) as pilot signals to improve channel estimation. These additional REs may be allocated to be used with expanded reference signals (ERSs).
|METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING STATUS REPORT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting and receiving a status report in a mobile communication system and a transmitter for the same are disclosed. A method of transmitting a status report in a mobile communication system includes triggering transmission of one status report, constituting the status report by using at least two status data blocks, which include reception status information of a plurality of data blocks transmitted from a transmitting side and indication information indicating that the data blocks are included in the status report, and transmitting the at least two status data blocks to the transmitting side.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MONITOR DISTRIBUTION IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present invention is directed towards systems and methods for monitoring services in a multi-core system. The systems and methods distribute the monitors for a service and the ownership of a service across the cores of the multi-core device. The greater resources of the multi-core device process the workload of the monitors for the services and the workload for monitoring the states of the services more efficiently than a single packet engine on a core.
|TRAFFIC MONITORING BY LOWEST TRANSMISSION LAYER MARKING - A monitoring system is provided for monitoring transport of data through interconnected nodes for processing data packets in a communication system, wherein said data packets conform to a layered transmission protocol, the system comprising: (1) a marking node for marking a packet selected according to a marking rule by placing a monitoring indicator in the lowest protocol layer thereof, said data packet having a first number of protocol layers, (2) at least, one packet processing node for forming a data packet based or the marked packet, such that said formed data packet comprises a second number of protocol layers that is different from said first number of protocol layers and such that said indicator is in the lowest protocol layer of said formed data packet, and (3) a monitoring node for monitoring said transport of data on the basis of the indicators in data packets that have passed through the at least one packet processing node.
|Balancing Clients Across Bands in a Single Access Point - Balancing client load on an access point in a wireless digital network. An access point tracks the number of connected users and accepts new connections only if the number of connected users is below a preset threshold. The number of connected users may be tracked on an access point wide basis, a per-band basis, a per-BSSID basis, or a combination. Similarly, accepting new connections may be done on an access point wide basis, a per-band basis, a per-BSSID basis, on the basis of client 802.11 capabilities, or a combination.
|DYNAMIC NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A method comprises monitoring a network for an event. The network includes wireless access points through which wireless users access the network and a plurality of virtual service communities allocated to one or more of the wireless access points. Each virtual service community (VSC) is configured for one or more network services. The network services associated with one VSC includes at least one network service that is different than the network services of another VSC. The method further comprises detecting the event; and based on the occurrence of the detected event, performing an action that includes dynamically allocating a VSC to an access point.
|ADAPTIVE BUFFER ALLOCATION MANAGEMENT - Aspects of adaptive buffer allocation management are described. In one embodiment of adaptive buffer allocation management, data is received by a network component for communication to a network address. While awaiting transfer to the network address, the data must be stored or distributed to a buffer. In one embodiment, the data is distributed evenly about banks of the buffer when an amount of utilization of the buffer is low. In another embodiment, the data is distributed to certain banks of the buffer when the amount of utilization of the buffer is high. In other aspects, the amount of utilization of the buffer is monitored while data is distributed to the banks of the buffer, and the manner of data distribution among the banks is adapted based on the utilization. According to aspects the of adaptive data distribution, a buffer of reduced size may be used.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMPENSATING FOR TIME-BASED SAMPLING BY SAMPLE PACKET ELIMINATION DURING EXPORT OF SAMPLED PACKETS - Methods and apparatus for compensating for time-based sampling using packet elimination are disclosed herein. An example method may be implemented in a network device communicatively connected to a network. The method may include: receiving a packet over the network at a monitoring point; replicating the received packet; determining whether to sample the replicated packet using a time-based sampling scheme; upon determining that the replicated packet should be sampled, queuing the replicated packet to a port of the network device; determining whether to eliminate the queued packet by comparing a configured sample rate with a current sample rate; upon determining that the current sample rate is less than the configured sample rate, exporting the queued packet from the network device; and upon determining that the current sample rate is greater than or equal to the configured sample rate, dropping the queued packet.
|LONG TERM EVOLUTION TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT AND EVENT PLANNING - A network monitoring and configuration device may be configured in a network to receive condition data from devices across the network in order to perform network-wide reconfiguration to improve the service provided by the network. By analyzing data received from across the network regarding device utilization, link utilization, and other conditions, the network monitoring and configuration device may determine whether and how to redirect traffic, adjust delivery requirements, and re-provision network resources to improve service or avoid future service degradation. The network monitoring and configuration device may also receive data from external sources, such as emergency services providers, and use such data to further determine whether and how to configure the network.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTENT TYPE CLASSIFICATION - Various embodiments illustrated and described herein include systems, methods and software for content type classification. Some such embodiments include determining a potential state of classification for packets associated with a session based at least in part on a packet associated with the session that is a packet other than the first packet of the session.
|Systems and Methods for Sharing Control Devices on an IO Network - Certain embodiments of the invention can include systems and methods for enabling the operation of multiple control devices on the same network. Each control device on a network can be configured to monitor and receive input messages from multiple IO devices on the network. The control devices may also be configured send output messages to one or more of the IO devices. According to certain embodiments, one control device may send output messages to certain IO devices while another IO device may send output messages to different IO devices. The input and output messages can both be sent via multicast according to certain embodiments.
|OPERATION MONITORING APPARATUS, CAUSE EVENT ESTIMATING METHOD FOR THE SAME, AND INFORMATION COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - An operation monitoring apparatus for estimating a cause by which a first and second observation data observed by a monitored apparatus are obtained, the operation monitoring apparatus including: an observation event receiving process unit which receives the first and second observation data transmitted from the monitored apparatus; an observation event extracting unit which extracts the first observation data, out of the first and second observation data, based on a probability that the cause occurs with respect to the first and second observation data; a cause event determining process unit which estimates the cause based on the extracted first observation data; and a cause notifying process unit which outputs data indicating the estimated cause.
|METHOD OF NETWORK MANAGEMENT BY ASSISTANCE FROM TERMINAL USING CONTROL-PLANE SIGNALING BETWEEN TERMINAL AND NETWORK - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate network management and optimization. As described herein, a network and a device communicating with the network can exchange network management information, thereby supporting a Self Organized Network (SON) architecture for improved network management and optimization performance. A Non-Access Stratum (NAS) layer protocol and/or an Internet Protocol (IP) application, in combination with a set of associated network management messages, can be utilized to exchange network management information between a device and a network. As further described herein, various procedures can be utilized to install a SON policy to a device in order to define device behavior for operations such as collecting and reporting information related to network management. Additionally, a set of standardized events can be defined, based on which a device can detect the occurrence of an event and report the occurrence to an associated network.
|Method and Arrangement in a Telecommunication System for Handling Status Information of Data Units - A method is provided in a receiving node for handling status information of data units transmitted from a sending node to the receiving node over a radio link. The receiving node establishes (
|Communication Control Apparatus, Wireless Communication Apparatus, Communication Control Method and Wireless Communication Method - The communication control apparatus
|Method to Improve the Performance of a Computer Network - A method is disclosed for indicating a status of a transfer of data from a first device to a second device over a network. In one embodiment, the data includes one or more data frames. Each frame includes a header having one or more bits. The method includes setting a last bit of the one or more bits in the header of a last frame of the one or more data frames to a first value if the status of the transfer of data is good and setting the value of the last bit of the last data frame to a second value if the transfer of data failed. This results in a less congested, more efficient network.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MANAGE POWER CONSUMPTION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICES - Methods and apparatus to manage power consumption in wireless devices are disclosed. A disclosed example apparatus comprises performing a first received signal strength indicator (RSSI) scan to determine a beacon interval and a first beacon time for a wireless channel, calculating a second beacon time for the wireless channel based on the beacon interval and the first beacon time, and performing a second RSSI scan for the wireless channel during a time interval that includes the calculated second beacon time. In some examples, the wireless channel is a wireless channel that was previously identified as active, is a wireless channel that previously had the highest received power level, and/or is selected from a list of popular or frequently used channels. Additionally or alternatively, when a wireless channel with sufficient signal level is identified, scanning for additional channels is not performed.
|METHOD, UE AND BASE STATION FOR SENDING OR RECEIVING FEEDBACK INFORMATION OF DOWNLINK DATA - A method for sending feedback information of downlink data, which is applied to a user equipment in a multi-carrier wireless communication system, including: receiving downlink data sent on a plurality of downlink component carriers by a base station; detecting whether the downlink data are correctly received on the plurality of downlink component carriers respectively, and generating a plurality of acknowledge signals corresponding to the plurality of component carriers according to detection results; and selecting corresponding Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH) resources to send the feedback information of the downlink data to the base station according to correspondence relationship between the total number of the plurality of acknowledge signals and the maximum Component Carrier index number that is configured, wherein the feedback information comprises the total number of the plurality of acknowledge signals.
|WIRELESS SCAN AND ADVERTISEMENT IN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - An electronic device performs a scan of each wireless channel in a sequence of wireless channels to detect advertising frames transmitted from other electronic devices. When performing the scan, the electronic device waits for a next transmit time. After the next transmit time, the electronic device configures the electronic device to monitor a next wireless channel from the sequence of wireless channels. The electronic device then monitors the next wireless channel for the advertising frames for a scanning time interval, wherein a duration of the scanning time interval is set in accordance with one or more transmit times used for transmitting advertising frames on the wireless channels in the sequence of wireless channels. When wireless channels from the sequence of wireless channels remain to be scanned, the electronic device returns to wait for a next transmit time.
|System and Method of Interactive call control for calls and connections created in different communication networks - A method and system for interactive call control for calls and connections created in different communication networks provide a solution of controlling communication connections originated from different terminals and sources such as landline and mobile phones, soft and hardware based SIP phones, Skype, gTalk or similar communication tools by using the same unified user interface. This method and system employ a desktop computer, tablet or even mobile device equipped with cross-platform application client to send call control commands and to monitor the state of controlled connections through encrypted communication channel with the application server. This server will abstract each terminal in unified way and represent it as a standard SIP enabled device which could be controlled remotely from desktop terminal (DT). Users use drag-and-drop graphical user interface (GUI) to initiate different call control commands such as but not limited to different types of conference and transfer, call initiation, call pickup and monitor the status of controlled calls.
|ENABLING COEXISTENCE BETWEEN FDD AND TDD WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for detecting and mitigating interference between from a wireless time division duplex (TDD) communications device and a wireless frequency division duplex (FDD) communications device includes processing quality-indicator reports received from the FDD device to determine if the FDD device has experienced interference from the TDD device. Such interference may be mitigated by adjusting a downlink configuration of the FDD base station in communication with the FDD device. To detect and mitigate interference from an FDD device to a TDD device, it is determined if a monitored value of an operational parameter of the FDD device is within a fixed range of a maximum value of the operational parameter, and if so, a specific time interval or frequency of the FDD device is assigned for communication purposes. Similar interference detection and mitigation techniques may also be used for interference scenarios between two TDD systems including TDD devices.
|WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a wireless communication apparatus and a wireless communication method capable of reducing power consumption without delay of data transmission and reception. The wireless communication apparatus according to the invention includes a reception unit which receives a DRX instruction information destined for the wireless communication apparatus and a monitor process number including a sub-frame number used to monitor a PDCCH destined for the wireless communication apparatus; and a monitoring process unit which monitors the PDCCH destined for the wireless communication apparatus using only sub-frames set based on the sub-frame number, when receiving an instruction to perform a DRX process by the DRX instruction information.
|CONTROL SIGNALING OPTIMIZATION FOR LTE COMMUNICATIONS - The disclosure describes procedures for allocating network resources for a mobile device communicating within a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network. The mobile device can be configured to decode a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), acquire first and second physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) decode indicators from a payload of the same PDSCH communication, decode a PDCCH for downlink control information (DCI) associated with a first application data type based on the first PDCCH decode indicator a second application data type based on the second PDCCH decode indicator. The first PDCCH decode indicator can identify an upcoming LTE subframe where the mobile device is required to decode the PDCCH for DCI associated VoLTE resource assignments and the second PDCCH decode indicator can identify an upcoming LTE subframe where the mobile device is required to decode the PDCCH for DCI associated with high bandwidth best effort (BE) data resource assignments.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TESTING MULTIPLE DIGITAL SIGNAL TRANSCEIVERS IN PARALLEL - A method for contemporaneously testing multiple digital data packet transceivers using predefined UL test sequences of synchronized data packets by pre-configuring test measurements, and multiplexing and interleaving portions of the data packets from the devices under test (DUTs).
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING TROUBLESHOOTING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided and includes identifying a change in header information within a packet of a communication flow. The change in header information reflects a predetermined type of header change that signifies a degradation condition for the communication flow. The method also includes changing a header field within an outgoing frame to initiate a trace through a network path. Diagnostic data associated with the communication flow can be collected. In more particular embodiments, the changing of the header field includes changing an Ethernet header field for a layer two frame, or changing an Internet Protocol (IP) header field for a layer three frame. Changing of the header field can also include changing a field within an outgoing layer three header to identify an IP socket associated with the communication flow. The change to the header field can be propagated by network elements along the network path.
|Methods and Apparatus for Adapting Network Characteristics in Telecommunications Systems - Methods in a network node, such as a radio base station (RBS) node or a radio network control (RNC) node, for adapting network characteristics in a telecommunications system are provided. A plurality of entities indicative of the performance of the network are measured simultaneously, by means of a single table, and one entity is selected as main entity. The measurements are stored within main entity ranges and a correlation of the measurements is performed to determine a relationship among the entities with main entity range(s). The result(s) of the correlation is used to adapt network characteristics for optimizing the network. Related network nodes are also discussed.
|METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT APPARATUS FOR RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting uplink control information. A UE identifies a resource allocated for transmission of the uplink control information. The UE monitors a downlink transmission channel during an active time when a DRX is configured. The UE starts or restarts a timer when a downlink transmission occurs during the active time. The UE transmits the uplink control information via the identified resource when the timer is running.
|Method and device for relay node access - The present disclosure provides a method and device for Relay Node (RN) access, wherein the method comprises the following steps: a base station sends a downlink message to trigger the RN to switch from monitoring a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) to monitoring an RN-dedicated Physical Downlink Control Channel (R-PDCCH), and the RN acquires time-frequency resources for an R-PDCCH from the base station, before or while receiving the downlink message. The present disclosure enables an RN to switch from transmitting according to indication on the PDCCH to transmitting according to indication on the R-PDCCH, i.e., the RN switches from being in a connection state as the UE to being in a connection state as an RN. The present disclosure makes less change to the existing flows, offering advantages of easy implementation, flexible configuration, etc.
|RADIO MEASUREMENT COLLECTION METHOD AND RADIO TERMINAL - A radio measurement collection method using UE configured to perform a process of retaining a measurement log including a measurement result of a radio environment according to a measurement configuration set by a measurement configuration message received from a network includes a step S
|Accelerating Data Packet Parsing - Mechanisms are provided for a network processor comprising a parser, the parser being operable to work in normal operation mode or in repeat operation mode, the parser in normal operation mode loading and executing at least one rule in a first and a second working cycle respectively, the parser in repeat operation mode being operable to repeatedly execute a repeat-instruction, the execution of each repeat corresponding to one working cycle.
|INTEGRATING MULTIMEDIA CAPABILITIES WITH CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CALLS - The present invention monitors call signaling events stemming from a circuit-switched call between a caller and a called party and controls a packet-session between user agents on respective endpoints associated with the caller and called party. The endpoints may include any type of computational device capable of facilitating the packet-session over a packet-switched network. Control of the user agents may be provided via a proxy for the user agents and may use the session initiation protocol (SIP), or like session control protocol for communications.
|NODE MONITORING APPARATUS, NODE MONITORING METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - There is provided a node monitoring apparatus including: a node identification unit that identifies a function of a node present in a network; a parameter setting unit that sets a parameter for monitoring processing on the node in accordance with the function identified by the function identification unit; and a node monitoring unit that performs the monitoring processing on each of the nodes based on the parameter set by the parameter setting unit.
|INFRASTRUCTURE FOR PROFESSIONAL RADIOCOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A professional radiocommunication network infrastructure operating in packet mode, the infrastructure including a site controller with a specified geographic area including at least one base station capable of ensuring radio transmission and reception with at least one user terminal found in at least one cell attached to the base station and centralized management means including at least one centralized application configured to communicate with a first application in the terminal; centralized supervision means configured to detect if the infrastructure is in a nominal or isolated operating state; and centralized means for associating with a centralized packet network to establish access between the at least one centralized application and the first application during operation of the infrastructure detected according to a nominal state; the site controller including at least one local communication application configured to communicate with a second application in the user terminal; local supervision means configured to detect if the infrastructure is in a nominal or isolated operating state; user terminal authentication and control means configured to authenticate the user terminals belonging to the professional network; a distribution gateway configured to ensure radio reception and transmission with the at least one base station; and local means for attachment to a local packet network to establish access between the local communication application and the second application during operation of the infrastructure detected according to an isolated state.
|TIME AND FREQUENCY ACQUISITION AND TRACKING FOR OFDMA WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Obtaining a timing reference in wireless communication is facilitated when desiring to communicate with a weak serving base station (such as an evolved NodeB) in the presence of a stronger interfering base station. The user equipment (UE) may track a stronger interfering base station's timing, or the UE may track a timing that is derived by a composite power delay profile (PDP) from multiple base stations. The composite PDP may be constructed by adjusting individual base station PDPs according to a weighting scheme. The timing obtained in such a manner may be used for estimation of the channel of the interfering base station and cancelling interfering signals from the base station. It may also be used to estimate the channel of the serving base station after adding a backoff. The UE may track a stronger interfering base station's frequency, or the UE may track a composite frequency.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR JOINT HARQ AND DRX OPTIMIZATION FOR LOW COST MTC DEVICES - A method for wireless communication may include a mobile entity receiving a timing indicator for a discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle during a DRX mode, and adjusting at least an acknowledgement timing in response to receiving the timing indicator for the DRX cycle. A base station in communication with the mobile entity may provide a timing indicator for a DRX cycle during a DRX mode to the mobile entity, transmit at least one of downlink (DL) data or an uplink (UL) grant indicator to the mobile entity at a first time, and waiting from the first time for a time period indicated by the timing indicator before receiving at least one of an acknowledgement of the DL data or UL data responsive to the UL grant from the mobile entity.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING HARQ TIMING - A method for adjusting a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) timing is provided. A base station adjusts a HARQ timing of a mobile station according to a system environment, and transmits radio resource allocation information including the adjusted HARQ timing information to the mobile station. The mobile station adjusts HARQ timing according to HARQ timing information, and transmits a HARQ signal according to the adjusted HARQ timing.
|WIRELESS MULTIMEDIA TRANSPORT METHOD AND APPARATUS - Apparatus and methods for wireless data transmission in a multimedia network are disclosed. Disclosed is a network having a source coupled to a sink using a virtual channel that includes a wireless communication channel. A source end of the system provides a packetizing data stream having a stream of payloads such that each payload is associated with its respective originating source stream. The system configured to encode the packetized data stream for wireless transport. A non-wireless source end of the system receives quality of service information from downstream. Thereby enabling adjustments to the source content and packetized data streams.
|COMMUNICATING BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT (UE) AND INDEPENDENT SERVING SECTORS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A wireless communication system transmits in a High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) by having a Radio Network Controller (RNC) assign portions of data to a first serving cell and a second serving cell for transmitting to a user equipment. The first serving cell transmits data on a first downlink carrier to the user equipment. The second serving cell, which is independent from the first serving cell, transmits data on a second downlink carrier to the user equipment. In an optional aspect, the RNC receives a measurement report from the user equipment on a first uplink carrier via at least one of the first serving cell and the second serving cell.
|TECHNIQUES FOR WI-FI ACCELERATION IN RESIDENTIAL GATEWAYS - A method for acceleration of wireless communication in a residential gateway, the residential gateway enables communication between a plurality of subscriber devices connected in a wireless local area network (WLAN) and a passive optical network (PON). The method comprises pre-configuring a wireless controller to intercept networking functions programmed in a wireless stack of a wireless driver, wherein the wireless controller and the wireless driver are components of a kernel of an operating system executed by a host processor; monitoring system calls initiated by the wireless driver to the kernel; for each monitored system call, checking if a system call is a request for a networking function; and forwarding the system call for a network function to a packet processor.
|DETECTION OF UNAUTHORIZED CHANGES TO AN ADDRESS RESOLUTION PROTOCOL CACHE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for detecting an unauthorized change in an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache in a communication network includes a step of establishing an authorized ARP cache. Another step includes examining packets from a terminal for a destination address. Another step includes determining if the destination address is incorrect by using the authorized ARP cache.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PAGING GROUP HANDLING - A method and apparatus for paging group handling includes grouping wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) into a paging group. The paging group is assigned a paging occasion, and an existence of a page is indicated to the WTRUs.
|System and Method of Controlling a Wireless Radio-Frequency Network Using a Gateway Device - A system and method that create, manage, and maintain a wireless network. The system and method automatically monitor the wireless network and determine an operating status of one or more devices associated with the network. If a determination is made that a device requires attention because of an operating status determined, the system communicates a notification to a designated user providing notice of the operating status. The system may create a proxy of a non-responsive device such that other devices in the network are deceived when communicating with a non-responsive device. The system may be located by a server to enable remote management of the wireless network via the Internet. The system and method enable the creation of scenes and timed events for devices associated with the network. Information tables that provide controller set-ups regarding how the controller communicates within the network may be stored. Devices associated with the network, locations of the devices associated with the network, operating states of the devices, and other information may be determined. Information and routing tables regarding the devices may be determined and communicated to the devices.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING MEASUREMENT PATTERN IN COMP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a measurement pattern for a signal transmission/reception in a CoMP communication system, so as to provide Coordinated Multi-Point (CoMP) communication to a first User Equipment (UE) by a first evolved Node-B (eNB) and a second eNB, the method includes setting a second ABS pattern for a signal transmission/reception with a second UE transmitting/receiving a signal to/from only the first eNB for a predetermined period by the first eNB; setting a first ABS pattern, which corresponds to a subset of the second ABS pattern, as a pattern for a signal transmission/reception with the first UE; setting the subset of the first ABS pattern as a measurement pattern and transmitting the measurement pattern to the first UE; and transmitting a signal for the CoMP communication system according to the measurement pattern.
|METHOD, ARRANGEMENT AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING A DATA PATH IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A probing method, arrangement, and system for estimating a condition, such as available bandwidth, of a data path in a communication network including multiple nodes are described. A probe-packet sender node transmits probe packets with a sent inter-packet separation and a time-to-live towards an intermediate node. Control message packets are generated by the intermediate node when the time-to-live expires. The probe-packet sender node receives the control message packets and calculates a received inter-packet separation. An estimate of the data path condition can be generated based on the sent inter-packet separation and the received inter-packet separation.
|COMMUNICATION APPARATUS HAVING NETWORK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION, CONTROL METHOD FOR THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus having a communication function, which is capable of improving security while ensuring convenience in network communication using the ICMP Echo protocol. It is determined whether or not a source of a received packet is an apparatus lies in the same network as a network in which the communication apparatus is installed. According to the determination result, whether or not to respond to the received packet is judged based on one of a first judgment condition used in a case where the source lies in the same network as the network in which the communication apparatus is installed, and a second judgment condition used in a case where the source does not lie in the same network as the network in which the communication apparatus is installed. According to the judgment result, a response to the received packet is sent back.
|CORRELATION OF SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS HIERARCHICAL DATA IN LOOSELY-COUPLED DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS - A method, a server, and a management system correlate performance data in loosely coupled software, such as network and element management systems, with minimal overhead. The systems and methods can be used to determine performance bottlenecks and interdependencies between components by correlating and analyzing collected data. In an exemplary embodiment, the systems and methods can relate to network management systems (NMSs), element management systems (EMSs), and the like, which are collectively referred to herein as management systems. Management systems can include a loosely coupled software architecture that utilizes a message-based communication mechanism. As messages are processed, synchronous calls between components of the management system as employed as well. For the purpose of performance analysis and optimization, the systems and method correlate data between synchronous and asynchronous interactions as each message is processed through a management system.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING A PDCCH (PHYSICAL DOWNLINK CHANNEL) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus are disclosed for a monitoring PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel). The method includes being configured with DRX (Discontinuous Reception) at a UE (User Equipment). The method also includes performing, at the UE, a measurement on a serving cell or PCell (Primary Cell). The method further includes monitoring, at the UE, the PDCCH more frequently after detecting that the quality of the serving cell or PCell is not good or is lower than a predetermined threshold.
|System and Method for Downlink Transmission in a Wireless Network - A method of communicating in a wireless network includes transmitting, by a station, a null data packet (NDP) power save (PS)-Poll frame including a short training field and a long training field. Also, the NDP PS-Poll frame includes a signaling field including a message type indicator, a transmitter address (TA), a receiver address (RA), and a cyclic redundancy check (CRC). Additionally, the method includes receiving, by the station, buffered data in accordance with the NDP PS-Poll frame.
|TRAFFIC VISIBILITY IN AN OPEN NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A method of monitoring network traffic includes accessing a network that includes a controller and a switch device having a flow table, wherein the controller is communicatively coupled to the switch device, and is configured to program a behavior of the switch device through an openflow protocol, and obtaining information regarding the programmed behavior of the switch device, wherein the act of obtaining the information is performed by a network appliance that is communicatively coupled to the network. An apparatus communicatively coupled to a network, includes a processor configured for accessing the network that includes a controller and a switch device having a flow table, wherein the controller is communicatively coupled to the switch device, and is configured to program a behavior of the switch device through an openflow protocol, and obtaining information regarding the programmed behavior of the switch device.
|Session-Aware GTPv1 Load Balancing - Systems and methods for session-aware GTPv1 load balancing are described. In some embodiments, a method may include receiving a first message transmitted from an SGSN to a GGSN using a GTP-C protocol and storing a downlink UP TEId and IP address and a downlink CP TEId and IP address. The method may also include receiving a second message transmitted from the GGSN to the SGSN using the GTP-C in response to the first message and storing an uplink UP TEId and IP address and an uplink CP TEId and IP address. The method may further include identifying one or more messages exchanged between the SGSN and the GGSN using a GTP-U protocol as belonging to a given session in response to the one or more messages including at least one of: (i) the downlink UP TEId and IP address, or (ii) the uplink UP TEId and IP address.
|SECURE AD HOC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS ACROSS HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEMS - A method for rapid peer-to-peer link establishment among a set of mobile devices includes operating a first second device, advertising system attributes in a wireless beacon by the second device, receiving the system attributes from the wireless beacon at the first device, comparing the system attributes to a service needed by the first device, and, if the second device is compatible based on the comparing, establishing a wireless link by the first device to the second device. A system and wireless device for rapid peer-to-peer link establishment among a set of mobile devices are also described.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTING CHARACTERISTICS OF APPLICATION LAYER PROTOCOL USING SENSED INDICATION - A system and method for resource utilization in a constrained sensor gateway for transfer of data in terms of the bandwidth and energy available to transfer data. The system includes a processor in communication with the constrained sensor gateway, which includes an application layer protocol and which is in communication with a communication network, and a memory coupled to the processor. The memory includes a network condition detection module configured to detect a network condition of the constrained sensor gateway, and an adaption module configured to determine a reliability score. The application layer protocol of the constrained sensor gateway adapts a reliability level based on the reliability score determined by the adaption module, which enables better utilization of the bandwidth and energy to transfer data. The reliability level may pertain to a reliable mode, or a non-reliable mode of communication for transferring data.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIGITAL CANCELLATION SCHEME WITH MULTI-BEAM - A method and system may include a plurality of collocated access points (APs), each coupled to, and operating independently with, a respective set of antennas, wherein the antennas are directional and oriented to create beams that cover different directions, for dividing a coverage of the APs into a plurality of subsectors, wherein the antennas further comprise transmit antennas and receive antennas separated from each other, wherein the APs operate with a limited number of channels, wherein two or more of the subsectors share a common channel, wherein the APs are configured to initiate a transmission by employing collision sense multiple access/collision avoidance (CSMA/CA), wherein the antennas are configured to enable simultaneous operation of each of the subsectors without impairing operation of the others, and wherein a radio frequency (RF) energy reception between the transmit antennas and the receive antennas is configured to prevent independent subsector operation because of the CSMA/CA.
|PAGING SCHEMES FOR LOCAL NETWORK ACCESS - Paging and power consumption are managed in conjunction with providing local breakout in a wireless wide area network. In some aspects, if a packet destined for an access terminal is received at an access point that provides local breakout, the access point may inform the network so that the network will cause the access point to page the access terminal. Alternatively, in some aspects an access point that provides local breakout may maintain idle context of the access terminal, whereby the access point may autonomously page the access terminal (i.e., without involving the core network). In some aspects local breakout traffic is filtered at an access point to reduce the number of pages or packets sent to an access terminal. In some aspects an indication of a packet type is provided with a page message to enable an access terminal to determine whether to receive the packet. In some aspects a local link interface may be selectively disabled or enabled to limit traffic at an access terminal.
|METHOD FOR MONITORING A DOWNLINK CONTROL CHANNEL, AND WIRELESS DEVICE - Provided are a method for monitoring a control channel in a wireless communication system, and a wireless device. The wireless device receives a group identifier from a base station, and monitors a downlink control channel in a search space including N (N>=1) enhanced control channel elements (ECCEs) in accordance with the group identifier.
|Selecting Between Normal And Virtual Dual Layer ACK/NACK - An allocation of downlink resources is received, which are monitored on I layers for data. A resource-specific bit (ACK/NACK) is generated for each of those resources. From a pattern of those resources is selected an algorithm from among a first algorithm that bundles them in a first mode and a second algorithm that bundles them in a second mode. The selected algorithm is used on the generated resource-specific bits that correspond to the downlink resources, bundled according to the selected mode, to generate I reply bits which are then transmitted. At the network side a NACK reply bit is received, based on a pattern of the allocated downlink resources, a first algorithm that bundles them in a first mode or a second algorithm that bundles them in a second mode is selected. A bundling window and layer combination are determined from the selected algorithm, which gives the resource for retransmitting the NACK'd data.
|INACTIVITY TIMER IN A DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION CONFIGURED SYSTEM - Systems, methods and wireless devices are provided that utilize a timer to ensure a receiver of a wireless device is on to receive downlink transmissions. In the event the timer runs out without further resource allocation, the mobile device turns its radio off. If a further resource allocation occurs while the timer is running, the timer is restarted.
|COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR DETERMINATION OF REMOTE ADAPTER AND/OR NODE LIVENESS - The determination of node and/or adapter liveness in a distributed network data processing system is carried out via one messaging protocol that can be assisted by a second messaging protocol which is significantly less susceptible to delay, especially memory blocking delays encountered by daemons running on other nodes. The switching of protocols is accompanied by controlled grace periods for needed responses. This messaging protocol flexibility is also adapted for use as a mechanism for controlling the deliberate activities of node addition (birth) and node deletion (death).
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING BUFFERS FOR TRANSMITTING PACKETS - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for managing buffers. A number of buffers present in a pool of buffers assigned to a network device driver are monitored, wherein the buffers in the pool of buffers are used to process packets of data for transmission onto a network. A request is denied from a transport layer for a buffer from the pool of buffers if the number of buffers falls below a threshold level, wherein at least one buffer is present in a buffer pool if the number of buffers falls below the threshold level.
|CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT IN A PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGE TRAFFIC ENGINEERING (PBB-TE) DOMAIN - A system and method for providing Connectivity Fault Management, CFM, in a Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering, PBB-TE, telecommunication network utilizing Ethernet-based packet transport. PBB-TE point-to-point and point-to-multipoint services are identified, and PBB-TE maintenance points (
|Method and device for fast pushing unicast stream in fast channel change - The present invention discloses a method and a device for fast pushing a unicast stream in a Fast Channel Change (FCC), and relates to the field of Internet Protocol Television (IPTV). A server obtains a multicast join delay of a terminal, determines a minimum value of a data amount between a starting position of a fast unicast stream and a latest packet position according to the multicast join delay of the terminal, a decoding rate, a unicast push rate, and a lowest buffer data amount required for decoding, judges whether a latest I frame completely arrives according to a packet buffer state; and fast pushes the unicast stream starting from the latest I frame if the latest I frame completely arrives, and an arrived data amount starting from the latest I frame is greater than or equal to the minimum value.
|Best-Effort Scheduled Access - Embodiments of the invention provide a best-effort scheduled access method and system that enable nodes to request, and a hub to assign, tentative, but not committed, scheduled allocations, referred to as unscheduled bilink allocations, in which data traffic is transferred between the nodes and the hub on a best-effort basis. The tentative allocations will be available if the network of the hub still has enough bandwidth, but will be shifted or reduced otherwise. This invention unifies tentative and committed scheduled allocations in the same access framework, thereby facilitating access scheduling and offering access flexibility.
|MONITORING MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, MONITORING MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND DEVICE STORING MONITORING MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - A monitoring management apparatus may include a storage unit that stores connection information indicating a connection state of the wireless device connected to the communication system, a display unit that displays the wireless device connected to the communication system based on the connection information stored in the storage unit, an input unit that receives an instruction related to the wireless device displayed on the display unit, and a control unit that performs control of temporarily interrupting communication of a wireless device, other than a wireless device satisfying conditions set in advance, with reference to the connection information stored in the storage unit when a simultaneous interruption instruction to simultaneously interrupt communication of a wireless device is input to the input unit.
|MULTICAST FLOW MONITORING - Provided is a method of monitoring a multicast flow. An initial multicast flow is characterized as a baseline flow entity. A subsequent multicast flow is compared against the baseline flow entity to identify anomalies between the baseline flow entity and the subsequent multicast flow.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OUT-OF-LINE REAL-TIME IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT - A system for out-of-line testing of performance of a network, comprising a multiplexer at an input to the network; a demultiplexer at an output from the network; said multiplexer further comprising a traffic generator to insert synthetic traffic, and a first switch to accept an incoming customer traffic stream and join said incoming customer traffic stream with a synthetic traffic stream to form a total traffic stream, said total traffic stream fed to said input to said network; and said demultiplexer comprising a second switch to receive said total traffic stream from said output of said network, and separate said total traffic stream into the synthetic traffic stream and the customer traffic stream, and a traffic analyzer to analyze said separated synthetic traffic stream.
|Method and Device for Component Carrier Activation and Reconfiguration in a Mobile User Equipment - Methods and user equipment are provided for activation of downlink component carriers. Even though configured to monitor multiple component carriers, a user equipment unit does not start to monitor them immediately, but instead monitors only one or a few carriers initially. Once a downlink scheduling assignment is received, the user equipment unit will then monitor additional component carriers. After one or more subframes where the user equipment unit is not scheduled, the user equipment unit returns to its original state where it monitors one or a few carriers.
|METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET SERVICE DATA - A method, device and system for transmitting packet service data are provided. The method includes the steps of: receiving the packet service data transmitted by a user equipment; determining the packet service data to be uninstalled in the packet service data according to the service uninstall strategy of the user equipment; and transmitting the packet service data to be uninstalled to the packet data network via a metropolitan-area network and an internet protocol (IP) backbone network. By applying this method, the problem in the prior art is overcome, thereby saving the operation and maintenance cost of the packet network.
|TERMINAL SWITCHING METHOD, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal switching method for switching terminals, in a communication system in which HARQ processing is performed, to which a base station grants a transmission permission, from a terminal A to a terminal B includes notifying the terminal B of aborting of the transmission permission, setting a time point at which an HARQ process whose state of the HARQ processing is a retransmission waiting state with the terminal A is performed as a virtual starting point, setting a retransmission waiting window having a predetermined window length with the virtual starting point being regarded as its starting point, and notifying the terminal B of the transmission permission when there is no HARQ process having the retransmission waiting state with the terminal A, wherein the virtual starting point setting and the window setting are repeated until there is no HARQ process having the retransmission waiting state with the terminal A.
|Integrated Ethernet over Coaxial Cable, STB, and Physical Layer Test and Monitoring - In a method of testing a residential broadband communication network, a residential gateway or set top box (STB) performs one or more single-ended parametric tests of the residential network that runs therebetween. The residential gateway or STB also performs one or more single-ended reflectometry tests of the residential network that runs therebetween. The residential gateway and the STB perform one or more dual-ended tests of the residential network that runs therebetween. The residential gateway dispatches the results of the foregoing tests to either: a device on the residential network, a device of another network that supplies broadband services to the residential network, or an intelligent device coupled to the residential gateway.
|METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MBSFN SUBFRAME CONFIGURATION INFORMATION OF NEIGHBORING CELLS - Disclosed is a method for transmitting MBSFN subframe configuration information of neighboring cells in a wireless system, the method comprises steps of: transmitting, by a base station of a serving cell, MBSFN subframe configuration information of the serving cell to a UE which accepts services from the serving cell via a broadcast control channel (BCCH); transmitting, by the base station of the serving cell, information on a subset relationship of MBSFN subframe configurations of the neighboring cells relative to the MBSFN subframe configuration of the serving cell to the UE which accepts services from the serving cell via the broadcast control channel (BCCH); performing, by the UE, measurements on the neighboring cells according to the subframe configuration information of the serving cell and the information on the subset relationship of the MBSFN subframe configurations of the neighboring cells relative to the MBSFN subframe configuration of the serving cell. With the method of the present invention, the UE can learn about the MBSFN subframe configuration information of the neighboring cells in a more accurately manner. Therefore, more subframes can be measured to improve measurement precision. Meanwhile, the present invention is based on redefinition of messages in the existing method, and thus no extra signaling overhead will be introduced.
|METHOD FOR TESTING THE COMMUNICATION PERFORMANCE OF A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS SIGNAL ACCESS DEVICES - A method used for testing the communication performance of a plurality of wireless signal access devices, and the steps of the testing method of each wireless signal access device include: (a). booting up the wireless signal access device; (b). activating said the wireless signal access device to transmit or receive testing packets to test the communication performance of the wireless signal access device. The feature of the present invention lies in completing a step a of the next wireless signal access device before completing a step b of a first wireless signal access device, and starting the step b of the next wireless signal access device in an appropriate timing after completing the step b of the first wireless signal access device, thereby reaching the goal of reducing the test time.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS TO IMPROVE LOG REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to improve log reporting in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the method comprises a UE (User Equipment) being configured to perform measurement to obtain measurement information for logged MDT (Minimization of Drive-Tests) reporting. Furthermore, the method also comprises logging the obtained measurement information. The method also comprises sending a logged MDT report wherein the report omits some of the logged measurement information.
|Discontinuous Reception With User Equipment Based Mobility - A new RRC Connected (mobility) state is described in which a UE utilizes a temporary identifier to monitor a downlink control channel in accordance with a discontinuous reception cycle; and maintains the new connected state, the discontinuous reception cycle and the temporary identifier while the UE re-selects to a second/serving access node which lies within a same designated reselection area as a first/source access node. In various specific embodiments, the DRX cycle is maintained but re-aligned with a system frame number of the second access node; the temporary identifier is a CRNTI and the designated re-selection area is defined by all contiguous cells in which respective access nodes broadcast the CRNTI in system information; the UE re-selects to the second access node in the absence of control signaling; and the UE enters the new connected mobility state automatically upon expiry of a time alignment timer or upon explicit network signaling while in a different connected state.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORKING EDUCATIONAL EQUIPMENT - A system, method and computer program product for monitoring availability of end user devices needed for performing tasks. The system comprises a first network including one or more devices associated with an end user, at least one device adapted for communicating with a service provider over a second network, the service provider providing network-based services in the system. The system includes a memory storage device for maintaining information of tasks associated with an end user, the information including recommended end-user devices adapted to perform the tasks, the information being accessible to at least one end-user device. At least one end-user device detects non-availability or performance deficiencies of any end-user device required in performing end-user tasks, and communicates with the service provider for invoking network-based services to facilitate correcting non-availability of any end-user device. Such a system, method and computer program product enables students to receive these reminders and alerts, to order the necessary upgrades from suppliers via web services, and to monitor delivery from a single user interface provided on one of their devices.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION PLATFORM METADATA - A system and method that includes executing communication processes in an application platform, which comprises on behalf of outside entities, negotiating communications between a set of internal resources and at least one external resource using at least a first communication protocol and a second protocol; capturing internal log information during execution of the application platform; receiving a request to access log information by an outside entity; synthesizing the internal log information of the first protocol and at least a second protocol into a unified communication report; and transmitting the unified communication report.
|Mobile Activity Status Tracker - A technique and apparatus to provide status tracking of presence and/or location of a mobile, wireless device to a requesting entity even outside of a particular wireless system. This allows wireless service providers the ability to monitor and log changes in the status of mobile stations within and/or outside their networks. Embodiments are disclosed wherein presence and/or location information is provided to entities outside of a particular servicing wireless network using the mechanisms of call processing components of a mobile network (e.g., call setup procedures), and using standard mechanisms currently available to any appropriately conforming Mobile Switching Center (MSC) element. A mobile activity status tracker (MAST) is disclosed which contains a database of information similar to the information contained in the Home Location Register. The MAST tracks and reports status and activity of mobile wireless devices in a wireless network using mobile registration message, mobile inactivity message forwarding, and/or mobile automatic notification of subscriber status to TCP/IP entities (e.g., application servers on the Internet or Intranet). The MAST system duplicates the same or similar information contained in a corresponding HLR, but is available as an external database entity which is not restricted by SS7 standards. The tracking need not track call-specific information, e.g., called telephone numbers or information regarding conversations sustained by the tracked wireless subscribers.
|System and method for gateway call routing - Methods and apparatus are provided for routing calls or call information. A gateway may span a plurality of networks and determine call routing information based on one or more rules defining a dial plan. Various actions may be taken in response to incoming calls matching rules of the dial plan. User interfaces may be provided that allow editing and/or testing of the dial plan by an administrator.
|NETWORK PERFORMANCE ESTIMATING DEVICE, NETWORK PERFORMANCE ESTIMATING METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING A NETWORK PERFORMANCE ESTIMATING PROGRAM STORED THEREIN - A network performance estimating device for estimating network performance of a parallel computing machine for executing plural processes in parallel, includes a communication data obtaining unit that obtains communication data output from plural calculation nodes when the plural processes are executed by using the plural calculation nodes, a design estimating unit for referring to a design information storing unit that stores design information defining a network as an estimation target to execute a simulation on communications when the communication data obtained by the communication data obtaining unit are transmitted through the network as the estimation target, and renews estimation information representing an estimation result of the estimation target network stored by an estimation information storing unit on the basis of the obtained simulation result, and a communication data transmission unit for transmitting the communication data obtained by the communication data obtaining unit to an addressed calculation node.
|Method And System For Reporting Terminal Information, And Method And System For Maintaining Terminal Device, As Well As Device Management System - The invention discloses a method and a system of reporting terminal information in Device Management (DM) field. The method includes: the terminal reporting terminal information through an information reporting interface provided by a DM Agent module; the DM Agent module forwarding the terminal information to a DM Server; and the DM Server reporting the terminal information to a Maintenance Unit (MU) through a local information reporting interface. The invention also discloses a method and a system for maintaining terminal device in DM field as well as a DM system.
|ADAPTIVE SIGNALING FOR NETWORK PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT, ACCESS, AND CONTROL - Systems and methods are provided for initiation, use, access, and control of functionality of a network. In one aspect, the systems and methods can be utilized to generate information defining signaling or control performance and operational characteristics associated with the functionality in a variety of network environments. In another aspect, based on such information, adaptive signaling can be utilized to monitor, analyze and detect specific signaling signatures associated with the functionality. Managing signaling or control messages in response to information collected by monitoring and analyzing the adaptive signaling permits originating or requesting the functionality without conventional operation of a network component.
|AUTONOMOUS SELF-DISRUPTING NETWORK ELEMENT - A method, apparatus, and machine readable storage medium is disclosed for establishing a test protocol processor which identifies and removes predetermined messages from a network element port buffer. Subsequent to removal the test protocol processor may perform one or more of several actions according to the results of statistical calculations. These actions include allowing the message to drop, replacing the message after a delay, replacing the message after altering the payload of the message, and replacing the message after altering the message type. The disclosed autonomous self disrupting network element is particularly useful for providing a means to perform in situ field testing of network performance indicators under desired statistical conditions.
|SYSTEM FOR MANAGING THE SIZE OF A HARDWARE ROUTING TABLE - A system and method for managing a hardware routing table comprising monitoring usage of entries in said routing table and deleting entries based on usage criteria so as to generally keep the number of entries within a size limit, thereby conserving power.
|Inferring Packet Management Rules - Embodiments of the present invention include a system or method for inferring packet management rules of a packet management device. A probing device is used to extract at least one of port number and IP address from a packet management configuration file. The probing device classifies extracted numbers and selectively transmits packets to a packet management device. A packet analyzer notifies the probing device when a packet passes through the packet management device. Based on the notification, the probing device is able to transmit packets to the packet management device in a non-exhaustive manner and determine a port range corresponding to a packet management rule.
|CFM FOR CONFLICTING MAC ADDRESS NOTIFICATION - In one embodiment, an aggregation device operating in a computer network may have a down maintenance end point (MEP) configured on certain of its user-to-network interface (UNI) ports. These down MEPs may then receive continuity check messages (CCMs) from down MEPs configured on customer edge (CE) devices, where each CCM has a media access control (MAC) address of a corresponding CE device UNI port from which the CCM is transmitted. In response to detecting conflicting MAC addresses between CE device UNI ports based on the CCMs, the aggregation device may notify the CE devices corresponding to the conflicting MAC addresses of the conflict.
|Method of Maintaining Multiple Timing Advance - A method of managing multiple timing advance (TA) groups, maintaining multiple TA timers, and performing UL synchronization in a multi-carrier wireless system is provided. When a new component carrier (CC) is configured, it is assigned to a TA group having a TA group identifier. The TA groups are managed statically or dynamically. The TA group identifier is used to uniquely identify the TA group in the operations of uplink (UL) timing synchronization. Multiple TA timers are assigned to multiple TA groups. The TA timers may have different values for different TA group. Different embodiments of UL timing adjustments for multiple TA groups are provided.
|SIGNALING MIMO ALLOCATIONS - The present invention relates to demodulation of radio signals from a base station having collocated transmit antennas, and more particularly to signaling allocation information from a base station to a mobile terminal. The allocation information may include timeslot and code information of allocation to other mobile terminals. Some embodiments of the present invention facilitate a mobile terminal's ability to receive and demodulate a signal containing multiple interfering signals by communicating codes allocated to other mobile terminals.
|METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MAC PDUs - With respect to generating and sending a MAC PDU by using the radio resources allocated to the mobile terminal, the level of priority between the buffer status report (BSR) and the established logical channels are defined such that the data of each logical channel and buffer status report can be more effectively, efficiently and quickly transmitted.
|WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND SIGNAL DETECTION CIRCUIT - A wireless communication device that includes a wireless communication unit that performs a wireless communication in a first mode using a first frequency band serving as a first communication channel, and performs the wireless communication in a second mode using a second frequency band including the first communication channel and a second communication channel that is adjacent to the first communication channel. Also included is a detection unit that monitors each of the first frequency band and the second frequency band, outputs a first detection signal when an interference signal is detected in the first frequency band and outputs a second detection signal when the interference signal is detected in the second frequency band. Further included is a determination unit that determines whether the interference signal is in the first communication channel or in the second communication channel based on the first and second detection signals.
|TROUBLESHOOTING CLIENT ROAMING - In an example embodiment, a service that analyzes location information of a client as the client roams. For example, whenever a trigger event occurs, such as a change in the association state, a change in Internet Protocol (IP) address, etc., a determination is made whether the event was expected. If the event was not expected, the location of where the trigger event occurred can be determined enabling a network administrator to investigate roaming problems at a particular location.
|CDMA To Packet-Switching Interface for Code Division Switching in a Terrestrial Wireless System - An access radio port is provided that includes means for spreading a payload data signal, extracted from an ATM packet, with a uniquely assigned orthogonal code, means for transmitting the spread payload data signal to one of a group of mobile subscriber terminals located within a microport cell of a wireless terrestrial network, and means for releasing the uniquely assigned orthogonal code. In another aspect, a mobile subscriber terminal, configured to be located within a microport cell of a terrestrial wireless network that interfaces with an access radio port, is provided. The mobile subscriber terminal includes means for receiving an assignment of a unique orthogonal code, means for spreading a payload data signal by the unique orthogonal code, means for modulating and forwarding the spread payload data signal to the access radio port, and means for releasing the assignment of the unique orthogonal code.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION AND/OR DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION FOR A MULTI-CARRIER/MULTI-CELL OPERATION - Method and apparatus for multi-carrier/multi-cell discontinuous reception (DRX)/discontinuous transmission (DTX) operations, autonomous deactivation of the secondary carrier(s)/cell(s), and explicit activation/deactivation of DRX/DTX and secondary carriers/cells are disclosed. A user equipment (UE) may configure at least one state variable for controlling DRX and/or DTX on a plurality of cells and perform an DRX and/or DTX operation on a subset of cells based on a state variable associated with the subset of cells on a cell group basis. The UE may activate or deactivate DRX and/or DTX based on an order from a network for all cells, a group of cells, or an individual cell. The UE may deactivate the secondary cells autonomously based on activity on the cell(s).
|MICROWAVE DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INSTRUCTING ACM SWITCHING IN HSM SYSTEMS - A method for instructing an Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) switching is provided, which is applied in a microwave communication system configured with an ACM function and a Hitless Switch Mode (HSM) function. The method includes: obtaining signal quality of an active link and signal quality of a standby link; generating an ACM switching instruction according to the better one between the signal quality of the active link and the signal quality of the standby link; and transmitting the ACM switching instruction to a transmitting device of the active link. A device and a system are also provided. Through the method, device and system, the available bandwidth of a link is fully utilized when the signal quality of the standby link is better than the signal quality of the active link.
|MODEM AND METHOD OF CONNECTING A COMPUTER TO THE INTERNET USING THE MODEM - A method for connecting a computer to the Internet checks if an original media control access (MAC) address in a received data packet is identical with a MAC address of a certain computer that has been allocated an IP address. If the original MAC address in the received data packet is not identical with the MAC address of the certain computer, the method sends an address resolution protocol (ARP) request to detect if the certain computer is shut down. If the certain computer is shut down, the method replaces the original MAC address in the received data packet by the MAC address of the certain computer, so as to connect the computer that sends the received data packet to the Internet using the IP address of the certain computer.
|REAL-TIME SERVICE MONITORING APPARATUS AND METHOD USING TIME STAMP - A real-time service monitoring apparatus and method using a time stamp is provided. The real-time service monitoring apparatus includes: a packet reception and classification block configured to generate a first time stamp whenever receiving a packet, and classify the received packet into a time synchronization packet or a real-time monitoring packet; a packet processing and switching block configured to process the classified packet depending on whether the packet is the time synchronization packet or the real-time monitoring packet, and switch the processed packet to a destination address; a packet classification and transmission block configured to classify the switched packet depending on whether the packet is the time synchronization packet or the real-time monitoring packet, generate a second time stamp for the classified packet, and transmits the packet; and a real-time monitoring block configured to compute a real-time monitoring parameters for each flow using the generated first and second time stamps, in order to monitor the real-time service.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS TO DETERMINE A CFI (CONTROL FORMAT INDICATOR) VALUE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus are disclosed determine a CFI value in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the method comprises configuring system devices, such as a UE or an eNB, with a plurality of component carriers for carrier aggregation. Furthermore, the method comprises receiving PDSCH on a first component carrier. The method also comprises transmitting a corresponding PDCCH on a second component carrier. In addition, the method comprises using a RRC signal to configure a CFI with an initial configured value. The method further comprises setting the CFI so that the CFI could be used to determine a starting point of the PDSCH.
|CARRIER PRECONFIGURATION FOR PDCCH MONITORING IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for carrier preconfiguration for monitoring for transmissions of downlink control information (DCI), for example, conveyed in physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) transmissions utilizing multiple carriers. The methods and apparatuses described herein may be applied in both frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD) systems.
|LOCATION OF MOBILE NETWORK NODES - The physical position of a movable node in a network is determined by sending a first signal from a first reference node to at least a second reference node and the unknown node. The unknown node receives the first signal and sends a second signal to at least the second reference node in phase with the first signal. The first signal and the second signal are received in the second reference node and the phase of the received signals is compared to determine the position of the unknown node based on the phase difference between the received first and second signals.
|CHANNEL ESTIMATE PRUNING IN PRESENCE OF LARGE SIGNAL DYNAMICS IN AN INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION REPEATER - A method for estimating a feedback channel for a wireless repeater detects changes in a power of a remote signal. When a large power swing in the remote signal is detected, the method operates to discard samples or blocks of samples of the pilot and receive signals and a final channel estimate is generated using undiscarded samples of the pilot and receive signals. Alternately, sub channel estimates are generated using individual blocks of the pilot samples and receive samples. When a large power swing in the remote signal is detected, the method operates to discard one or more sub channel estimates and a final channel estimate is generated using undiscarded sub channel estimates.
|NETWORK LOAD ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION FOR CELLULAR NETWORKS - Various embodiments estimate network load in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, at least one call detail record associated with a wireless communication network is received. A topology representing the network is analyzed. The topology includes a plurality of nodes each representing a network element within the wireless communication network. The topology also includes a plurality of edges between two or more of the plurality of nodes. Each of the plurality of edges indicates that the two or more plurality of nodes are communicatively coupled to each other within the network. A set of paths is identified between two or more nodes in the plurality of nodes corresponding to a set of call flow information within the at least one call detail record. A state of each network element represented by the two or more nodes in the set of paths is determined based on the call detail record.
|METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR NOTIFYING A UE OF MONITORED COMPONENT CARRIERS - The present invention provides a method for notifying a UE of monitored component carriers. The method comprises the following steps: an evolved Node B (eNB) sends an monitoring changing instruction and Component Carriers (CC) corresponding to the instruction to a UE with a Media Access Control (MAC) layer control command; according to the monitoring changing instruction and the corresponding CC, the UE activates or deactivates monitoring of the corresponding CC. The present invention allows the MAC PDU for instructing the UE to increase, decrease or change the monitored CC. Therefore, the configuration can be achieved in a simple and flexible manner and has higher reliability.
|METHOD FOR JOINING A NETWORK, AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FRAMES - A beacon-based network, a method for joining a network, and a method and an apparatus for transmitting frames are disclosed. The beacon-based network includes: a device node, configured to carry superframe time sequence indication information in a data frame and/or command frame and send the frame during the process of communicating with a coordinator node; and a pending node, configured to: monitor a packet transmitted in a network, and request to join the network according to a beacon if the beacon is monitored; obtain beacon information, which includes superframe time sequence indication information, from a monitored data frame or command frame after monitoring the data frame or command frame, and request to join the network through a monitored network operating channel according to the beacon information. The foregoing technical solution shortens the time spent by the pending node in monitoring the beacon, and reduces the time spent by the pending node in requesting to join the network.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EXTRACTING MEDIA FROM NETWORK TRAFFIC HAVING UNKNOWN PROTOCOLS - Methods and systems for analyzing network traffic. An analysis system receives network traffic, which complies with a certain protocol. The received network traffic carries a data item, which may be of value to an analyst. In order to access the data item in question, the analysis system automatically identifies the media type of the data item, by processing the network traffic irrespective of the protocol. The analysis system identifies the media type irrespective of the protocol in order to avoid the computational complexity involved in decoding the protocol.
|Method and Apparatus Pertaining to the Assessment of Mobile Communications Network Infrastructure Latency Through High-Speed Channels - A network monitoring apparatus in a mobile communications network monitors, for a predetermined time, TCP packets in the network that tend to comprise end-user traffic using the high-speed data path but not the low-speed data path to provide monitored packet information. The network monitoring apparatus uses this monitored packet information to identify the fastest end user-experienced communication exchanges within the mobile communications network. By one approach, the network monitoring apparatus effectively filters out most or all of the end-user traffic that uses the low-speed data path when providing that monitored packet information. This can comprise, for example, tending to utilize data pertaining to TCP packets that correspond to higher traffic volume (and hence that are likely being conveyed via a high-speed data path) while also tending to discard data that pertains to TCP packets to that correspond to low traffic volume (and hence that are likely being conveyed via a low-speed data path).
|METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ESTIMATE THE SENDER'S CONGESTION WINDOW THROUGHOUT THE LIFE OF A TCP FLOW (SOCKET CONNECTION) - Network monitoring method and apparatus estimates the congestion window throughout the life of a TCP flow (socket connection), providing information useful for network performance analysis and troubleshooting.
|METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTINGUISHING AND SAMPLING BI-DIRECTIONAL NETWORK TRAFFIC AT A CONVERSATION LEVEL - Network traffic is distinguished at a conversation level, providing sampling decision capability. A hash value is determined based on IP addresses and protocol type, giving unique identifiers for individual conversations.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPRESSING A DELAY IN MONITORING COMMUNICATION - A management apparatus acquires state information indicating a state of a monitoring target by communicating with the monitoring target through a first monitoring path at a monitoring timing for monitoring the monitoring target, and detects a use state of the first monitoring path. Upon determining, based on the use state, that a delay is expected to occur in at a next monitoring timing, the management apparatus changes the first monitoring path to a second monitoring path different from the first monitoring path, and communicates with the monitoring target through the changed second monitoring path.
|COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RESOURCE REALLOCATION METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A resource reallocation method that can suppress variations in reception delay time in reservation-type scheduling and a communication device using the method are provided. In a radio communications system in which a radio resource is reserved to periodically perform a communication between communication devices, the number of retransmissions of a packet transmitted to a communication device using the reserved radio resource (Step S
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIMPLIFYING PROTOCOL ANALYSIS - A system and method in accordance with exemplary embodiments may include receiving, from a user system, one or more protocol analysis request messages via a network, transmitting, to one or more multipurpose interface devices, one or more control signals based on the one or more protocol analysis request messages, receiving, from the one or more multipurpose interface devices, protocol analysis data associated with data traffic transmitted on one or more test networks in response to the transmitted control signals, and outputting, to the user system, the protocol analysis data via the network.
|PERFORMANCE PATTERN CORRELATION - A method includes identifying a plurality of network components in a network topology of a data transmission network, identifying data transmission performance patterns based on at least one key performance indicator (KPI) for each of the plurality of network components, identifying at least one data transmission issue in the network, and identifying a model degraded performance pattern associated with the at least one data transmission issue. The method may also include matching the model degraded performance pattern to the data transmission performance patterns to form matched performance patterns, and identifying a root-cause component from the network components based on the matched performance pattern.
|INDIVIDUALLY UNIQUE KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATOR MANAGEMENT - Individually unique key performance indicator management may be utilized to enhance performance in a network. A warning alarm threshold for a key performance indicator associated with a mobile device may be determined. And upon receiving an alert message indicating that the warning alarm threshold has been exceeded, a network device may be modified.
|BROADBAND DIAGNOSTICS SYSTEM - A broadband diagnostics system provides the capability to collect, store and recall historical data for the purpose of comparing to current and existing network elements and conditions. The system allows testing, troubleshooting, tracking, identifying and logging information pertaining to cable, xDSL, FTTx and other networks, and their associated elements. The system also provides identification and testing of network elements deployed at various customer premises, behind a demarcation device.
|INTERFERENCE MEASURING AND MAPPING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS USING RELAY STATIONS - Interference levels occurring at one or more stations in a wireless network, where each of said one or more stations is a base station or a relay station. The measured interference levels are mapped by building a first matrix including noise plus interference occurring at each of the one or more stations, respectively, and scheduled transmissions at predetermined times by each relay station respectively are mapped by building a second matrix. The first matrix and the second matrix are multiplied in order to determine the noise plus interference impact upon each base station by each relay station so that a network schedule can be generated in order to increase bandwidth efficiency in the network.
|Counting method and network control device - A counting method pre-establishes a user equipment information record and a user number threshold in a cell. The method includes: A. informing UEs in the cell where multimedia broadcast and multicast service is transmitted about the beginning of the counting, receiving a response from the UEs, and recording the responded UE records into the UE information record; B. monitoring the cell, and updating the UE information record when determining that a UE having a varied communication behavior in the cell; C. according to the UE number in the UE information record and the user number threshold in the cell, determining whether to trigger a re-counting or not, and if yes, returning to Step A; otherwise, returning to Step B. A network control device includes a storage module, a control module, and a communication module. Through the technical solution, the accuracy for determining the MBMS operation transmission mode at the network side is improved.
|ADAPTIVE SIGNALING FOR NETWORK PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT, ACCESS, AND CONTROL - Systems and methods are provided for initiation, use, access, and control of functionality of a network. In one aspect, the systems and methods can be utilized to generate information defining signaling or control performance and operational characteristics associated with the functionality in a variety of network environments. In another aspect, based on such information, adaptive signaling can be utilized to monitor, analyze and detect specific signaling signatures associated with the functionality. Managing signaling or control messages in response to information collected by monitoring and analyzing the adaptive signaling permits originating or requesting the functionality without conventional operation of a network component.
|Methods, Devices and Computer Readable Storage Devices for Intercepting VoIP Traffic for Analysis - VoIP traffic is intercepted for analysis. Packets transmitted from a mobile communication device over a radio access network to a core mobile communications network are intercepted. VoIP packets are detected within the intercepted packets. The detected VoIP packets are stored for analysis, and the intercepted packets are forwarded to a gateway in communication with a packet data network.
|APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FILTERING IP PACKET IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus, method, and system for filtering an Internet Protocol (IP) packet in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes receiving an IP packet from a network, determining whether the received IP packet is an IP packet unallowable by an application Central Processing Unit (CPU), and when the received IP packet is determined to be an IP packet unallowable by the application CPU, generating an IP packet indicating that the received IP packet is unallowable and transmitting the generated IP packet to the network.
|COMPUTER TELEPHONY HEADSET WITH PRESENCE INDICATOR - A telephone headset is provided which includes a presence status indicator thereon for signaling to other persons the user's availability and/or willingness to communicate face-to-face.
|MULTIPLE LINE COMMUNICATIONS FOR LOCOMOTIVE CONSIST - A method for controlling data communication within a locomotive consist is disclosed. The method may include monitoring an effect of a first interference generated by a first pair of wires on a second pair of wires during a communication. The method may also include monitoring an effect of a second interference generated by the second pair of wires on the first pair of wires during the communication. The method may further include dividing data packets to he sent from the first access point to the second access point such that a first subset of the data packets are designated for the first pair of wires and a second subset of the data packets are designated for the second pair of wires and modifying the first subset of the data packets to reduce the effect of the first interference.
|Loop Detection For Mobile IP Home Agents - The present invention relates to a method and computer-readable medium for loop detection in data packet communication utilizing a tunnel in a network comprising a plurality of nodes. The method comprises the steps of, when a first node transmits a data packet, encoding an identification of the first node in at least two header fields of the data packet to be transmitted, and when the first node receives a data packet, analysing the at least two header fields of the data packet, deciding if a loop exists by determining if the data packet was sent by the first node itself, based on the analysis of the at least two header fields of the data packet.
|Methods and systems for distributed calculations of latency variation - Methods and systems for calculating latency variations in a distributed manner, including the steps of: calculating, by first and second switches, first and second local latency variations, of first and second streaming sessions, at first and second output ports of the first and second switches, respectively. Receiving, by the third switch, the first and second local latency variations; wherein a first and second paths of the first and second streaming sessions, respectively, are passing through a third output port of the third switch after passing through the first and second output ports, respectively. And calculating, by the third switch, a third local latency variation of the first streaming session at the third output port, based on the first and second local latency variations.
|Methods and systems for incremental calculation of latency variation - Methods and systems for calculating local latency variations in an incremental manner, including the steps of updating a first local latency variation of a first streaming session at a first output port of a first switch; identifying a relationship that the first streaming session is passing through a second output port of a second switch after passing through the first output port; wherein a second streaming session is passing through the second output port; and updating a second local latency variation of the second streaming session at the second output port, based on the relationship. Wherein the updated second local latency variation is calculated based on the updated first local latency variation.
|METHOD FOR REPORTING MBMS INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for reporting multimedia broadcast and multicast service (MBMS) information by a terminal in a wireless communication system. The method comprises: determining whether or not to perform the logging of MBMS information; logging the MBMS information if the logging is determined to be performed; and reporting the logged MBMS information to a network. Whether or not to perform the logging of the MBMS information is determined on the basis of the reception status or provision status of MBMS from the network.
|TEST APPARATUS, TEST METHOD, WAVEFORM GENERATOR AND WAVEFORM GENERATING METHOD - A test apparatus for testing a device under test including a receiving circuit for receiving signals transmitted through a communication cable is provided. The test apparatus includes: a waveform generating section for outputting waveform data to define a waveform to be provided to an input terminal of a receiving circuit; a digital filter having the filter characteristic substantially reverse to the attenuation characteristic of the communication cable, for outputting amplified waveform data obtained by amplifying the waveform data; a DA converter for converting the amplified waveform data to an analog waveform; and a low-pass filer having the attenuation characteristic substantially same as that of the communication cable, for attenuating the analog waveform and providing the same to the receiving circuit.
|FORWARD LINK ACKNOWLEDGMENT IN A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications in a machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless Wide Area Network (WAN). An event is detected that indicates a condition of a forward link in the M2M wireless WAN. A data rate is selected to transmit an acknowledgment (ACK) message. The selection of the data rate is based at least in part on the detected event that indicates the condition of the forward link. The ACK message is transmitted on the forward link in the M2M wireless WAN according to the selected data rate.
|Method and Apparatus for Testing Mobile Terminals in an OFDM System - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for testing mobile terminals in an OFDMA system, in which all or part of available downlink radio resources in a cell are transmitted. A processing unit in a test apparatus splits a set of contiguous resource blocks into separate contiguous portions. A first contiguous portion of the set of resource blocks is allocated to users of a first type, and a second contiguous portion of the set of resource blocks is allocated to users of a second type. A transmitter in the test apparatus transmits test signals to the users of the first type and the second type using the at least one contiguous set of resource blocks.
|NOTIFICATION METHOD, ACCESS POINT, STATION, AND WIRELESS SYSTEM - A notification method, an access point (AP), a station (STA), and a wireless system are disclosed. The notification method includes checking whether a power event occurs, and notifying the power event to an STA if the power event occurs. According to the present invention, the STA can learn about the power event, which helps the STA to decide on the subsequent action according to the power event.
|APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PRIORITIZING A MANAGEMENT FRAME OF A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus to enable configuring of a management frame priority and security type. The method and the apparatus may set a priority level and a transmission data rate of a management frame. The apparatus includes a memory including a priority queue for each management frame and a transmitter to transmit said management frame according to the priority queue of said frame.
|Method and device for monitoring MCCH notification information, and user equipment - The present invention discloses a method for monitoring Multicast Control Channel (MCCH) notification information, comprising: in a Multicast-Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) cell that includes more than two MCCHs, when user equipment (UE) determines that the required MBMS service is not started, the UE further determines whether there is a correspondence relationship between the required MBMS service and the MCCHs, if yes, the UE just monitors the notification information of the MCCH corresponding to the required MBMS service; otherwise, the UE monitors the notification information of all the MCCHs in the MBSFN cell. The invention also discloses a device for monitoring MCCH notification information and user equipment. The present invention guarantees that the UE can timely receive an MBMS service that is not started currently in a cell with overlapped MBSFN areas.
|METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MAINTAIN CALL CONTINUITY - Example methods and apparatus to maintain call continuity are disclosed. A disclosed example apparatus to control a user equipment (UE) mode includes the UE to initiate a tracking area updating (TAU) procedure in an evolved packet system (EPS) mobility management (EMM) connected (EMM_CONNECTED) mode, a state monitor to identify a lack of a voice service in response to the TAU procedure being successful, and a bearer monitor to identify a bearer context, the UE to stay in the EMM_CONNECTED mode until radio bearers associated with the bearer context are released.
|CONTROLLING WIRELESS TRANSITION TIMERS BASED ON APPLICATION AND CONTENT - Techniques for adaptively controlling wireless transition timers associated with wireless transition states in relation to use of applications by user equipment (UE) are presented herein. A UE can include a transition management component (TMC) that can adaptively control wireless transition timers associated with wireless states based on application type, session content, or other factors. The TMC monitors data flow associated with an application and, for a current or subsequent communication session, controls the length of wireless transition timers and switching between wireless states to improve UE, application, and/or network performance while maintaining QOE for the user. The TMC can access a timer look-up table that maps wireless transition timers to application type, content type, user behavior, or other factors. The TMC also can desirably control maintaining persistence or always-on connections by controlling switching between wireless states using the adapted wireless transition timers.
|METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROCESSING MULTIPLE CONTROL AND USER DATA FLOWS AT A PORT PROCESSOR - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for processing multiple control and user data flows at a port processor are disclosed. According to one method, the method occurs at a testing platform. The method includes concurrently receiving, via a communications interface of the testing platform, a first control plane flow and a second control plane flow. The method also includes concurrently processing the first control plane flow and the second control plane flow using a port processor of the testing platform.
|MONITORING METHOD OF MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A multi-hop wireless network monitor method for monitoring a state of a multi-hop wireless network including a plurality of nodes, the method includes: transmitting a packet that stores monitor data indicating a state or performance of a first node and identification information that identifies the first node; rewriting the monitor data stored in the packet with the monitor data detected by a second node and rewriting the identification information stored in the packet with the identification information that identifies the second node in the second node when the monitor data detected by the second node is worse than the monitor data stored in the packet; and specifying a node in the worst state or performance in a propagation route of the packet according to the identification information stored in the packet.
|MANAGING SESSIONS FOR DIRECT DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses can involve receiving, from a network node, a radio resource control (RRC) configuration message that includes configuration information for a first user equipment (UE) for an inter-device session (IDS) between the first UE and a second UE, the UE1 configuration information including an inter-device session (IDS) radio network identifier.
|SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MONITORING THE SETUP OF AN IP TELEPHONY COMMUNICATION - When an IP telephony system is attempting to setup a telephony communication between a calling party and a called party, the system monitors to determine if any audio or video is played to the calling party as early media. If so, the detected early media may be analyzed to determine one or more characteristics of the early media. The analysis may determine if early media is designed to cause the calling party to prematurely terminate the call setup attempt.
|LAWFUL INTERCEPTION IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK WITH DATA OFFLOAD AT THE BASESTATION - Lawful interception (LI) is supported on a flat mobile data network with breakout services at the basestation. A first service mechanism at the basestation is prevented from breaking out services for subscribers that are part of LI. A second service mechanism in the core network maintains a subscriber list of subscribers that are subject to LI. In response to a PDP context activation by a subscriber on the list, the second service mechanism does not supply PDP context information to the first service mechanism for data breakout thus preventing breakout for the subscriber subject to lawful interception.
|METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK OF NETWORK MONITORING DEVICES - Network traffic information for nodes of a first logical hierarchy is stored at a monitoring device according to ranks of the nodes within the logical hierarchy as determined by each node's position therein and user preferences. At least some of the network traffic information stored at the network monitoring device may then be reported to another network monitoring device, where it can be aggregated with similar information from other network monitoring devices. Such reporting may occur according to rankings of inter-node communication links between nodes of different logical hierarchies of monitored nodes.
|SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPARATUS TO MONITOR MOBILE INTERNET ACTIVITY - Systems, methods, and apparatus to monitor mobile Internet activity are disclosed. An example method comprises determining, with a processor, whether a device is communicatively coupled to a WiFi network, the WiFi network identified by a Service Set Identifier. Whether proxy settings are configured on the device in association with the WiFi network is identified. Registration information is transmitted from the device to a registrar if the proxy settings are not configured, the registration information comprising a classification of the WiFi network and the Service Set Identifier. The proxy settings of the WiFi network are configured based on instructions received from the registrar, the instructions to cause the device to transmit network communications using the proxy settings when communicatively coupled to the WiFi network.
|Onboard Wireless Performance Testing - A method and associated wireless monitor and data analysis system are provided. The method includes installing one or more of a plurality of wireless monitors at respective locations onboard a complex system on which a wireless system of interest is installed or planned for installation. The method may then include by the plurality of wireless monitors, emulating the wireless system of interest, and recording data related to performance of the wireless system of interest at one or more recorded times over a plurality of operating conditions of the complex system. The method may also include by the plurality of wireless monitors, collecting data including the respective locations of the wireless monitors correlated with respective recorded data and recorded times. In this regard, the collected data for the plurality of wireless monitors may be retrievable for analysis of the wireless system of interest based thereon.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SINGLE FREQUENCY DUAL CELL HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS - A system and method provide single frequency, dual cell high-speed downlink packet access to a UMTS telecommunications system. A first downlink channel is provided from a first sector, and a second downlink channel is provided from a second sector, wherein the first downlink channel and the second downlink channel are in substantially the same carrier frequency. Feedback information such as a CQI and/or a PCI is provided on an uplink channel to facilitate adaptation of the respective downlink channels. Here, the uplink carrier may be in the same or a different carrier frequency than that of the downlink channels.
|Device Assisted Multi-Step Adaptive Discontinuous Reception (DRX) Operations Using Power Preference Indicator - Examples of power conservation management for user equipment based on the operating state of the user equipment are provided. A user equipment may implement a power managing application that monitors the activity of the user equipment, such as the number of applications open on the user equipment, the data usage requirements for each open application, data delay tolerances for each application and/or a level of user interaction with the device at a given moment. Based on the level of activity and the data requirements, the managing application on the user equipment is able to make a discontinuous reception profile setting recommendation selected from more than two discontinuous reception profiles to the mobile communications network entity. In response to the discontinuous reception profile setting recommendation, the network entity may modify the connection status with the user equipment.
|SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONSERVING POWER IN LINK AGGREGATION GROUPS - A system and method of reducing power consumption in a network switching unit includes detecting whether conditions are suitable for reducing power consumption in a first network switching unit. The first network switching unit includes a link aggregation group (LAG) and a plurality of communication ports, each communication port configured to couple the first network switching unit to a second network switching unit using a corresponding network link selected from a plurality of network links, and wherein the plurality of network links are assigned to the LAG. The system and method further includes requesting network link deactivation by sending a link deactivation request to the second network switching unit, determining whether the link deactivation request is approved, determining a first network link selected from the plurality of network links to deactivate, deactivating the first network link from use by the LAG, and reducing power supplied to the first network link.
|REDUCING CHANNEL OVERHEAD IN A WIRELESS COEXISTENCE NETWORK - A system composed of a device configured to communicate, using a first wireless protocol, with a node. The system also comprises a processor coupled to the device and configured to determine whether the node operates in a coexistence mode. If the processor determines that the node operates in a coexistence mode then, as a result, the processor determines when the node operates in the first wireless protocol and communicates, by way of the device and without solicitation from the node, with the node when the node operates in the first wireless protocol.
|ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING LOOP IN ELECTRONIC APPARATUS - [Object] To provide an electronic apparatus capable of easily detecting a terminal that forms a loop connection state with a simplified configuration.
|MULTI-STATION PHYSICAL LAYER COMMUNICATION OVER TP CABLE - Wired data telecommunications networks can make advantageous use of a communications capability between and among more than two network devices. Such capabilities may be utilized in providing redundancy of data and/or inline power capabilities from a pair of network devices to a third network device receiving the redundant capability. Impedance modulated communications are provided in a wired data telecommunications network among at least a first, second and third network device coupled together via a Y device. The Y device couples the three network devices (higher order Y devices could couple more than three devices) allowing monitoring of communications and inline power provision so that one of the network devices may act in response to monitored conditions by communicating via impedance modulated communications with one or both of the other network devices.
|MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system in accordance with the present invention is a system in which a mobile communication terminal
|Wireless communication device, wireless communication method, and computer program - An own-group storage area in which beacon information concerning a group of the own device is stored and an other-groups storage area in which beacon information concerning other groups different from the group of the own device is stored are allocated to a memory area of a wireless communication device in a network. The wireless communication device includes storage means for storing the beacon information concerning the other groups in the own-group storage area and the other-groups storage area in the same structure as that of the beacon information concerning the group of the own device.
|AUTO-COMPRESSION FOR MEDIA OVER IP - The present invention allows communicating devices to control the amount of compression used in packet sessions for transmitting streaming media to and from each other. When a communicating device detects a decrease in performance or quality of service indicative of a limited bandwidth condition, the amount of compression for the current or subsequent sessions is temporarily increased to allow the currently available bandwidth to support the session or subsequent sessions. After a set period of time, or when the limited bandwidth condition is removed, communications associated with the sessions can revert back to transporting uncompressed data or reducing the amount of compression for the sessions, thus using more of the available bandwidth.
|WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication terminal under the control of a wireless base station recursively has wireless base station capabilities in a parent network, constructs a daughter network within a scope of resources of the own apparatus assigned by the wireless base station, and assigns the resources to an other communication terminal under the control of the communication terminal having base station capabilities. This novel constitution allows to configure two or more networks guaranteed not to interfere each other, thereby allowing the coexistence of a plurality of personal area networks on a same frequency channel. At the same time, the novel constitution allows expanding a network area without increasing the scale of equipment.